RB HMA Foreword.qxp 2014 Accent

User Manual: 2014-accent

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 406 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

RB HMA foreword
RB HMA 1
RB HMA 2
RB HMA 3
RB HMA 4
RB HMA 5
RB HMA 6
RB HMA 7
RB HMA 8
RB HMA INDEX

All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication.

However, Hyundai reserves the right to make changes at any time so that

our policy of continual product improvement may be carried out.

This manual applies to all models of this vehicle and includes descriptions

and explanations of optional as well as standard equipment. As a result, you

may find material in this manual that does not apply to your specific vehicle.

OOWWNNEERR''SSMMAANNUUAALL

Operation

Maintenance

Specifications

Information Provided by:

Your Hyundai should not be modified in any way. Such modifications may adversely affect the per-

formance, safety or durability of your Hyundai and may, in addition, violate conditions of the limited

warranties covering the vehicle. Certain modifications may also be in violation of regulations estab-

lished by the U.S. Department of Transportation and other federal or state agencies.

Your vehicle is equipped with electronic fuel injection and other electronic components. It is possible

for an improperly installed/adjusted two-way radio or cellular telephone to adversely affect electronic

systems. For this reason, we recommend that you carefully follow the radio manufacturer's instruc-

tions or consult your Hyundai dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions if you choose

to install one of these devices.

CAUTION: MODIFICATIONS TO YOUR HYUNDAI

TWO-WAY RADIO OR CELLULAR TELEPHONE INSTALLATION

Information Provided by:

This manual includes information titled as WARNING, CAUTION and NOTICE.

These titles indicate the following:

✽✽ NOTICE

This indicates that interesting or helpful information is being provided.

SAFETY AND VEHICLE DAMAGE WARNING

WARNING

This indicates that a condition may result in harm, serious injury or death to you or other

persons if the warning is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the warning.

CAUTION

This indicates that a condition may result in damage to your vehicle or its equipment if the

caution is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the caution.

Information Provided by:

FOREWORD

Thank you for choosing Hyundai. We are pleased to welcome you to the growing number of discerning people who drive Hyundais.

The advanced engineering and high-quality construction of each Hyundai we build is something of which we're very proud.

Your Owner's Manual will introduce you to the features and operation of your new Hyundai. It is suggested that you read it care-

fully because the information it contains can contribute greatly to the satisfaction you receive from your new car.

The manufacturer also recommends that all service and maintenance on your car be performed by an authorized Hyundai deal-

er. Hyundai dealers are prepared to provide high-quality service, maintenance and any other assistance that may be required.

HYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA

Note : Because future owners will also need the information included in this manual, if you sell this Hyundai, please leave the man-

ual in the vehicle for their use. Thank you.

system or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written permission of Hyundai Motor America.

CAUTION

Severe engine and transaxle damage may result from the use of poor quality fuels and lubricants that do not meet Hyundai

specifications. You must always use high quality fuels and lubricants that meet the specifications listed on Page 8-4 in the

Vehicle Specifications and consumer information section of the Owner's Manual.

Information Provided by:

Guide to Hyundai Genuine Parts

1. What are Hyundai Genuine Parts?

Hyundai Genuine Parts are the same

parts used by Hyundai Motor

Company to manufacture vehicles.

They are designed and tested for the

optimum safety, performance, and reli-

ability to our customers.

2. Why should you use genuine parts?

Hyundai Genuine Parts are engi-

neered and built to meet rigid manu-

facturing requirements. Using imita-

tion, counterfeit or used salvage parts

is not covered under the Hyundai New

Vehicle Limited Warranty or any other

Hyundai warranty.

In addition, any damage to or failure of

Hyundai Genuine Parts caused by the

installation or failure of an imitation,

counterfeit or used salvage part is not

covered by any Hyundai Warranty.

3. How can you tell if you are purchas-

ing Hyundai Genuine Parts?

Look for the Hyundai Genuine Parts

Logo on the package (see below).

Hyundai Genuine Parts exported to

are packaged with labels written only

in English.

Hyundai Genuine Parts are only sold

through authorized Hyundai Dealerships.

A100A01L A100A02L A100A04L

A100A03L

Information Provided by:

Introduction

Your vehicle at a glance

Safety features of your vehicle

Features of your vehicle

Driving your vehicle

What to do in an emergency

Maintenance

Specifications, Consumer information,

Reporting safety defects

Index

table of contents

Information Provided by:

How to use this manual / 1-2

Fuel requirements / 1-3

Vehicle break-in process / 1-5

Vehicle data collection and event data recorders / 1-6

Introduction

Information Provided by:

Introduction

We want to help you get the greatest

possible driving experience from your

vehicle. Your Owner’s Manual can assist

you in many ways. We strongly recom-

mend that you read the entire manual. In

order to minimize the chance of death or

injury, you must read the WARNING and

CAUTION sections in the manual.

Illustrations complement the text in this

manual to best explain how to use your

vehicle. By reading your manual, you will

learn about features, important safety

information, and driving tips under vari-

ous road conditions.

The general layout of the manual is pro-

vided in the Table of Contents. A good

place to start is the index; it has an alpha-

betical listing of all information in your

manual.

Sections: This manual has eight sections

plus an index. Each section begins with a

brief list of contents so you can tell at a

glance if that section has the information

you want.

You will find various WARNINGS, CAU-

TIONS, and NOTICES in this manual.

These WARNINGS were prepared to

enhance your personal safety.You should

carefully read and follow ALL procedures

and recommendations provided in these

WARNINGS, CAUTIONS and NOTICES.

✽✽ NOTICE

A NOTICE indicates interesting or help-

ful information is being provided.

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

WARNING

A WARNING indicates that a condi-

tion may result in harm, serious bod-

ily injury or death if the warning is

ignored.

CAUTION

A CAUTION indicates that a condi-

tion may result in damage to your

vehicle if the caution is ignored.

Information Provided by:

Introduction

Your new vehicle is designed to use only

unleaded fuel having a pump octane

number ((R+M)/2) of 87 (Research

Octane Number 91) or higher.

Your new vehicle is designed to obtain

maximum performance with UNLEADED

FUEL, as well as minimize exhaust emis-

sions and spark plug fouling.

Gasoline containing alcohol and

methanol

Gasohol, a mixture of gasoline and

ethanol (also known as grain alcohol),

and gasoline or gasohol containing

methanol (also known as wood alcohol)

are being marketed along with or instead

of leaded or unleaded gasoline.

Do not use gasohol containing more than

10% ethanol, and do not use gasoline or

gasohol containing any methanol. Either

of these fuels may cause drivability prob-

lems and damage to the fuel system.

Discontinue using gasohol of any kind if

drivability problems occur.

Vehicle damage or drivability problems

may not be covered by the manufacturer’s

warranty if they result from the use of:

1. Gasohol containing more than 10%

ethanol.

2. Gasoline or gasohol containing

methanol.

3. Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.

"E85" fuel is an alternative fuel com-

prised of 85 percent ethanol and 15 per-

cent gasoline, and is manufactured

exclusively for use in Flexible Fuel

Vehicles. “E85” is not compatible with

your vehicle. Use of “E85” may result in

poor engine performance and damage to

your vehicle's engine and fuel system.

HYUNDAI recommends that customers

do not use fuel with an ethanol content

exceeding 10 percent.

FUEL REQUIREMENTS

CAUTION

Never add any fuel system cleaning

agents to the fuel tank other than

what has been specified. (Consult

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for

details.)

WARNING

• Do not "top off" after the nozzle

automatically shuts off when

refueling.

• Tighten the cap fully clockwise

until it clicks one time and stops

turning, otherwise the fuel cap

open warning light " " will illu-

minate.

• Always check that the fuel cap is

installed securely to prevent fuel

spillage in the event of an acci-

dent.

CAUTION

Never use gasohol which contains

methanol. Discontinue use of any

gasohol product which impairs dri-

vability.

CAUTION

Your New Vehicle Limited Warranty

does not cover damage to the fuel

system or any performance prob-

lems caused by the use of “E85” fuel.

Information Provided by:

Introduction

Gasoline containing MMT

Some gasoline contains harmful man-

ganese-based fuel additives such as

MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese

Tricarbonyl).

HYUNDAI does not recommend the use

of gasoline containing MMT.

This type of fuel can reduce vehicle per-

formance and affect your emission con-

trol system.

The malfunction indicator lamp on the

cluster may come on.

Do not use methanol

Fuels containing methanol (wood alco-

hol) should not be used in your vehicle.

This type of fuel can reduce vehicle per-

formance and damage components of

the fuel system.

Fuel Additives

HYUNDAI recommends that you use good

quality gasolines treated with detergent

additives such as TOP TIER Detergent

Gasoline, which help prevent deposit for-

mation in the engine. These gasolines will

help the engine run cleaner and enhance

performance of the Emission Control

System. For more information on TOP

TIER Detergent Gasoline, please go to the

website (www.toptiergas.com).

For customers who do not use TOP Tier

Detergent Gasoline regularly, and have

problems starting or the engine does not

run smoothly, additives that you can buy

separately may be added to the gasoline.

If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not

available, one bottle of additive added to

the fuel tank at every 7,500mile or every

engine oil change is recommended.

Additives are available from your author-

ized HYUNDAI dealer along with informa-

tion on how to use them. Do not mix other

additives.

Operation in foreign countries

If you are going to drive your vehicle in

another country, be sure to:

• Observe all regulations regarding reg-

istration and insurance.

• Determine that acceptable fuel is avail-

able.

CAUTION

Your New Vehicle Limited Warranty

may not cover damage to the fuel

system and any performance prob-

lems that are caused by the use of

fuels containing methanol.

Information Provided by:

Introduction

No special break-in period is needed. By

following a few simple precautions for the

first 600 miles (1,000 km) you may add to

the performance, economy and life of

your vehicle.

• Do not race the engine.

• While driving, keep your engine speed

(rpm, or revolutions per minute)

between 2,000 rpm and 4,000 rpm.

• Do not maintain a single speed for long

periods of time, either fast or slow.

Varying engine speed is needed to

properly break-in the engine.

• Avoid hard stops, except in emergen-

cies, to allow the brakes to seat prop-

erly.

• Do not let the engine idle longer than 3

minutes at one time.

VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCESS

CALIFORNIA PROPOSI-

TION 65 WARNING

Items contained in motor vehicles

or emitted from them are known to

the State of California to cause can-

cer and birth defects or reproduc-

tive harm. These include:

• Gasoline and its vapors

• Engine exhaust

• Used engine oil

• Interior passenger compartment

components and materials

• Component parts which are sub-

ject to heat and wear

In addition, battery posts, terminals

and related accessories contain

lead, lead compounds and other

chemicals known to the State of

California to cause cancer and

reproductive harm.

Information Provided by:

Introduction

This vehicle is equipped with an event

data recorder (EDR). The main pur-

pose of an EDR is to record, in certain

crash or near crash-like situations,

such as an air bag deployment or hit-

ting a road obstacle, data that will

assist in understanding how a vehi-

cle's systems performed. The EDR is

designed to record data related to

vehicle dynamics and safety systems

for a short period of time, typically 30

seconds or less. The EDR in this vehi-

cle is designed to record such data as:

• How various systems in your vehicle

were operating;

• Whether or not the driver and pas-

senger safety belts were buckled/

fastened;

• How far (if at all) the driver was

depressing the accelerator and/or

brake pedal; and,

• How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better

understanding of the circumstances

in which crashes and injuries occur.

NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your

vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situ-

ation occurs; no data are recorded by

the EDR under normal driving condi-

tions and no personal data (e.g.,

name, gender, age, and crash loca-

tion) are recorded. However, other

parties, such as law enforcement,

could combine the EDR data with the

type of personally identifying data

routinely acquired during a crash

investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, spe-

cial equipment is required, and

access to the vehicle or the EDR is

needed. In addition to the vehicle

manufacturer, other parties, such as

law enforcement, that have the special

equipment, can read the information if

they have access to the vehicle or the

EDR.

VEHICLE DATA COLLECTION AND EVENT DATA RECORDERS

Information Provided by:

Interior overview / 2-2

Instrument panel overview / 2-3

Engine compartment / 2-4

Your vehicle at a glance

Information Provided by:

Your vehicle at a glance

INTERIOR OVERVIEW

1. Door lock/unlock button ..........................4-8

2. Outside rearview mirror control

switch* ..................................................4-34

3. Central door lock switch* ........................4-9

4. Power window lock button*....................4-19

5. Power window switches* ......................4-16

6. Instrument panel illumination control

switch* ..................................................4-37

7. ESC OFF button* ..................................5-21

8. Active ECO button ................................5-31

9. Fuel filler lid release lever ....................4-23

10. Trunk lid release lever (4 Door) ..........4-12

11. Fuse box..............................................7-51

12. Hood release lever ..............................4-21

13. Brake pedal ........................................5-16

14. Accelerator pedal ................................5-6

15. Steering wheel tilt and telescopic

lever* ..................................................4-31

* : if equipped

❈The actual vehicle may differ from the illustration.

ORB014001N

Information Provided by:

Your vehicle at a glance

INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW

1. Driver’s front air bag.........................3-46

2. Horn .................................................4-32

3. Light control/Turn signals .................4-53

4. Instrument cluster.............................4-36

5. Wiper/Washer...................................4-57

6. Ignition switch.....................................5-5

7. Digital clock and audio* .............4-89, 4-94

8. Steering wheel .................................4-30

9. Steering wheel audio control* ..........4-95

10. Climate control system* ........4-65, 4-74

11. Hazard warning flasher switch..4-52, 6-2

12. Shift lever ................................5-7, 5-10

13. Parking brake lever ........................5-17

14. Passenger’s front air bag ...............3-46

15. Glove box .......................................4-85

16. Power outlet* ..................................4-88

* : if equipped

ORB010002N

Information Provided by:

Your vehicle at a glance

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

ORB070100

* The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

1. Engine coolant reservoir ...................7-23

2. Windshield washer fluid reservoir .....7-27

3. Radiator cap .....................................7-25

4. Engine oil filler cap ...........................7-22

5. Engine oil dipstick .............................7-22

6. Brake/clutch fluid reservoir ...............7-26

7. Air cleaner.........................................7-29

8. Fuse box ...........................................7-51

9. Positive battery terminal ...................7-34

10. Negative battery terminal................7-34

* : if equipped

Information Provided by:

Seats / 3-2

Seat belts / 3-14

Child restraint system / 3-26

Air bag - advanced supplemental restraint system / 3-34

Safety features of your vehicle

Information Provided by:

Safety features of your vehicle

Driver’s seat

(1) Forward and backward

(2) Seatback angle

(3) Seat cushion height

(4) Headrest

(5) Armrest*

Front passenger’s seat

(6) Forward and backward

(7) Seatback angle

(8) Headrest

Rear seat

(9) Headrest*

(10) Seatback folding*

*: if equipped

SEATS

ORB030001N

Information Provided by:

Safety features of your vehicle

WARNING - Driver’s seat

• Never attempt to adjust the seat

while the vehicle is moving. This

could result in loss of control,

and an accident causing death,

serious injury, or property dam-

age.

• Do not allow anything to interfere

with the normal position of the

seatback. Storing items against a

seatback or in any other way

interfering with proper locking of

a seatback could result in serious

or fatal injury in a sudden stop or

collision.

• Always drive and ride with your

seatback upright and the lap por-

tion of the seat belt snug and low

across the hips. This is the best

position to protect you in case of

an accident.

• In order to avoid unnecessary

and perhaps severe air bag

injuries, always sit as far back as

possible from the steering wheel

while maintaining comfortable

control of the vehicle. We recom-

mend that your chest be at least

10 inches (250 mm) away from

the steering wheel.

WARNING - Loose objects

Loose objects in the driver’s foot

area could interfere with the opera-

tion of the foot pedals, possibly

causing an accident. Do not place

anything under the front seats.

WARNING - Driver respon-

sibility for passengers

Riding in a vehicle with the seat-

back reclined could lead to serious

or fatal injury in an accident. If a

seat is reclined during an accident,

the occupant’s hips may slide

under the lap portion of the seat

belt, applying great force to the

unprotected abdomen. Serious or

fatal internal injuries could result.

The driver must advise the passen-

ger to keep the seatback in an

upright position whenever the vehi-

cle is in motion.

WARNING - Uprighting

seat

When you return the seatback to its

upright position, hold the seatback

and return it slowly and be sure

there are no other occupants

around the seat. If the seatback is

returned without being held and

controlled, the back of the seat

could spring forward resulting in

accidental injury to a person struck

by the seatback.

WARNING

Do not use a sitting cushion that

reduces friction between the seat

and passenger. The passenger's

hips may slide under the lap por-

tion of the seat belt during an acci-

dent or a sudden stop. Serious or

fatal internal injuries could result

because the seat belt can't operate

normally.

Information Provided by:

Safety features of your vehicle

(Continued)

• Luggage and other cargo should

be laid flat in the cargo area. If

objects are large, heavy, or must

be piled, they must be secured.

Under no circumstances should

cargo be piled higher than the

seatbacks. Failure to follow these

warnings could result in serious

injury or death in the event of a

sudden stop, collision or rollover.

WARNING - Rear

seatbacks

• The rear seatback must be

securely latched. If not, passen-

gers and objects could be thrown

forward resulting in serious

injury or death in the event of a

sudden stop or collision.

• No passenger should ride in the

cargo area or sit or lie on folded

seatbacks while the vehicle is

moving. All passengers must be

properly seated in seats and

restrained properly while riding.

• When resetting the seatback to

the upright position, make sure it

is securely latched by pushing it

forward and rearwards.

• To avoid the possibility of burns,

do not remove the carpet in the

cargo area. Emission control

devices beneath this floor gener-

ate high temperatures.

(Continued)

WARNING

After adjusting the seat, always

check that it is securely locked into

place by attempting to move the

seat forward or reverse without

using the lock release lever.

Sudden or unexpected movement

of the driver's seat could cause you

to lose control of the vehicle result-

ing in an accident.

WARNING

• Do not adjust the seat while wear-

ing seat belts. Moving the seat

cushion forward may cause

strong pressure on the abdomen.

• Use extreme caution so that

hands or other objects are not

caught in the seat mechanisms

while the seat is moving.

• Do not put a cigarette lighter on

the floor or seat. When you oper-

ate the seat, gas may gush out of

the lighter and cause fire.

Information Provided by:

Safety features of your vehicle

Front seat

Manual adjustment

Forward and rearward

To move the seat forward or rearward:

1. Pull the seat slide adjustment lever up

and hold it.

2. Slide the seat to the position you

desire.

3. Release the lever and make sure the

seat is locked in place.

Adjust the seat before driving, and make

sure the seat is locked securely by trying

to move forward and rearward without

using the lever. If the seat moves, it is not

locked properly.

Seatback angle

To recline the seatback:

1. Lean forward slightly and lift up the

seatback recline lever.

2. Carefully lean back on the seat and

adjust the seatback of the seat to the

position you desire.

3. Release the lever and make sure the

seatback is locked in place. (The lever

MUST return to its original position for

the seatback to lock.)

Seat cushion height (for driver’s seat)

(if equipped)

To change the height of the seat cushion,

push the lever upwards or downwards.

• To lower the seat cushion, push the

lever down several times.

• To raise the seat cushion, pull the lever

up several times.

ORB030002 ORB030003 ORB030004

Information Provided by:

Safety features of your vehicle

Armrest (for driver’s seat)

(if equipped)

To use the armrest, swing down the arm-

rest to the lowest position.

Headrest

The driver's and front passenger's seats

are equipped with a headrest for the

occupant's safety and comfort.

The headrest not only provides comfort

for the driver and front passenger, but

also helps to protect the head and neck

in the event of a collision.

WARNING

• For maximum effectiveness in

case of an accident, the headrest

should be adjusted so the middle

of the headrest is at the same

height of the center of gravity of

an occupant's head. Generally,

the center of gravity of most peo-

ple's head is similar with the

height of the top of their eyes.

Also, adjust the headrest as close

to your head as possible. For this

reason, the use of a cushion that

holds the body away from the

seatback is not recommended.

• Do not operate the vehicle with

the headrests removed as severe

injury to the occupants may

occur in the event of an accident.

Headrests may provide protec-

tion against neck injuries when

properly adjusted.

• Do not adjust the headrest posi-

tion of the driver's seat while the

vehicle is in motion.

OMG038400

ORB030006

Information Provided by:

Safety features of your vehicle

Adjusting the height up and down

To raise the headrest, pull it up to the

desired position (1). To lower the head-

rest, push and hold the release button (2)

on the headrest support and lower the

headrest to the desired position (3).

Removal

To remove the headrest:

1. Recline the seatback (2) with the

recline lever (1).

2. Raise headrest as far as it can go.

3. Press the headrest release button (3)

while pulling the headrest up (4).

Reinstall

To reinstall the headrest:

1. Put the headrest poles (2) into the

holes while pressing the release but-

ton (1).

2. Recline the seatback (4) with the

recline lever (3).

3. Adjust the headrest to the appropriate

height.

WARNING

NEVER allow anyone to ride in a

seat with the headrest removed. WARNING

Always make sure the headrest

locks into position after reinstalling

and adjusting it properly.

ORB030007 ORB030032 ORB030033

Information Provided by:

Safety features of your vehicle

Active headrest (if equipped)

The active headrest is designed to move

forward and upward during a rear impact.

This helps to prevent the driver's and

front passenger’s head from moving

rearward and thus helps prevent neck

injuries.

Seatback pocket (if equipped)

The seatback pocket is provided on the

back of the front passenger’s and driver’s

seatbacks.

HNF2041-1

WARNING

A gap between the seat and the

headrest release button may

appear when seating on the seat or

when you push or pull the seat. Be

careful not to get your finger, etc.

caught in the gap.

WARNING - Seatback

pockets

Do not put heavy or sharp objects

in the seatback pockets. In an acci-

dent they could come loose from

the pocket and injure vehicle occu-

pants.

ORB030017

Information Provided by:

Safety features of your vehicle

Rear seat

Headrest

The rear seat(s) is equipped with head-

rests in all the seating positions for the

occupant's safety and comfort.

The headrest not only provides comfort

for passengers, but also helps to protect

the head and neck in the event of a colli-

sion.

WARNING

For proper operation of the occu-

pant detection system:

• Do not place any items cumula-

tively weighing over 2.2 lbs (1 kg)

in the seatback pocket or on the

seat.

• Do not hang onto the front pas-

senger seat.

ONF039401

WARNING

• For maximum effectiveness in

case of an accident, the headrest

should be adjusted so the middle

of the headrest is at the same

height of the center of gravity of

an occupant's head. Generally,

the center of gravity of most peo-

ple's head is similar with the

height of the top of their eyes.

Also adjust the headrest as close

to your head as possible. For this

reason, the use of a cushion that

holds the body away from the

seatback is not recommended.

• Do not operate the vehicle with

the headrests removed as severe

injury to an occupant may occur

in the event of an accident.

Headrests may provide protec-

tion against severe neck injuries

when properly adjusted.

Information Provided by:

Safety features of your vehicle

103

Adjusting the height up and down

To raise the headrest, pull it up (1). To

lower the headrest, push and hold the

release button (2) on the headrest sup-

port and lower the headrest (3).

Removal

To remove the headrest, raise it as far as

it can go then press the release button

(1) while pulling upward (2).

Reinstall

To reinstall the headrest, put the head-

rest poles (3) into the holes while press-

ing the release button (1). Then adjust it

to the appropriate height.

ORB030007

WARNING

Make sure the headrest locks in

position after adjusting it to proper-

ly protect the occupants.

ORB030008

Information Provided by:

311

Safety features of your vehicle

Folding the rear seat

The rear seatbacks can be folded to facil-

itate carrying long items or to increase

the luggage capacity of the vehicle.

To fold down the rear seatback:

1. Make sure the rear seat belt webbing

is in the guide to prevent the seat belt

from being damaged.

2. Set the front seatback to the upright

position and if necessary, slide the

front seat forward.

3. Lower the rear headrests to the lowest

position.

4.Pull on the seatback folding lever, then

fold the seat toward the front of the

vehicle.

ORB030021

WARNING

The purpose of the fold-down rear

seatbacks is to allow you to carry

longer objects that could not be

accommodated in the cargo area.

Never allow passengers to sit on

top of the folded down seatback

while the vehicle is moving. This is

not a proper seating position and

no seat belts are available for use.

This could result in serious injury

or death in case of an accident or

sudden stop. Objects carried on the

folded down seatback should not

extend higher than the top of the

front seatbacks. Doing this could

allow cargo to slide forward and

cause injury or damage during sud-

den stops.

ORB030022

ORBC032022

■Type A

■Type B

Information Provided by:

Safety features of your vehicle

123

5. To use the rear seat, lift and pull the

seatback backward. Push the seat-

back firmly until it clicks into place.

Make sure the seatback is locked in

place. When you return the seatback

to its upright position, always be sure it

has locked into position by pushing on

the top of the seatback.

6. Return the rear seat belt to the proper

position.

✽✽NOTICE

If you are not able to pull out the seat

belt from the retractor, after returning

the seatback to the upright position,

press the seatbelt and seatback at the

same time. Then pull the belt out. You

will be able to pull the belt out smoothly.

CAUTION - Rear seat belts

When returning the rear seatbacks

to the upright position, remember

to return the rear shoulder belts to

their proper position. Routing the

seat belt webbing through the rear

seat belt guides will help keep the

seat belts from being trapped

behind or under the seats.

CAUTION - Damaging rear

seat belt buckles

When folding the rear seatback,

insert the buckle in the pocket

between the rear seatback and

cushion. Doing so can prevent the

buckle from being damaged by the

rear seatback.

WARNING

When you return the rear seatback

to its upright position after being

folded down:

Be careful not to damage the seat

belt webbing or buckle. Do not

allow the seat belt webbing or

buckle to get caught or pinched in

the rear seat. Ensure that the seat-

back is completely locked into its

upright position by pushing on the

top of the seatback. Otherwise, in

an accident or sudden stop, the

seat could fold down and allow

cargo to enter the passenger com-

partment, which could result in

serious injury or death.

ORBR030031

Information Provided by:

313

Safety features of your vehicle

WARNING - Cargo

Cargo should always be secured to

prevent it from being thrown about

the vehicle in a collision and caus-

ing injury to the vehicle occupants.

Do not place objects in the rear

seats, since they cannot be proper-

ly secured and may hit the front

seat occupants in a collision.

WARNING - Cargo loading

Make sure the engine is off, the

automatic transaxle is in P (Park)

or the manual transaxle is in R

(Reverse) or 1st, and the parking

brake is securely applied whenever

loading or unloading cargo. Failure

to take these steps may allow the

vehicle to move if the shift lever is

inadvertently moved to another

position.

Information Provided by:

Safety features of your vehicle

143

Seat belt restraint system

SEAT BELTS

WARNING

Seat belts are designed to bear

upon the bony structure of the

body, and should be worn low

across the front of the pelvis, chest

and shoulders, as applicable; wear-

ing the lap section of the belt

across the abdominal area must be

avoided.

Seat belts should be adjusted as

firmly as possible, consistent with

comfort, to provide the protection

for which they have been designed.

A slack belt will greatly reduce the

protection afforded to the occu-

pant.

(Continued)

Care should be taken to avoid con-

tamination of the webbing with pol-

ishes, oils and chemicals and par-

ticularly battery acid. Cleaning may

safely be carried out using mild

soap and water. The belt should be

replaced if webbing becomes

frayed, contaminated or damaged.

It is essential to replace the entire

assembly after it has been worn in

a severe impact even if damage to

the assembly is not obvious. Belts

should not be worn with straps

twisted. Each seat belt assembly

must only be used by one occu-

pant; it is dangerous to put a belt

around a child being carried on the

occupant's lap.

(Continued)

• Avoid wearing twisted seat belts.

A twisted belt can't do its job as

well. In a collision, it could even

cut into you. Be sure the belt

webbing is straight and not twist-

ed.

• Be careful not to damage the belt

webbing or hardware. If the belt

webbing or hardware is dam-

aged, replace it.

WARNING

• For maximum restraint system

protection, the seat belts must

always be used whenever the car

is moving.

• Seat belts are most effective

when seatbacks are in the

upright position.

• Children age 12 and younger

must always be properly

restrained in the rear seat. Never

allow children to ride in the front

passenger seat. If a child over 12

must be seated in the front seat,

he/she must be properly belted

and the seat should be moved as

far back as possible.

• Never wear the shoulder belt

under your arm or behind your

back. An improperly positioned

shoulder belt can cause serious

injuries in a crash. The shoulder

belt should be positioned midway

over your shoulder across your

collarbone.

(Continued)

Information Provided by:

315

Safety features of your vehicle

Seat belt warning (for driver’s seat)

The driver's seat belt warning light and

chime will activate to the following table

when the ignition switch is in "ON" posi-

tion.

*1Warning pattern repeats 11 times with

an interval of 24 seconds. If the driver's

seat belt is buckled, the light will stop

within 6 seconds and chime will stop

immediately.

*2The light will stop within 6 seconds and

chime will stop immediately.

Conditions Warning Pattern

Seat Belt Vehicle

Speed Light-Blink Chime-

Sound

Unbuckled 6 seconds

Buckled 6 seconds None

Buckled →

Unbuckled

Below 3 mph

(5 km/h) 6 seconds None

3 mph~

6 mph 6 seconds

Above 6 mph

(10 km/h)

6 sec. on / 24 sec. off

(11 times)

Unbuckled

Above 6 mph

(10 km/h)

↓

Below 3 mph

(5 km/h)

6 seconds *1

↓

Stop *2

WARNING

• No modifications or additions

should be made by the user

which will either prevent the seat

belt adjusting devices from oper-

ating to remove slack, or prevent

the seat belt assembly from being

adjusted to remove slack.

• When you fasten the seat belt, be

careful not to latch the seat belt in

buckles of other seat. It's very dan-

gerous and you may not be pro-

tected by the seat belt properly.

• Do not unfasten the seat belt and

do not fasten and unfasten the

seat belt repeatedly while driving.

This could result in loss of con-

trol, and an accident causing

death, serious injury, or property

damage.

• When fastening the seat belt,

make sure that the seat belt does

not pass over objects that are

hard or can break easily.

• Make sure there is nothing in the

buckle. The seat belt may not be

fastened securely.

1GQA2083

Information Provided by:

Safety features of your vehicle

163

Seat belt - Driver's 3-point system

with emergency locking retractor

To fasten your seat belt:

To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of the

retractor and insert the metal tab (1) into

the buckle (2). There will be an audible

"click" when the tab locks into the buckle.

The seat belt automatically adjusts to the

proper length only after the lap belt por-

tion is adjusted manually so that it fits

snugly around your hips. If you lean for-

ward in a slow, easy motion, the belt will

extend and let you move around. If there

is a sudden stop or impact, however, the

belt will lock into position. It will also lock

if you try to lean forward too quickly.

✽✽NOTICE

If you are not able to pull out the seat

belt from the retractor, firmly pull the

belt out and release it. Then you will be

able to pull the belt out smoothly.

Height adjustment (Front)

You can adjust the height of the shoulder

belt anchor to one of 4 positions for maxi-

mum comfort and safety.

The height of the adjusting seat belt should

not be too close to your neck. The shoulder

portion should be adjusted so that it lies

across your chest and midway over your

shoulder nearest to the door and not next

to your neck.

To adjust the height of the seat belt anchor,

lower or raise the height adjuster into an

appropriate position.

To raise the height adjuster, pull it up (1).To

lower it, push it down (3) while pressing the

height adjuster button (2).

Release the button to lock the anchor into

position. Try sliding the height adjuster to

make sure that it has locked into position.

B180A01NF-1 ORB030020

Front seat

Information Provided by:

317

Safety features of your vehicle

B200A02NF

WARNING

You should place the lap belt por-

tion as low as possible and snugly

across your hips, not on your waist.

If the lap belt is located too high on

your waist, it may increase the

chance of injury in the event of a

collision. Both arms should not be

under or over the belt. Rather, one

should be over and the other under,

as shown in the illustration.

Never wear the seat belt under the

arm nearest the door.

Seat belts - Front passenger and rear

seat 3-point system with combination

locking retractor

To fasten your seat belt:

Combination retractor type seat belts are

installed in the rear seat positions to help

accommodate the installation of child

restraint systems. Although a combina-

tion retractor is also installed in the front

passenger seat position, it is strongly

recommended that children always be

seated in the rear seat. NEVER place

any infant restraint system in the front

seat of the vehicle.

This type of seat belt combines the fea-

tures of both an emergency locking

retractor seat belt and an automatic lock-

ing retractor seat belt. To fasten your seat

belt, pull it out of the retractor and insert

the metal tab into the buckle. There will

be an audible "click" when the tab locks

into the buckle. When not securing a

child restraint, the seat belt operates in

the same way as the driver's seat belt

(Emergency Locking Retractor Type). It

automatically adjusts to the proper length

only after the lap belt portion of the seat

belt is adjusted manually so that it fits

snugly around your hips.

WARNING

• Verify the shoulder belt anchor is

locked into position at the appro-

priate height. Never position the

shoulder belt across your neck or

face. Improperly positioned seat

belts can cause serious injuries

in an accident.

• Failure to replace seat belts after

an accident could leave you with

damaged seat belts that will not

provide protection in the event of

another collision leading to per-

sonal injury or death. Replace

your seat belts after being in an

accident as soon as possible.

Information Provided by:

Safety features of your vehicle

183

When the seat belt is fully extended from

the retractor to allow the installation of a

child restraint system, the seat belt oper-

ation changes to allow the belt to retract,

but not to extend (Automatic Locking

Retractor Type). Refer to “Using a child

restraint system” in this section.

✽✽NOTICE

Although the combination retractor

provides the same level of protection for

seated passengers in either emergency

or automatic locking modes, it is recom-

mended that seated passengers use the

emergency locking feature for improved

convenience. The automatic locking

function is intended to facilitate child

restraint installation. To convert from

the automatic locking feature to the

emergency locking operation mode,

allow the unbuckled seat belt to fully

retract.

To release the seat belt:

The seat belt is released by pressing the

release button (1) in the locking buckle.

When it is released, the belt should auto-

matically draw back into the retractor.

If this does not happen, check the belt to

be sure it is not twisted, then try again.

3 Point rear center belt

To fasten the rear center belt

Insert the tongue plate (A) into the open

end of the buckle (B) until an audible

“click" is heard, indicating the latch is

locked. Make sure the belt is not twisted.

B210A01NF-1/H

ORB031035N

ORB031036N

Information Provided by:

319

Safety features of your vehicle

Pull and insert the tongue plate (C) into

the open end of the buckle (D) until an

audible “click” is heard, indicating the

latch is locked.

Make sure the belt is not twisted.

There will be an audible “click” when the

tab locks in the buckle. The seat belt

automatically adjusts to the proper length

only after the lap belt is adjusted manu-

ally so that it fits snugly around your hips,

if you lean forward in a slow, easy

motion, the belt will extend and let you

move around. If there is a sudden stop or

impact, the belt will lock into position. It

will also lock if you try to lean forward too

quickly.

To unfasten the rear center belt

Press the release button (1) on the buck-

le (D) and remove the tongue plate from

the buckle (D).

CAUTION

When using the rear center seat

belt, the buckle with the “CENTER”

mark must be used.

WARNING

When using the rear seat center

belt, you must lock all tongue

plates and buckles. If any tongue

plate or buckle is not locked, it will

increase the chance of injury in the

event of a collision.

ORB031032N ORB031037N

Information Provided by:

Safety features of your vehicle

203

To disconnect the rear center belt

Insert a key or narrow-ended tool into the

groove located on buckle.

✽✽NOTICE

Always connect the tongue plate to the

buckle even when not in use.

Pre-tensioner seat belt

Your vehicle is equipped with driver's and

front passenger's pre-tensioner seat

belts. The purpose of the pre-tensioner is

to make sure that the seat belts fit tightly

against the occupant's body in certain

frontal collisions (or side collisions). The

pre-tensioner seat belts may be activated

in crashes where the frontal collision (or

side collisions) is severe enough.

When the vehicle stops suddenly, or if

the occupant tries to lean forward too

quickly, the seat belt retractor will lock

into position. In certain frontal collisions

(or side collisions), the pre-tensioner will

activate and pull the seat belt into tighter

contact against the occupant's body.

If the system senses excessive tension

on the driver or passenger's seat belt

when the pre-tensioner activates, the

load limiter inside the pre-tensioner will

release some of the pressure on the

affected seat belt.

✽✽NOTICE

The pre-tensioner will activate not only

in a frontal collision but also in a side

collision, if the vehicle is equipped with

a side or curtain air bag.

OED030300

WARNING

• Do not put anything near the

buckle. Placing objects near the

buckle can adversely affect the

buckle pre-tensioner and may

increase the risk of personal

injury in the event of a collision.

• For your safety, be sure that the

belt webbing is not loose or twist-

ed and always sit properly on

your seat.

ORB031038N

Information Provided by:

321

Safety features of your vehicle

The seat belt pre-tensioner system con-

sists mainly of the following components.

Their locations are shown in the illustra-

tion:

1. SRS air bag warning light

2. Retractor pre-tensioner assembly

3. SRS control module

4. Anchor pre-tensioner assembly

✽✽NOTICE

• Both the driver's and front passen-

ger's pre-tensioner seat belts may be

activated in certain frontal collisions

(or side collisions).

The pre-tensioners will not be activat-

ed if the seat belts are not being worn

at the time of the collision.

• When the pre-tensioner seat belts are

activated, a loud noise may be heard

and fine dust, which may appear to be

smoke, may be visible in the passenger

compartment. These are normal oper-

ating conditions and are not haz-

ardous.

• Although it is harmless, the fine dust

may cause skin irritation and should

not be breathed for prolonged peri-

ods. Wash all exposed skin areas thor-

oughly after an accident in which the

pre-tensioner seat belts were activat-

ed.

• Because the sensor that activates the

SRS air bag is connected with the pre-

tensioner seat belt, the SRS air bag

warning light on the instrument

panel will illuminate for approximate-

ly 6 seconds after the ignition switch

has been turned to the ON position,

and then it should turn off.

OMD030051N

WARNING

To obtain maximum benefit from a

pre-tensioner seat belt:

1. The seat belt must be worn cor-

rectly and adjusted to the proper

position. Please read and follow

all of the important information

and precautions about your vehi-

cle’s occupant safety features –

including seat belts and air bags

– that are provided in this manu-

al.

2. Be sure you and your passen-

gers always wear seat belts prop-

erly.

Information Provided by:

Safety features of your vehicle

223

WARNING

All occupants of the vehicle must

wear their seat belts at all times.

Seat belts and child restraints

reduce the risk of serious or fatal

injuries for all occupants in the

event of a collision or sudden stop.

Without a seat belt, occupants

could be shifted too close to a

deploying air bag, strike the interior

structure or be thrown from the

vehicle. Properly worn seat belts

greatly reduce these hazards.

Even with advanced air bags,

unbelted occupants can be severe-

ly injured by a deploying air bag.

Always follow the precautions

about seat belts, air bags and occu-

pant seating contained in this man-

ual.

Seat belt precautions

CAUTION

If the pre-tensioner seat belt is not

working properly, this warning light

will illuminate even if there is no

malfunction of the SRS air bag. If

the SRS air bag warning light does

not illuminate when the ignition

switch is turned ON, or if it remains

illuminated after illuminating for

approximately 6 seconds, or if it

illuminates while the vehicle is

being driven, have an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer inspect the pre-

tensioner seat belt and SRS air bag

system as soon as possible.

WARNING

• Pre-tensioners are designed to

operate only one time. After acti-

vation, pre-tensioner seat belts

must be replaced. All seat belts,

of any type, should always be

replaced after they have been

worn during a collision.

(Continued)

• The pre-tensioner seat belt

assembly mechanisms become

hot during activation. Do not

touch the pre-tensioner seat belt

assemblies for several minutes

after they have been activated.

• Do not attempt to inspect or

replace the pre-tensioner seat

belts yourself. This must be done

by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

• Do not strike the pre-tensioner

seat belt assemblies.

• Do not attempt to service or

repair the pre-tensioner seat belt

system in any manner.

• Improper handling of the pre-ten-

sioner seat belt assemblies, and

failure to heed the warnings not

to strike, modify, inspect, replace,

service or repair the pre-tension-

er seat belt assemblies may lead

to improper operation or inadver-

tent activation and serious injury.

• Always wear the seat belts when

driving or riding in a motor vehicle.

• If the vehicle or pre-tensioner seat

belt must be discarded, contact

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Information Provided by:

323

Safety features of your vehicle

Infant or small child

All 50 states have child restraint laws.You

should be aware of the specific require-

ments in your state. Child and/or infant

seats must be properly placed and

installed in the rear seat. For more infor-

mation about the use of these restraints,

refer to “Child restraint system” in this

section.

✽✽NOTICE

Small children are best protected from

injury in an accident when properly

restrained in the rear seat by a child

restraint system that meets the require-

ments of the Federal Motor Vehicle

Safety Standards. Before buying any

child restraint system, make sure that it

has a label certifying that it meets

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard

213. The restraint must be appropriate

for your child's height and weight.

Check the label on the child restraint for

this information. Refer to “Child

restraint system” in this section.

Larger children

Children who are too large for child

restraint systems should always occupy

the rear seat and use the available

lap/shoulder belts. The lap portion should

be fastened snug on the hips and as low

as possible. Check belt fit periodically. A

child's squirming could put the belt out of

position. Children are afforded the most

safety in the event of an accident when

they are restrained by a proper restraint

system in the rear seat. If a larger child

(over age 12) must be seated in the front

seat, the child should be securely

restrained by the available lap/shoulder

belt and the seat should be placed in the

rearmost position. Children age 12 and

under should be restrained securely in

the rear seat. NEVER place a child age

12 and under in the front seat. NEVER

place a rear facing child seat in the front

seat of a vehicle.

WARNING

Every person in your vehicle needs

to be properly restrained at all

times, including infants and chil-

dren. Never hold a child in your

arms or lap when riding in a vehi-

cle. The violent forces created dur-

ing a crash will tear the child from

your arms and throw the child

against the interior. Always use a

child restraint appropriate for your

child's height and weight.

Information Provided by:

Safety features of your vehicle

243

If the shoulder belt portion slightly touch-

es the child’s neck or face, try placing the

child closer to the center of the vehicle. If

the shoulder belt still touches their face

or neck they need to be returned to a

child restraint system.

Pregnant women

The use of a seat belt is recommended

for pregnant women to lessen the chance

of injury in an accident. When a seat belt

is used, the lap belt portion should be

placed as low and snugly as possible on

the hips, not across the abdomen. For

specific recommendations, consult a

physician.

Injured person

A seat belt should be used when an

injured person is being transported.

When this is necessary, you should con-

sult a physician for recommendations.

One person per belt

Two people (including children) should

never attempt to use a single seat belt.

This could increase the severity of

injuries in case of an accident.

Do not lie down

To reduce the chance of injuries in the

event of an accident and to achieve max-

imum effectiveness of the restraint sys-

tem, all passengers should be sitting up

and the front and rear seats should be in

an upright position when the car is mov-

ing. A seat belt cannot provide proper

protection if the person is lying down in

the rear seat or if the seats are in a

reclined position.

WARNING - Shoulder belts

on small children

• Never allow a shoulder belt to be

in contact with a child’s neck or

face while the vehicle is in

motion.

• If seat belts are not properly worn

and adjusted on children, there is

a risk of death or serious injury.

WARNING - Pregnant

women

Pregnant women must never place

the lap portion of the safety belt

over the area of the abdomen

where the unborn child is located

or above the abdomen where the

belt could seriously injure or even

cause the death of the unborn child

during an impact.

Information Provided by:

325

Safety features of your vehicle

Care of seat belts

Seat belt systems should never be disas-

sembled or modified. In addition, care

should be taken to assure that seat belts

and belt hardware are not damaged by

seat hinges, doors or other abuse.

Periodic inspection

All seat belts should be inspected peri-

odically for wear or damage of any kind.

Any damaged parts should be replaced

as soon as possible.

Keep belts clean and dry

Seat belts should be kept clean and dry.

If belts become dirty, they can be

cleaned by using a mild soap solution

and warm water. Bleach, dye, strong

detergents or abrasives should not be

used because they may damage and

weaken the fabric.

When to replace seat belts

Entire in-use seat belt assembly or

assemblies should be replaced if the

vehicle has been involved in an accident.

This should be done even if no damage

is visible. Additional questions concern-

ing seat belt operation should be directed

to an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

WARNING

Riding with a reclined seatback

increases your chance of serious

or fatal injuries in the event of a col-

lision or sudden stop. The protec-

tion of your restraint system (seat

belts and air bags) is greatly

reduced by reclining your seat.

Seat belts must be snug against

your hips and chest to work proper-

ly. The more the seatback is

reclined, the greater the chance

that an occupant's hips will slide

under the lap belt causing serious

internal injuries or the occupant's

neck could strike the shoulder belt.

Drivers and passengers should

always sit well back in their seats,

properly belted, and with the seat-

backs upright.

WARNING

When you return the rear seatback

to its upright position after the rear

seatback was folded down, be care-

ful not to damage the seat belt web-

bing or buckle. Be sure that the

webbing or buckle does not get

caught or pinched in the rear seat.

A seat belt with damaged webbing

or buckle will not be as strong and

could possibly fail during a colli-

sion or sudden stop, resulting in

serious injury.

Information Provided by:

Safety features of your vehicle

263

CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM

Children riding in the car should sit in the

rear seat and must always be properly

restrained to minimize the risk of injury in

an accident, sudden stop or sudden

maneuver. According to accident statis-

tics, children are safer when properly

restrained in the rear seats than in the

front seat. Larger children not in a child

restraint should use one of the seat belts

provided.

You should be aware of the specific

requirements in your state. Child and/or

infant safety seats must be properly

placed and installed in the rear seat. You

must use a commercially available child

restraint system that meets the require-

ments of the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards (FMVSS).

Child restraint systems are designed to be

secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the

lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt, or

by a LATCH system (if equipped).

Children could be injured or killed in a

crash if their restraints are not properly

secured. For small children and babies, a

child seat or infant seat must be used.

Before buying a particular child restraint

system, make sure it fits your car seat

and seat belts, and fits your child. Follow

all the instructions provided by the man-

ufacturer when installing the child

restraint system.

WARNING

• A child restraint system must be

placed in the rear seat. Never

install a child or infant seat on the

front passenger's seat. Should an

accident occur and cause the

passenger-side air bag to deploy,

it could severely injure or kill an

infant or child seated in an infant

or child seat. Thus only use a

child restraint in the rear seat of

your vehicle.

• A seat belt or child restraint sys-

tem can become very hot if it is

left in a closed vehicle on a sunny

day, even if the outside tempera-

ture does not feel hot. Be sure to

check the seat cover and buckles

before placing a child there.

• When the child restraint system

is not in use, store it in the lug-

gage area or fasten it with a seat

belt so that it will not be thrown

forward in the case of a sudden

stop or an accident.

• Children may be seriously injured

or killed by an inflating air bag.

All children, even those too large

for child restraints, must ride in

the rear seat.

WARNING

To reduce the chance of serious or

fatal injuries:

• Children of all ages are safer

when restrained in the rear seat.

A child riding in the front passen-

ger seat can be forcefully struck

by an inflating air bag resulting in

serious or fatal injuries.

• Always follow the child restraint

system manufacturer’s instruc-

tions for installation and use of

the child restraint.

• Always make sure the child seat

is secured properly in the car and

your child is securely restrained

in the child seat.

• Never hold a child in your arms or

lap when riding in a vehicle. The

violent forces created during a

crash will tear the child from your

arms and throw the child against

the car’s interior.

• Never put a seat belt over your-

self and a child. During a crash,

the belt could press deep into the

child causing serious internal

injuries.

(Continued)

Information Provided by:

327

Safety features of your vehicle

Using a child restraint system

For small children and babies, the use of

a child seat or infant seat is required. This

child seat or infant seat should be of

appropriate size for the child and should

be installed in accordance with the man-

ufacturer's instructions.

(Continued)

• Never leave children unattended

in a vehicle – not even for a short

time. The car can heat up very

quickly, resulting in serious

injuries to children inside. Even

very young children may inadver-

tently cause the vehicle to move,

entangle themselves in the win-

dows, or lock themselves or oth-

ers inside the vehicle.

• Never allow two children, or any

two persons, to use the same

seat belt.

• Children often squirm and repo-

sition themselves improperly.

Never let a child ride with the

shoulder belt under their arm or

behind their back. Always proper-

ly position and secure children in

the rear seat.

• Never allow a child to stand-up or

kneel on the seat or floor of a

moving vehicle. During a colli-

sion or sudden stop, the child

can be violently thrown against

the vehicle’s interior, resulting in

serious injury.

(Continued)

• Never use an infant carrier or a

child safety seat that "hooks"

over a seatback, it may not pro-

vide adequate security in an acci-

dent.

• Seat belts can become very hot,

especially when the car is parked

in direct sunlight. Always check

seat belt buckles before fasten-

ing them over a child.

• After an accident, have an author-

ized HYUNDAI dealer check the

child restraint system, seat belt,

tether anchor and lower anchor.

• If there is not enough space to

place the child restraint system

because of the driver's seat,

install the child restraint system

in the rear right seat.

CRS09

ORB030026

Forward-facing child restraint system

Rearward-facing child restraint system

Information Provided by:

Safety features of your vehicle

283

For safety reasons, we recommend that

the child restraint system be used in the

rear seats.

Since all passenger seat belts move

freely under normal conditions and only

lock under extreme or emergency condi-

tions (emergency locking mode), you

must manually change these seat belts

to the automatic locking mode to secure

a child restraint.

Placing a passenger seat belt into

the automatic locking mode

The automatic locking mode will help

prevent the normal movement of the

child in the vehicle from causing the seat

belt to loosen and compromise the child

restraint system. To secure a child

restraint system, use the following proce-

dure.

WARNING - Child seat

installation

• A child can be seriously injured

or killed in a collision if the child

restraint is not properly anchored

to the vehicle and the child is not

properly restrained in the child

restraint. Before installing the

child restraint system, read the

instructions supplied by the child

restraint system manufacturer.

• If the seat belt does not operate

as described in this section, have

the system checked immediately

by your authorized HYUNDAI

dealer.

• Failure to observe this manual's

instructions regarding child

restraint systems and the

instructions provided with the

child restraint system could

increase the chance and/or

severity of injury in an accident.

WARNING

Never place a rear-facing child

restraint in the front passenger

seat, because of the danger that an

inflating passenger-side air bag

could impact the rear-facing child

restraint and kill the child.

E2MS103005

Information Provided by:

329

Safety features of your vehicle

To install a child restraint system on the

outboard or center rear seats, do the fol-

lowing:

1. Place the child restraint system in the

seat and route the lap/shoulder belt

around or through the restraint, follow-

ing the restraint manufacturer’s

instructions. Be sure the seat belt web-

bing is not twisted.

2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch into

the buckle. Listen for the distinct “click”

sound.

Position the release button so that it is

easy to access in case of an emergency.

3. Pull the shoulder portion of the seat

belt all the way out. When the shoulder

portion of the seat belt is fully extend-

ed, it will shift the retractor to the

“Automatic locking” (child restraint)

mode.

4. Slowly allow the shoulder portion of

the seat belt to retract and listen for an

audible “clicking” or “ratcheting” sound.

This indicates that the retractor is in

the “automatic locking” mode. If no dis-

tinct sound is heard, repeat steps 3

and 4.

OMD030054A

OMD030053A OMD030055A

Information Provided by:

Safety features of your vehicle

303

5. Remove as much slack from the belt

as possible by pushing down on the

child restraint system while feeding the

shoulder belt back into the retractor.

6. Push and pull on the child restraint

system to confirm that the seat belt is

holding it firmly in place. If it is not,

release the seat belt and repeat steps

2 through 6.

7. Double check that the retractor is in the

“Automatic locking” mode by attempt-

ing to pull more of the seat belt out of

the retractor. If you cannot, the retractor

is in the “Automatic locking” mode.

To remove the child restraint, press the

release button on the buckle and then

pull the lap/shoulder belt out of the

restraint and allow the seat belt to retract

fully.

When the seat belt is allowed to

retract to its fully stowed position, the

retractor will automatically switch

from the “Automatic locking” mode to

the emergency lock mode for normal

adult usage.

Securing a child restraint seat with

“Tether Anchor” system

Child restraint hook holders are located

on the package tray or on the floor

behind the rear seats.

OMD030056A

WARNING - Automatic

locking mode

The lap/shoulder belt automatically

returns to the “emergency lock

mode” whenever the belt is allowed

to retract fully. Therefore, the pre-

ceding seven steps must be fol-

lowed each time a child restraint is

installed.

If the retractor is not in the

Automatic Locking mode, the child

restraint can move when your vehi-

cle turns or stops suddenly. A child

can be seriously injured or killed if

the child restraint is not properly

anchored to the car, including set-

ting the retractor to the Automatic

Locking mode.

ORB032024R

ORB031033L

■4 Door

■5 Door

Information Provided by:

331

Safety features of your vehicle

1. Route the child restraint seat strap

over the seatback.

For vehicles with adjustable head-

rests, route the tether strap under the

headrest and between the headrest

posts, otherwise route the tether strap

over the top of the seatback.

For more information about the use of

the headrests, refer to "Adjusting the

height up and down - Rear seat" in this

section.

2. Connect the tether strap hook to the

appropriate child restraint hook holder

and tighten to secure the child restraint

seat.

ORB030025

WARNING - Child restraint

check

Check that the child restraint sys-

tem is secure by pushing and

pulling it in different directions.

Incorrectly fitted child restraints

may swing, twist, tip or separate

causing death or serious injury.

WARNING - Tether strap

Never mount more than one child

restraint to a single tether anchor

or to a single lower anchorage

point. The increased load caused

by multiple seats may cause the

tethers or anchorage points to

break, causing serious injury or

death.

WARNING

A child can be seriously injured or

killed in a collision if the child

restraint is not properly anchored

to the car and the child is not prop-

erly restrained in the child restraint.

Always follow the child seat manu-

facturer’s instructions for installa-

tion and use.

WARNING

- Child restraint anchorage

• Child restraint anchorages are

designed to withstand only those

loads imposed by correctly fitted

child restraints. Under no circum-

stances are they to be used for

adult seat belts or harnesses or

for attaching other items or

equipment to the vehicle.

• The tether strap may not work

properly if attached somewhere

other than the correct tether

anchor.

Information Provided by:

Safety features of your vehicle

323

Securing a child restraint seat with

child seat lower anchor system

Some child seat manufacturers make

child restraint seats that are labeled as

LATCH or LATCH-compatible child

restraint seats. LATCH stands for "Lower

Anchors and Tethers for Children". These

seats include two rigid or webbing

mounted attachments that connect to

two LATCH anchors at specific seating

positions in your vehicle. This type of

child restraint seat eliminates the need to

use seat belts to attach the child seat in

the rear seats.

Child restraint symbols are located on

the left and right rear seat backs to indi-

cate the position of the lower anchors for

child restraints.

B230D01NF ORB030023

Lower Anchor

Position Indicator

WARNING

• When using the vehicle's

"LATCH" system to install a child

restraint system in the rear seat,

all unused vehicle rear seat belt

metal latch plates or tabs must be

latched securely in their seat belt

buckles and the seat belt web-

bing must be retracted behind

the child restraint to prevent the

child from reaching and taking

hold of unretracted seat belts.

Unlatched metal latch plates or

tabs may allow the child to reach

the unretracted seat belts which

may result in strangulation and a

serious injury or death to the

child in the child restraint.

• Do not place anything around the

lower anchors. Also make sure

that the seat belt is not caught in

the lower anchors.

Information Provided by:

333

Safety features of your vehicle

LATCH anchors have been provided in

your vehicle. The LATCH anchors are

located in the left and right outboard rear

seating positions. Their locations are

shown in the illustration. There is no

LATCH anchor provided for the center

rear seating position.

The LATCH anchors are located between

the seatback and the seat cushion of the

rear seat left and right outboard seating

positions.

Follow the child seat manufacturer’s

instructions to properly install child

restraint seats with LATCH or LATCH-

compatible attachments.

Once you have installed the LATCH child

restraint, assure that the seat is properly

attached to the LATCH and tether

anchors.

Also, test the child restraint seat before

you place the child in it. Tilt the seat from

side to side. Also try to tug the seat for-

ward. Check to see if the anchors hold

the seat in place.

WARNING

If the child restraint is not anchored

properly, the risk of a child being

seriously injured or killed in a colli-

sion greatly increases.

WARNING - LATCH lower

anchors

LATCH lower anchors are only to

be used with the left and right rear

outboard seating positions. Never

attempt to attach a LATCH

equipped seat in the center seating

position. You may damage the

anchors or the anchors may fail

and break in a collision.

CAUTION

Do not allow the rear seat belt web-

bing to get scratched or pinched by

the child-seat latch and LATCH

anchor during the installation.

Information Provided by:

Safety features of your vehicle

343

(1) Driver’s front air bag

(2) Passenger’s front air bag

(3) Side impact air bag

(4) Curtain air bag

AIR BAG - ADVANCED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM

WARNING

Even in vehicles with air bags, you

and your passengers must always

wear the seat belts provided in

order to minimize the risk and

severity of injury in the event of a

collision or rollover.

OYF039050OYF039050

❈The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

Information Provided by:

335

Safety features of your vehicle

How does the air bag system

operate

• Air bags are activated (able to inflate if

necessary) only when the ignition

switch is turned to the ON or START

position.

• Air bags inflate instantly in the event of

serious frontal or side collision in order

to help protect the occupants from seri-

ous physical injury.

• There is no single speed at which the

air bags will inflate.

Generally, air bags are designed to

inflate by the severity of a collision and

its direction. These two factors deter-

mine whether the sensors send out an

electronic deployment/ inflation signal.

• Air bag deployment depends on a

number of factors including vehicle

speed, angles of impact and the densi-

ty and stiffness of the vehicles or

objects which your vehicle hits in the

collision. Though, factors are not limit-

ed to those mentioned above.

• The front air bags will completely

inflate and deflate in an instant.

It is virtually impossible for you to see

the air bags inflate during an accident.

It is much more likely that you will sim-

ply see the deflated air bags hanging

out of their storage compartments after

the collision.

• In order to help provide protection in a

severe collision, the air bags must

inflate rapidly. The speed of air bag

inflation is a consequence of the

extremely short time in which a collision

occurs and the need to get the air bag

between the occupant and the vehicle

structures before the occupant impacts

those structures. This speed of inflation

reduces the risk of serious or life-

threatening injuries in a severe collision

and is thus a necessary part of air bag

design.

However, air bag inflation can also

cause injuries which normally can

include facial abrasions, bruises and

broken bones because the inflation

speed also causes the air bags to

expand with a great deal of force.

• There are even circumstances

under which contact with the air bag

can cause fatal injuries, especially if

the occupant is positioned exces-

sively close to the air bag.

WARNING

• To avoid severe personal injury

or death caused by deploying air

bags in a collision, the driver

should sit as far back from the

steering wheel air bag as possi-

ble (at least 10 inches (250 mm)

away). The front passengers

should always move their seats

as far back as possible and sit

back in their seat.

• Air bags inflate instantly in the

event of collision, and passen-

gers may be injured by the air bag

expansion force if they are not in

proper position.

• Air bag inflation may cause

injuries which normally include

facial or bodily abrasions,

injuries from broken glasses or

burns by the air bag inflation

gasses.

Information Provided by:

Safety features of your vehicle

363

Noise and smoke

When the air bags inflate, they make a

loud noise and they leave smoke and

powder in the air inside of the vehicle.

This is normal and is a result of the igni-

tion of the air bag inflator. After the air

bag inflates, you may feel substantial dis-

comfort in breathing due to the contact of

your chest with both the seat belt and the

air bag, as well as from breathing the

smoke and powder. Open your doors

and/or windows as soon as possible

after impact in order to reduce dis-

comfort and prevent prolonged expo-

sure to the smoke and powder.

Though the smoke and powder are non-

toxic, they may cause irritation to the skin

(eyes, nose and throat, etc). If this is the

case, wash and rinse with cold water

immediately and consult a doctor if the

symptom persists.

Do not install a child restraint on the

front passenger’s seat.

Never place a rear-facing child restraint

in the front passenger’s seat. If the air

bag deploys, it would impact the rear-fac-

ing child restraint, causing serious or

fatal injury.

In addition, do not place front-facing child

restraints in the front passenger’s seat

either. If the front passenger air bag

inflates, it could cause serious or fatal

injuries to the child.

WARNING

When the air bags deploy, the air

bag related parts in the steering

wheel and/or instrument panel

and/or in both sides of the roof rails

above the front and rear doors are

very hot. To prevent injury, do not

touch the air bag storage area’s

internal components immediately

after an air bag has inflated.

WARNING

• Extreme Hazard! Do not use a

rearward facing child restraint on

a seat protected by an air bag in

front of it!

• Never put a child restraint in the

front passenger’s seat. If the front

passenger air bag inflates, it

would cause serious or fatal

injuries.

• When children are seated in the

rear outboard seats of a vehicle

equipped with side and/or curtain

air bags, be sure to install the

child restraint system as far away

from the door side as possible,

and securely lock the child

restraint system in position.

Inflation of side and/or curtain air

bags could cause serious injury

or death to an infant or child.

1JBH3051

Information Provided by:

337

Safety features of your vehicle

C041000AUN

Air bag warning light

The purpose of air bag warning light in

your instrument panel is to alert you of a

potential problem with your air bag -

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS).

When the ignition switch is turned ON,

the indicator light should illuminate for

approximately 6 seconds, then go off.

Have the system checked if:

• The light does not turn on briefly when

you turn the ignition ON.

• The light stays on after illuminating for

approximately 6 seconds.

• The light comes on while the vehicle is

in motion.

• The light blinks when the ignition

switch is in ON position.

SRS components and functions

The SRS consists of the following com-

ponents:

1. Driver's front air bag module

2. Passenger's front air bag module

3. Side impact air bag modules

4. Curtain air bag modules

5. Retractor pre-tensioner assemblies

6. Air bag warning light

7. SRS control module (SRSCM)

8. Front impact sensors

9. Side impact sensors

10. PASS AIR BAG “OFF” indicator

(Front passenger’s seat only)

11. Occupant detection system (Front

passenger’s seat only)

W7-147 OMD030050N

Information Provided by:

Safety features of your vehicle

383

12. Driver’s and front passenger’s seat

belt buckle sensors

13. Anchor pre-tensioner

14. Side pressure sensor

The SRSCM continually monitors all

SRS components while the ignition

switch is ON to determine if a crash

impact is severe enough to require air

bag deployment or pre-tensioner seat

belt deployment.

The SRS air bag warning light " " on the

instrument panel will illuminate for about 6

seconds after the ignition switch is turned

to the ON position, after which the SRS air

bag warning light " " should go out.

W7-147

WARNING

If any of the following conditions

occurs, this indicates a malfunction

of the SRS. Have an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer inspect the air bag

system as soon as possible.

• The light does not turn on briefly

when you turn the ignition ON.

• The light stays on after illuminat-

ing for approximately 6 seconds.

• The light comes on while the

vehicle is in motion.

• The light blinks when the ignition

switch is in ON position.

Information Provided by:

339

Safety features of your vehicle

The front air bag modules are located

both in the center of the steering wheel

and in the front passenger's panel above

the glove box. When the SRSCM detects

a sufficiently severe impact to the front of

the vehicle, it will automatically deploy

the front air bags.

Upon deployment, tear seams molded

directly into the pad covers will separate

under pressure from the expansion of the

air bags. Further opening of the covers

then allows full inflation of the air bags.

A fully inflated air bag, in combination

with a properly worn seat belt, slows the

driver's or the passenger's forward

motion, reducing the risk of head and

chest injury.

After complete inflation, the air bag

immediately starts deflating, enabling the

driver to maintain forward visibility and

the ability to steer or operate other con-

trols.

B240B01L

Driver’s front air bag (1)

B240B02L B240B03L

Driver’s front air bag (2) Driver’s front air bag (3)

Information Provided by:

Safety features of your vehicle

403

WARNING

• Do not install or place any acces-

sories (drink holder, CD or discs

holder, sticker, etc.) on the front

passenger's panel above the

glove box in a vehicle with a pas-

senger's air bag. Such objects

may become dangerous projec-

tiles and cause injury if the pas-

senger's air bag inflates.

• When installing a container of liq-

uid air freshener inside the vehi-

cle, do not place it near the

instrument cluster nor on the

instrument panel surface.

It may become a dangerous pro-

jectile and cause injury if the pas-

senger's air bag inflates.

B240B05L

Passenger’s front air bag

WARNING

• If an air bag deploys, there may

be a loud noise followed by a fine

dust released in the vehicle.

These conditions are normal and

are not hazardous - the air bags

are packed in this fine powder.

The dust generated during air

bag deployment may cause skin

or eye irritation as well as aggra-

vate asthma for some persons.

Always wash all exposed skin

areas thoroughly with lukewarm

water and a mild soap after an

accident in which the air bags

were deployed.

• The SRS can function only when

the ignition switch is in the ON

position. If the SRS air bag warn-

ing light " " does not illumi-

nate, or continuously remains on

after illuminating for about 6 sec-

onds when the ignition switch is

turned to the ON position, or after

the engine is started, comes on

while driving, the SRS is not

working properly. If this occurs,

have your vehicle immediately

inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

(Continued)

• Before you replace a fuse or dis-

connect a battery terminal, turn

the ignition switch to the LOCK

position and remove the ignition

key for ignition key, and turn the

engine start/stop button to the

OFF position for smart key. Never

remove or replace the air bag

related fuse(s) when the ignition

switch is in the ON position.

Failure to heed this warning will

cause the SRS air bag warning

light to illuminate.

Information Provided by:

341

Safety features of your vehicle

Occupant detection system

Your vehicle is equipped with an occu-

pant detection system in the front pas-

senger's seat.

The occupant detection system is

designed to detect the presence of a

properly-seated front passenger and

determine if the passenger's front air bag

should be enabled (may inflate) or not.

The driver's front air bag is not affected

or controlled by the occupant detection

system.

Main components of occupant

detection system

• A detection device located within the

front passenger seat.

• Electronic system to determine whether

the front passenger air bag system

should be activated or deactivated.

• A warning light located on the instru-

ment panel which illuminates the words

PASSENGER AIR BAG "OFF" indicat-

ing the front passenger air bag system

is deactivated.

• The instrument panel air bag warning

light is interconnected with the occupant

detection system.

If the front passenger seat is occupied by

a person that the system determines to be

of adult size, and he/she sits properly (sit-

ting upright with the seatback in an upright

position, centered on the seat cushion

with their seat belt on, legs comfortably

extended and their feet on the floor), the

PASSENGER AIR BAG "OFF" indicator

will be turned off and the front passen-

ger's air bag will be able to inflate, if nec-

essary, in frontal crashes.

You will find the PASS AIR BAG "OFF"

indicator on the center facia panel. This

system detects the conditions 1~4 in the

following table and activates or deacti-

vates the front passenger air bag based

on these conditions.

Always be sure that you and all vehicle

occupants are seated and restrained

properly (sitting upright with the seat in

an upright position, centered on the seat

cushion, with the person's legs comfort-

ably extended, feet on the floor, and

wearing the safety belt properly) for the

most effective protection by the air bag

and the safety belt.

ORB031034N

WARNING

Do not put anything in front of the

passenger air bag off indicator.

Information Provided by:

Safety features of your vehicle

423

• The ODS may not function properly if

the passenger takes actions which can

affect the detection system. These

include:

(1) Failing to sit in an upright position.

(2) Leaning against the door or center

console.

(3) Sitting towards the sides or the

front of the seat.

(4) Putting legs on the dashboard or

resting them on other locations.

(5) Improperly wearing the safety belt.

(6) Reclining the seat back.

(7) Unauthorized replacement of seat

cover.

(8) Covering seat with blanket

WARNING

Riding in an improper position or

placing weight on the front passen-

ger's seat when it is unoccupied by

a passenger adversely affects the

Occupant Detection System (ODS).

Your ODS is designed to resist

electronic waves, but do not place

an electronic device such as laptop

computer on or near the seat cush-

ion since it may defeat the proper

functioning of the ODS.

(Continued)

Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant detection system

Condition detected by the

occupant detection

system

1. Adult or child*1

2. Child restraint system*2

3. Unoccupied

4. There is a malfunction

in the system

Off

Activated

Deactivated

Activated

"PASSENGER AIR

BAG OFF" indicator

light

SRS warning light

Front passenger

air bag

Indicator/Warning light Devices

*1) The ODS system uses a field to eval-

uate a person's size to determine

whether the air bag should deploy. It

is possible for a child to be detected

and activate the ODS, thus allowing

the airbag to deploy. To maximize

safety, do not allow children to ride in

the front passenger seat.

*2) Never install a child restraint system

on the front passenger seat.

Information Provided by:

343

Safety features of your vehicle

1KMN3663

1KMN3664

1KMN3665

- Never sit with hips shifted

towards the front of the seat.

- Never lean on the door or center

console.

- Never sit on one side of the front

passenger seat.

- Never place feet on the dash-

board.

OVQ036013N

1KMN3662

- Never put a heavy load, an active

electronic device or blanket in

the front passenger seat or seat-

back pocket.

- Never excessively recline the

front passenger seatback.

OVQ036014N

- Never place feet on the front pas-

senger seatback.

(Continued)

Information Provided by:

Safety features of your vehicle

443

When an adult is seated in the front pas-

senger seat, if the PASS AIR BAG “OFF”

indicator is on, turn the ignition switch to

the LOCK or OFF position and ask the

passenger to sit properly (sitting upright

with the seat back in an upright position,

centered on the seat cushion with their

seat belt on, legs comfortably extended

and their feet on the floor). Restart the

engine and have the person remain in

that position. This will allow the system to

detect the person and to enable the pas-

senger air bag.

If the PASS AIR BAG "OFF" indicator is

still on, ask the passenger to move to the

rear seat.

✽✽NOTICE

The PASS AIR BAG "OFF" indicator

illuminates for about 4 seconds after the

ignition switch is turned to the ON posi-

tion or after the engine is started. If the

front passenger seat is occupied, the

occupant detection sensor will then clas-

sify the front passenger after several

more seconds.

B990A01O

WARNING

Do not allow an adult passenger to

ride in the front seat when the PASS

AIR BAG “OFF” indicator is illumi-

nated because the air bag will not

deploy in the event of a crash. If the

PASS AIR BAG "OFF" indicator

remains illuminated after the adult

passenger repositions themselves

properly and the car is restarted, it

is recommended that passenger

move to the rear seat because the

passenger's front air bag will not

deploy.

Front seat passengers must stay

properly seated to avoid serious

injury from a deploying air bag.

Proper position

WARNING

Do not put a heavy load in the front

passenger seatback pocket or on the

front passenger seat. Do not hang

onto the front passenger seat. Do not

hang any items, such as a seatback

table, on the front passenger seat-

back. Do not place feet on the front

passenger seatback. Do not place

any items under the front passenger

seat. Any of these could interfere

with proper sensor operation.

WARNING

• Even though your vehicle is

equipped with the occupant

detection system, never install a

child restraint system in the front

passenger's seat. A deploying air

bag can forcefully strike a child

resulting in serious injuries or

death. Any child age 12 and

under should ride in the rear seat.

Children too large for child

restraints should use the avail-

able lap/shoulder belts. No mat-

ter what type of crash, children of

all ages are safer when restrained

in the rear seat.

(Continued)

Information Provided by:

345

Safety features of your vehicle

(Continued)

• Do not place an electronic device

such as a laptop computer on the

front passenger seat. Its electron-

ic field may cause the ODS to

switch to the "on" condition and

thus allow the passenger air bag

to deploy needlessly in a colli-

sion, increasing your repair costs.

• The adult or child in the front pas-

senger’s seat who is not seated

correctly (for example: seat exces-

sively reclined, leaning on the

door or center console, or hips

shifted forward in the seat) can

cause a condition where the occu-

pant detection system senses

less field than if the occupant

were seated properly (sitting

upright with the seatback in an

upright position, centered on the

seat cushion with their seat belt

on, legs comfortably extended

and their feet on the floor).

This condition can result in an

adult potentially being misclassi-

fied as a child and illumination of

the PASS AIR BAG "OFF" indicator.

(Continued)

• Accident statistics show that chil-

dren are safer if they are

restrained in the rear, as opposed

to the front seat. It is recommend-

ed that child restraints be secured

in a rear seat, including an infant

riding in a rear-facing infant seat,

a child riding in a forward-facing

child seat and an older child rid-

ing in a booster seat.

• Air bags can only be used once –

have an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer replace the air bag imme-

diately after deployment.

• The occupant detection system

may not work properly if water,

coffee or any other liquid includ-

ing rain gets on the seat. Keep

the front seat dry at all times.

(Continued)

• If the PASS AIR BAG "OFF" indi-

cator is illuminated when the

front passenger's seat is occu-

pied by an adult and he/she sits

properly (sitting upright with the

seatback in an upright position,

centered on the seat cushion

with their seat belt on, legs com-

fortably extended and their feet

on the floor), have that person sit

in the rear seat.

• Do not modify or replace the front

passenger seat. Don't place any-

thing on or attach anything such

as a blanket or seat heater to the

front passenger seat. This can

adversely affect the occupant

detection system.

• Do not sit on sharp objects such

as tools when occupying the

front passenger seat. This can

adversely affect the occupant

detection system.

• Do not use accessory seat cov-

ers on the front seats.

(Continued)

Information Provided by:

Safety features of your vehicle

463

Driver's and passenger's front air

bag

Your vehicle is equipped with an

Advanced Supplemental Restraint (Air

Bag) System and lap/shoulder belts at

both the driver and passenger seating

positions. The indications of the system's

presence are the letters "SRS AIR BAG"

or “AIR BAG" embossed on the air bag

pad cover in the steering wheel and the

passenger's side front panel pad above

the glove box.

The SRS consists of air bags installed

under the pad covers in the center of the

steering wheel and the passenger's side

front panel above the glove box.

The purpose of the SRS is to provide the

vehicle's driver and/or the front passen-

ger with additional protection than that

offered by the seat belt system alone in

case of a frontal impact of sufficient

severity. The SRS uses sensors to gather

information about the driver's seat posi-

tion, the driver's and front passenger's

seat belt usage and impact severity.

WARNING

If the occupant detection system is

not working properly, the SRS air

bag warning light on the instru-

ment panel will illuminate because

the passenger's front air bag is

connected with the occupant

detection system. If there is a mal-

function of the occupant detection

system, the PASS AIR BAG "OFF"

indicator will not illuminate and the

passenger's front air bag will inflate

in frontal impact crashes even if

there is no occupant in the front

passenger's seat. If the SRS air bag

warning light does not illuminate

when the ignition switch is turned

to the ON position, remains illumi-

nated after approximately 6 sec-

onds when the ignition switch is

turned to the ON position, or if it

illuminates while the vehicle is

being driven, have an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer inspect the occu-

pant detection system and the SRS

air bag system as soon as possible.

ORB030010

Driver’s front air bag

ORB030011

Passenger’s front air bag

Information Provided by:

347

Safety features of your vehicle

The seat belt buckle sensors determine if

the driver and front passenger's seat

belts are fastened. These sensors pro-

vide the ability to control the SRS deploy-

ment based on whether or not the seat

belts are fastened, and how severe the

impact is.

The advanced SRS offers the ability to

control the air bag inflation within two lev-

els. A first stage level is provided for mod-

erate-severity impacts. A second stage

level is provided for more severe impacts.

According to the impact severity and seat

belt usage, the SRSCM (SRS Control

Module) controls the air bag inflation.

Failure to properly wear seat belts can

increase the risk or severity of injury in

an accident.

Additionally, your vehicle is equipped

with an occupant detection system in the

front passenger's seat. The occupant

detection system detects the presence of

a passenger in the front passenger's seat

and will turn off the front passenger's air

bag under certain conditions. For more

detail, see "Occupant detection system"

in this section.

WARNING

If the occupant detection system is

not working properly, the SRS air

bag warning light on the instru-

ment panel will illuminate because

the SRS air bag warning light is

connected with the occupant

detection system. If the SRS air bag

warning light does not illuminate

when the ignition switch is turned

to the ON position, remains illumi-

nated after approximately 6 sec-

onds when the ignition switch is

turned to the ON position, or if it

illuminates while the vehicle is

being driven, have an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer inspect the

advanced SRS air bag system as

soon as possible.

WARNING

Do not place any objects under-

neath the front seats as they could

interfere with the occupant detec-

tion system.

Information Provided by:

Safety features of your vehicle

483

✽✽NOTICE

• Be sure to read information about the

SRS on the labels provided on the sun

visor.

• Advanced air bags are combined with

pre-tensioner seat belts to help pro-

vide enhanced occupant protection in

frontal crashes. Front air bags are not

intended to deploy in collisions in

which protection can be provided by

the pre-tensioner seat belt.

(Continued)

• Move your seat as far back as

practical from the front air bags,

while still maintaining control of

the vehicle.

• You and your passengers should

never sit or lean unnecessarily

close to the air bags. Improperly

positioned driver and passengers

can be severely injured by inflat-

ing air bags.

• Never lean against the door or

center console – always sit in an

upright position.

• Do not allow a passenger to ride

in the front seat when the PASS

AIR BAG "OFF" indicator is illu-

minated, because the air bag will

not deploy in the event of a mod-

erate or severe frontal crash.

(Continued)

WARNING

Always use seat belts and child

restraints – every trip, every time,

everyone! Air bags inflate with con-

siderable force and in the blink of

an eye. Seat belts help keep occu-

pants in proper position to obtain

maximum benefit from the air bag.

Even with advanced air bags,

improperly and unbelted occupants

can be severely injured when the

air bag inflates. Always follow the

precautions about seat belts, air

bags and occupant safety con-

tained in this manual.

To reduce the chance of serious or

fatal injuries and receive the maxi-

mum safety benefit from your

restraint system:

• Never place a child in any child or

booster seat in the front seat.

• ABC – Always Buckle Children in

the back seat. It is the safest

place for children of any age to

ride.

• Front and side air bags can injure

occupants improperly positioned

in the front seats.

(Continued)

WARNING

If you are considering modification

of your vehicle due to a disability,

please contact the Hyundai

Customer Assistance Center at 1-

800-633-5151.

Information Provided by:

349

Safety features of your vehicle

(Continued)

• Even though your vehicle is

equipped with the occupant

detection system, do not install a

child restraint system in the front

passenger seat position. A child

restraint system must never be

placed in the front seat.The infant

or child could be severely injured

or killed by an air bag deployment

in case of an accident.

• Children age 12 and under must

always be properly restrained in

the rear seat. Never allow chil-

dren to ride in the front passen-

ger seat. If a child over 12 must

be seated in the front seat, he or

she must be properly belted and

the seat should be moved as far

back as possible.

• For maximum safety protection in

all types of crashes, all occu-

pants including the driver should

always wear their seat belts

whether or not an air bag is also

provided at their seating position

to minimize the risk of severe

injury or death in the event of a

crash. Do not sit or lean unneces-

sarily close to the air bag while

the vehicle is in motion.

(Continued)

• No objects should be placed over

or near the air bag modules on

the steering wheel, instrument

panel, and the front passenger's

panel above the glove box,

because any such object could

cause harm if the vehicle is in a

crash severe enough to cause

the air bags to deploy.

• Never place covers, blankets or

seat warmers on the passenger

seat as these may interfere with

the occupant detection system.

• Do not tamper with or disconnect

SRS wiring or other components

of the SRS system. Doing so

could result in injury, due to acci-

dental deployment of the air bags

or by rendering the SRS inopera-

tive.

• If the SRS air bag warning light

remains illuminated while the

vehicle is being driven, have an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer

inspect the air bag system as

soon as possible.

(Continued)

• Air bags can only be used once –

have an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer replace the air bag imme-

diately after deployment.

• The SRS is designed to deploy

the front air bags only when an

impact is sufficiently severe and

when the impact angle is less

than 30° from the forward longitu-

dinal axis of the vehicle.

Additionally, the air bags will only

deploy once. Seat belts must be

worn at all times.

• Front air bags are not intended to

deploy in side-impact, rear-

impact or rollover crashes. In

addition, front air bags will not

deploy in frontal crashes below

the deployment threshold.

(Continued)

Information Provided by:

Safety features of your vehicle

503

Side impact air bag

Your vehicle is equipped with a side

impact air bag in each front seat. The

purpose of the air bag is to provide the

vehicle's driver and/or the front passen-

ger with additional protection than that

offered by the seat belt alone.

The side impact air bags are designed to

deploy only during certain side-impact

collisions, depending on the crash sever-

ity, angle, speed and point of impact. The

side impact air bags are not designed to

deploy in all side impact situations.

(Continued)

• Sitting improperly or out of posi-

tion can result in serious or fatal

injury in a crash. All occupants

should sit upright with the seat-

back in an upright position, cen-

tered on the seat cushion with

their seat belt on, legs comfort-

ably extended and their feet on

the floor until the vehicle is

parked and the ignition key is

removed.

• The SRS air bag system must

deploy very rapidly to provide

protection in a crash. If an occu-

pant is out of position because of

not wearing a seat belt, the air

bag may forcefully contact the

occupant causing serious or fatal

injuries.

ORBC030021

OTF030036

Front

WARNING

Do not allow the passengers to lean

their heads or bodies onto doors,

put their arms on the doors, stretch

their arms out of the window, or

place objects between the doors

and passengers when they are

seated on seats equipped with side

and/or curtain air bags.

Information Provided by:

351

Safety features of your vehicle

Curtain air bag

Curtain air bags are located along both

sides of the roof rails above the front and

rear doors.

They are designed to help protect the

heads of the front seat occupants and

the rear outboard seat occupants in cer-

tain side impact collisions.

WARNING

• The side impact air bag is sup-

plemental to the driver's and the

passenger's seat belt systems

and is not a substitute for them.

Therefore your seat belts must be

worn at all times while the vehicle

is in motion. The air bags deploy

only in certain side impact condi-

tions severe enough to cause

significant injury to the vehicle

occupants.

• For best protection from the side

impact air bag system and to

avoid being injured by the

deploying side impact air bag,

both front seat occupants should

sit in an upright position with the

seat belt properly fastened. The

driver's hands should be placed

on the steering wheel at the 9:00

and 3:00 positions. The passen-

ger's arms and hands should be

placed on their laps.

• Do not use any accessory seat

covers.

(Continued)

• Use of seat covers could reduce

or prevent the effectiveness of

the system.

• Do not install any accessories on

the side or near the side air bag.

• Do not place any objects over the

air bag or between the air bag

and yourself.

• Do not place any objects (an

umbrella, bag, etc.) between the

front door and the front seat.

Such objects may become dan-

gerous projectiles and cause

injury if the supplemental side air

bag inflates.

• To prevent unexpected deploy-

ment of the side impact air bag

that may result in personal injury,

avoid impact to the side impact

sensor when the ignition switch

is on.

• If the seat or seat cover is dam-

aged, have the vehicle checked

and repaired by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer because your

vehicle is equipped with side

impact air bags and an occupant

detection system.

OYF039058N

Information Provided by:

Safety features of your vehicle

523

The curtain air bags are designed to

deploy only during certain side impact

collisions, depending on the crash sever-

ity, angle, speed and impact. The curtain

air bags are not designed to deploy in all

side impact situations, collisions from the

front or rear of the vehicle or in most

rollover situations.

WARNING

• In order for side and curtain air

bags to provide the best protec-

tion, front seat occupants and

outboard rear occupants should

sit in an upright position with the

seat belts properly fastened.

Importantly, children should sit in

a proper child restraint system in

the rear seat.

• When children are seated in the

rear outboard seats, they must be

seated in the proper child

restraint system. Make sure to

put the child restraint system as

far away from the door side as

possible, and secure the child

restraint system in a locked posi-

tion.

• Do not allow the passengers to

lean their heads or bodies onto

doors, put their arms on the

doors, stretch their arms out of

the window, or place objects

between the doors and passen-

gers when they are seated on

seats equipped with side and/or

curtain air bags.

(Continued)

• Never try to open or repair any

components of the side curtain

air bag system. This should only

be done by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Failure to follow the above instruc-

tions can result in injury or death to

the vehicle occupants in an acci-

dent.

Information Provided by:

353

Safety features of your vehicle

Why didn’t my air bag go off in a

collision? (Inflation and non-infla-

tion conditions of the air bag)

There are many types of accidents in

which the air bag would not be expect-

ed to provide additional protection.

These include rear impacts, second or

third collisions in multiple impact

accidents, as well as low speed

impacts.

Air bag collision sensors

(1) SRS control module

(2) Front impact sensor

(3) Side impact sensor

(4) Side pressure sensor

ORB032013/ORB030014/ORB030015/OMD030039/ORB031018N

Information Provided by:

Safety features of your vehicle

543

Air bag inflation conditions

Front air bags

Front air bags are designed to inflate in a

frontal collision depending on the intensi-

ty, speed or angles of impact of the front

collision.

WARNING

• Do not hit or allow any objects to

impact the locations where air

bags or sensors are installed.

This may cause unexpected air

bag deployment, which could

result in serious personal injury

or death.

• If the installation location or

angle of the sensors is altered in

any way, the air bags may deploy

when they should not or they may

not deploy when they should,

causing severe injury or death.

Therefore, do not try to perform

maintenance on or around the air

bag sensors. Have the vehicle

checked and repaired by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

(Continued)

• Problems may arise if the sensor

installation angles are changed

due to the deformation of the

front bumper, body or B pillars or

front door where side collision

sensors are installed. Have the

vehicle checked and repaired by

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

• Your vehicle has been designed

to absorb impact and deploy the

air bag(s) in certain collisions.

Installing bumper guards or

replacing a bumper with non-gen-

uine parts may adversely affect

your vehicle’s collision and air

bag deployment performance.

1JBA3513

Information Provided by:

355

Safety features of your vehicle

Side impact and curtain air bags

(if equipped)

Side impact and curtain air bags are

designed to inflate when an impact is

detected by side collision sensors

depending on the strength, speed or

angles of impact resulting from a side

impact collision.

Although the front air bags (driver’s and

front passenger’s air bags) are designed

to inflate only in frontal collisions, they

also may inflate in other types of colli-

sions if the front impact sensors detect a

sufficient impact. Side impact and curtain

air bags are designed to inflate only in

side impact collisions, but they may

inflate in other collisions if the side

impact sensors detect a sufficient

impact.

If the vehicle chassis is impacted by

bumps or objects on unpaved roads, the

air bags may deploy. Drive carefully on

unpaved roads or on surfaces not

designed for vehicle traffic to prevent

unintended air bag deployment.

Air bag non-inflation conditions

• In certain low-speed collisions the air

bags may not deploy. The air bags are

designed not to deploy in such cases

because they may not provide benefits

beyond the protection of the seat belts

in such collisions.

1JBA3514

OMD030044

1JBA3515

Information Provided by:

Safety features of your vehicle

563

• Air bags are not designed to inflate in

rear collisions, because occupants are

moved backward by the force of the

impact. In this case, inflated air bags

would not be able to provide any addi-

tional benefit.

• Front air bags may not inflate in side

impact collisions, because occupants

move to the direction of the collision,

and thus in side impacts, frontal air bag

deployment would not provide addi-

tional occupant protection.

However, side impact and curtain air

bags may inflate depending on the

intensity, vehicle speed and angles of

impact.

• In an angled collision, the force of

impact may direct the occupants in a

direction where the air bags would not

be able to provide any additional bene-

fit, and thus the sensors may not

deploy any air bags.

OBH038060OBH038058 1JBA3516

Information Provided by:

357

Safety features of your vehicle

• Just before impact, drivers often brake

heavily. Such heavy braking lowers the

front portion of the vehicle causing it to

“ride” under a vehicle with a higher

ground clearance. Air bags may not

inflate in this "under-ride" situation

because deceleration forces that are

detected by sensors may be signifi-

cantly reduced by such “under-ride”

collisions.

• Front air bags do not inflate in rollover

accidents. However, side impact and

curtain air bags may inflate in a

rollover, when it is detected by the

rollover sensor.

• Air bags may not inflate if the vehicle

collides with objects such as utility

poles or trees, where the point of

impact is concentrated to one area and

the deceleration forces are significant-

ly reduced.

1JBA35181JBA3517 1JBA3522

Information Provided by:

Safety features of your vehicle

583

SRS Care

The SRS is virtually maintenance-free

and so there are no parts you can safely

service by yourself. If the SRS air bag

warning light " " does not illuminate,

when you turn the ignition on, or continu-

ously remains on, have your vehicle

immediately inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Any work on the SRS system, such as

removing, installing, repairing, or any

work on the steering wheel, the front

passenger's panel, front seats and roof

rails must be performed by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer. Improper handling of

the SRS system may result in serious

personal injury.

WARNING

• Modification to SRS components

or wiring, including the addition

of any kind of badges to the pad

covers or modifications to the

body structure, can adversely

affect SRS performance and lead

to possible injury.

• Not only the modification of the

parts where the SRS sensors are

but also the modification of other

parts of the vehicle may affect the

SRS performance and lead to

possible injury.

• For cleaning the air bag pad cov-

ers, use only a soft, dry cloth or

one which has been moistened

with plain water. Solvents or

cleaners could adversely affect

the air bag covers and proper

deployment of the system.

•

No objects should be placed over

or near the air bag modules on the

steering wheel, instrument panel,

and the front passenger's panel

above the glove box, because any

such object could cause harm if the

vehicle is in a crash severe enough

to cause the air bags to inflate.

(Continued)

• If the air bags inflate, they must

be replaced by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

• Do not tamper with or disconnect

SRS wiring, or other components

of the SRS system. Doing so

could result in injury, due to acci-

dental inflation of the air bags or

by rendering the SRS inopera-

tive.

• If components of the air bag sys-

tem must be discarded, or if the

vehicle must be scrapped, certain

safety precautions must be

observed. An authorized

HYUNDAI dealer knows these

precautions and can give you the

necessary information. Failure to

follow these precautions and pro-

cedures could increase the risk

of personal injury.

• If your car was flooded and has

soaked carpeting or water on the

flooring, you shouldn't try to start

the engine; have the car towed to

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Information Provided by:

359

Safety features of your vehicle

Additional safety precautions

•Never let passengers ride in the

cargo area or on top of a folded-

down back seat. All occupants should

sit upright, fully back in their seats with

their seat belts on and their feet on the

floor.

•Passengers should not move out of

or change seats while the vehicle is

moving. A passenger who is not wear-

ing a seat belt during a crash or emer-

gency stop can be thrown against the

inside of the vehicle, against other

occupants, or out of the vehicle.

•Each seat belt is designed to

restrain one occupant. If more than

one person uses the same seat belt,

they could be seriously injured or killed

in a collision.

•Do not use any accessories on seat

belts. Devices claiming to improve

occupant comfort or reposition the seat

belt can reduce the protection provided

by the seat belt and increase the

chance of serious injury in a crash.

•Passengers should not place hard

or sharp objects between them-

selves and the air bags. Carrying

hard or sharp objects on your lap or in

your mouth can result in injuries if an

air bag inflates.

•Keep occupants away from the air

bag covers. All occupants should sit

upright, fully back in their seats with

their seat belts on and their feet on the

floor. If occupants are too close to the

air bag covers, they could be injured if

the air bags inflate.

•Do not attach or place objects on or

near the air bag covers. Any object

attached to or placed on the front or

side air bag covers could interfere with

the proper operation of the air bags.

•Do not modify the front seats.

Modification of the front seats could

interfere with the operation of the sup-

plemental restraint system sensing

components or side air bags.

•Do not place items under the front

seats. Placing items under the front

seats could interfere with the operation

of the supplemental restraint system

sensing components and wiring har-

nesses.

•Never hold an infant or child on your

lap. The infant or child could be seri-

ously injured or killed in the event of a

crash. All infants and children should

be properly restrained in appropriate

child safety seats or seat belts in the

rear seat.

Adding equipment to or modifying

your air bag-equipped vehicle

If you modify your vehicle by changing

your vehicle's frame, bumper system,

front end or side sheet metal or ride

height, this may affect the operation of

your vehicle's air bag system.

WARNING

• Sitting improperly or out of posi-

tion can cause occupants to be

shifted too close to a deploying

air bag, strike the interior struc-

ture or be thrown from the vehicle

resulting in serious injury or

death.

• Always sit upright with the seat-

back in an upright position, cen-

tered on the seat cushion with

your seat belt on, legs comfort-

ably extended and your feet on

the floor.

• Be careful not to cause impact to

the doors when the ignition is

ON. The air bags may inflate.

Information Provided by:

Safety features of your vehicle

603

Air bag warning label

Air bag warning labels, some required by

the U.S. National Highway Traffic Safety

Administration (NHTSA), are attached to

alert the driver and passengers of poten-

tial risks of the air bag system.

ORB030029

OMD030040N

Information Provided by:

Features of your vehicle

Keys / 4-3

Remote keyless entry / 4-4

Door locks / 4-7

Trunk / 4-12

Tailgate / 4-14

Windows / 4-16

Hood / 4-21

Fuel filler lid / 4-23

Sunroof / 4-26

Steering wheel / 4-30

Mirrors / 4-32

Instrument cluster / 4-36

Hazard warning flasher / 4-52

Lighting / 4-52

Wipers and washers / 4-57

Interior light / 4-61

Defroster / 4-64

Manual climate control system / 4-65

Automatic climate control system / 4-74

Windshield defrosting and defogging / 4-81

Storage compartments / 4-84

Information Provided by:

Interior features / 4-87

Exterior features / 4-92

Audio system / 4-94

Features of your vehicle

Information Provided by:

Features of your vehicle

Record your key number

The key code number

is stamped on the key

code tag attached to

the key set. Should

you lose your keys,

this number will enable an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer to duplicate the keys

easily. Remove the key code tag and

store it in a safe place. Also, record the

key code number and keep it in a safe

and handy place, but not in the vehicle.

Key operations

Used to start the engine, lock and unlock

the doors.

KEYS

WARNING - Ignition key

Leaving children unattended in a

vehicle with the ignition key is dan-

gerous even if the key is not in the

ignition switch. Children copy

adults and they could place the key

in the ignition switch. The ignition

key would enable children to oper-

ate power windows or other con-

trols, or even make the vehicle

move, which could result in serious

bodily injury or even death. Never

leave the keys in your vehicle with

unsupervised children, when the

Engine is running.

WARNING

Use only HYUNDAI original parts

for the ignition key in your vehicle.

If an aftermarket key is used, the

ignition switch may not return to

ON after START. If this happens,

the starter will continue to operate

causing damage to the starter

motor and possible fire due to

excessive current in the wiring.

Information Provided by:

Features of your vehicle

Remote keyless entry system

operations

Lock (1)

All doors are locked if the lock button is

pressed. If all doors and trunk are closed,

the hazard warning lights will blink once to

indicate that all doors are locked.

Also, if the lock button is pressed once

more within 4 seconds, the hazard warn-

ing lights will blink and the horn will sound

once to confirm that the door is locked.

However, if any door or trunk lid remains

open, the hazard warning lights (and/or

the horn) will not operate. But if all doors

and trunk lid are closed after the lock but-

ton is pressed, the hazard warning lights

will blink once.

Unlock (2)

Driver's door is unlocked if the unlock

button is pressed once. The hazard

warning lights will blink twice to indicate

that the driver's door is unlocked. All

doors are unlocked if the unlock button is

pressed twice within 4 seconds.

The hazard warning lights will blink twice

again to indicate that all doors are

unlocked. If no doors are opened within

30 seconds after unlocking them, the

doors will automatically lock again.

✽✽NOTICE - Unlock mode conversion

(if equipped)

You can change the system to unlock all

doors by one pressing the unlock button

on the transmitter. If you want this fea-

ture (central door unlock mode), per-

form the following:

two stage unlock mode ↔↔central door

unlock mode

The unlock mode is changed alternately

by pressing the lock button and unlock

button on the transmitter at the same time

for 5 seconds or more. The hazard warn-

ing lights will blink four times to indicate

that the mode conversion is completed.

Panic (3)

The horn sounds and hazard warning

lights flash for about 30 seconds if this

button is pressed for more than 1.5 sec-

ond. To stop the horn and lights, press

any button except the trunk button on

the transmitter.

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (IF EQUIPPED)

ORB044381

OJB040008N

Information Provided by:

Features of your vehicle

Transmitter precautions

✽✽NOTICE

The transmitter will not work if any of

following occur:

• The ignition key is in ignition switch.

• You exceed the operating distance

limit (about 90 feet [30 m]).

• The battery in the transmitter is

weak.

• Other vehicles or objects may be

blocking the signal.

• The weather is extremely cold.

• The transmitter is close to a radio

transmitter such as a radio station or

an airport which can interfere with

normal operation of the transmitter.

When the transmitter does not work

correctly, open and close the door with

the ignition key. If you have a problem

with the transmitter, contact an author-

ized HYUNDAI dealer.

(Continued)

If the transmitter is in close proximity to

your cell phone or smart phone, the sig-

nal from the transmitter could be

blocked by normal operation of your

cell phone or smart phone. This is espe-

cially important when the phone is

active such as making call, receiving

calls, text messaging, and/or

sending/receiving emails. Avoid placing

the transmitter and your cell phone or

smart phone in the same pants or jacket

pocket and maintain adequate distance

between the two devices.

This device complies with Part 15 of

the FCC rules.

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful

interference, and

2. This device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

CAUTION

Keep the transmitter away from

water or any liquid. If the keyless

entry system is inoperative due to

exposure to water or liquids, it will

not be covered by your manufactur-

er’s vehicle warranty.

WARNING

Changes or modifications not

expressly approved by the party

responsible for compliance could

void the user’s authority to operate

the equipment. If the keyless entry

system is inoperative due to

changes or modifications not

expressly approved by the party

responsible for compliance, it will

not be covered by your manufactur-

er’s vehicle warranty.

Information Provided by:

Features of your vehicle

Battery replacement

The transmitter uses a 3 volt lithium bat-

tery which will normally last for several

years. When replacement is necessary,

use the following procedure.

1. Insert a slim tool into the slot and gently

pry open the transmitter center cover.

2. Replace the battery with a new battery

(CR2032). When replacing the battery,

make sure the battery position.

3. Install the battery in the reverse order

of removal.

For replacement transmitters, see an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer for transmit-

ter reprogramming.

CAUTION

• The transmitter is designed to

give you years of trouble-free

use, however it can malfunction if

exposed to moisture or static

electricity. If you are unsure how

to use your transmitter or replace

the battery, contact an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

• Using the wrong battery can cause

the transmitter to malfunction. Be

sure to use the correct battery.

• To avoid damaging the transmit-

ter, don't drop it, get it wet, or

expose it to heat or sunlight.

WARNING

An inappropriately dis-

posed battery can be harm-

ful to the environment and

human health.

Dispose the battery according to

your local law(s) or regulation.

1KMA2003

Information Provided by:

Features of your vehicle

Operating door locks from out-

side the vehicle

• Turn the key toward the rear of the

vehicle to unlock and toward the front

of the vehicle to lock.

• If you lock the door with a key, all vehi-

cle doors will lock automatically.

(if equipped)

• From the driver’s door, turn the key

toward the rear of the vehicle once to

unlock the driver’s door and once more

within 4 seconds to unlock all doors.

(if equipped)

• Doors can also be locked and

unlocked with the transmitter.

• Once the doors are unlocked, they may

be opened by pulling the door handle.

• When closing the door, push the door

by hand. Make sure that the doors are

closed securely.

✽✽NOTICE

• In cold and wet climates, door locks

and door mechanisms may not work

properly due to freezing conditions.

• If the door is locked/unlocked multi-

ple times in rapid succession with

either the vehicle key or door lock

switch, the system may stop operating

temporarily in order to protect the

circuit and prevent damage to system

components.

✽✽NOTICE - Unlock mode conversion

(if equipped)

You can change the system to unlock all

doors by turning the key to the right once.

If you want this feature (central door

unlock mode), perform the following:

two stage unlock mode ↔↔central door

unlock mode

The unlock mode is changed alternately

by pressing the lock button and unlock

button on the transmitter (if equipped) at

the same time for 5 seconds or more. The

hazard warning lights will blink four

times to indicate that the mode conversion

is completed.

DOOR LOCKS

OYF049006

Lock

Unlock

WARNING

• If you don't close the door

securely, the door may open

again.

• Be careful that someone's body

and hands are not trapped when

closing the door.

Information Provided by:

Features of your vehicle

• To lock a door without the key, push the

inside door lock button (1) or central

door lock switch (2) to the “Lock” posi-

tion and close the door (3).

• If you lock the door with the central

door lock switch (2), all vehicle doors

will lock automatically.

✽✽NOTICE

Always remove the ignition key, engage

the parking brake, close all windows

and lock all doors when leaving your

vehicle unattended.

Operating door locks from inside

the vehicle

With the door lock button

• To unlock a door, push the door lock

button (1) to the “Unlock” position. The

red mark (2) on the button will be visi-

ble.

• To lock a door, push the door lock but-

ton (1) to the “Lock” position. If the door

is locked properly, the red mark (2) on

the button will not be visible.

• To open a door, pull the door handle

(3) outward.

• If the inner door handle on either front

door is pulled when the door lock but-

ton is in the locked position, the door

(or all doors) will unlock and the door

will open. (if equipped)

• Front door cannot be locked if the igni-

tion key is in the ignition switch and the

door is open. (if equipped)

ORB040003

LLoo

oocc

cckk

UUnn

nnll

lloo

oocc

cckk

WARNING - Door lock

malfunction

If a power door lock ever fails to

function while you are in the vehi-

cle, try one or more of the following

techniques to exit:

• Operate the door unlock feature

repeatedly (both electronic and

manual) while simultaneously

pulling on the door handle.

• Operate the other door locks and

handles, front and rear.

• Lower a front window and use the

key to unlock the door from out-

side.

ORB040002L

Information Provided by:

Features of your vehicle

With central door lock switch

(if equipped)

Operate by depressing the central door

lock switch.

• When pushing down on the front por-

tion (1) of the switch, all vehicle doors

will lock.

• When pushing down on the rear por-

tion (2) of the switch, all vehicle doors

will unlock.

• If the key is in the ignition switch and

front door is open, the doors will not

lock even though the front portion (1)

of central door lock switch is pressed.

WARNING - Doors

• The doors should always be fully

closed and locked while the vehi-

cle is in motion to prevent acci-

dental opening of the door.

Locked doors will also discour-

age potential intruders when the

vehicle stops or slows.

• Be careful when opening doors

and watch for vehicles, motorcy-

cles, bicycles or pedestrians

approaching the vehicle in the

path of the door. Opening a door

when something is approaching

can cause damage or injury.

ORBC040004

ORB041410N

Passenger's door

Driver’s door

WARNING - Unlocked

vehicles

Leaving your vehicle unlocked can

invite theft or possible harm to you

or others from someone hiding in

your vehicle while you are gone.

Always remove the ignition key,

engage the parking brake, close all

windows and lock all doors when

leaving your vehicle unattended.

Information Provided by:

Features of your vehicle

104

Impact sensing door unlock system

(if equipped)

All doors will be automatically unlocked

when the impact is delivered to impact

sensors while the ignition switch is ON.

However, the doors may not be unlocked

if mechanical problems occur with the

door lock system or battery.

Speed sensing door lock system

(if equipped)

All doors will be automatically locked

after the vehicle speed exceeds 9 mph

(15 km/h). And all doors will be automat-

ically unlocked when you turn the engine

off or when you remove the ignition key.

(if equipped)

Auto door lock/unlock feature

(Automatic transaxle)

(if equipped)

• All doors will automatically lock when

the shift lever is moved out of P (Park).

• All doors will automatically unlock

when the shift lever is moved into P

(Park).

WARNING - Unattended

children

An enclosed vehicle can become

extremely hot, causing death or

severe injury to unattended chil-

dren or animals who cannot escape

the vehicle. Furthermore, children

might operate features of the vehi-

cle that could injure them, or they

could encounter other harm, possi-

bly from someone gaining entry to

the vehicle. Never leave children or

animals unattended in your vehicle.

Information Provided by:

411

Features of your vehicle

Child-protector rear door lock

The child safety lock is provided to help

prevent children from accidentally open-

ing the rear doors from inside the vehicle.

The rear door safety locks should be

used whenever children are in the vehi-

cle.

1. Open the rear door.

2. Push the child safety lock located on

the rear edge of the door to the “Lock”

position. When the child safety lock is

in the “Lock ( )” position, rear door

will not open even though the inner

door handle is pulled inside the vehi-

cle.

3. Close the rear door.

To open the rear door, pull the outside

door handle (2).

Even though the doors may be unlocked,

the rear door will not open by pulling the

inner door handle until the rear door child

safety lock is unlocked.

ORB040005

WARNING - Rear door

locks

If children accidentally open the

rear doors while the vehicle is in

motion, they could fall out of the

vehicle, resulting in severe injury or

death. To prevent children from

opening the rear doors from the

inside, the rear door safety locks

should be used whenever children

are in the vehicle.

Information Provided by:

Features of your vehicle

124

Opening the trunk

With the key

To open the trunk, insert the key and turn

it clockwise.

With the trunk lid release lever

To open the trunk from inside the vehicle,

pull up the trunk lid release lever.

Once the trunk is opened and then

closed, the trunk is locked automatically.

✽✽NOTICE

In cold and wet climates, trunk locks

and trunk mechanisms may not work

properly due to freezing conditions.

TRUNK (4 DOOR)

ORB040006

CAUTION

Make certain that you close the

trunk before driving your vehicle.

Possible damage may occur to the

trunk lift cylinders and attached

hardware if the trunk is not closed

prior to driving.

WARNING

The trunk swings upward. Make

sure no objects or people are near

the rear of the vehicle when open-

ing the trunk.

ORB043007N

Information Provided by:

413

Features of your vehicle

Closing the trunk

To close the trunk, lower the trunk lid,

then press down on it until it locks. To be

sure the trunk lid is securely fastened,

always check by trying to pull it up again.

Emergency trunk safety release

Your vehicle is equipped with an emer-

gency trunk release lever located inside

the trunk. The lever glows in the dark

when the trunk lid is closed. If someone

is inadvertently locked in the trunk,

pulling this handle will open the trunk.

ORB040302

WARNING

• For emergencies, be fully aware

of the location of the emergency

trunk safety release lever in this

vehicle and how to open the

trunk if you are accidentally

locked in the trunk.

• No one should be allowed to

occupy the trunk of the vehicle at

any time. If the trunk is partially

or totally latched and the person

is unable to get out, severe injury

or death could occur due to lack

of ventilation, exhaust fumes and

rapid heat build-up, or because of

exposure to cold weather condi-

tions. The trunk is also a highly

dangerous location in the event

of a crash because it is not a pro-

tected occupant space but is a

part of the vehicle’s crush zone.

• Your vehicle should be kept

locked and keys be kept out of

the reach of children. Parents

should teach their children about

the dangers of playing in trunks.

• Use the release lever for emer-

gencies only. Use with extreme

caution, especially while the vehi-

cle is in motion.

WARNING

The trunk lid should be always kept

completely closed while the vehicle

is in motion. If it is left open or ajar,

poisonous exhaust gases may

enter the vehicle and serious ill-

ness or death may result.

Information Provided by:

Features of your vehicle

144

WARNING

Make sure your hands, feet and other

parts of your body are safely out of

the way before closing the tailgate.

CAUTION

Make sure nothing is near the tail-

gate latch and striker while closing

the tailgate. It may damage the tail-

gate's latch.

Opening the tailgate

• The tailgate is locked or unlocked by

turning the key to the "Lock" or

"Unlock" position.

• The tailgate is locked or unlocked

when all doors are locked or unlocked

with the key, transmitter or central door

lock switch.

• If unlocked, the tailgate can be opened

by pressing the handle and pulling it up.

✽✽NOTICE

In cold and wet climates, door lock and

door mechanisms may not work proper-

ly due to freezing conditions.

Closing the tailgate

To close the tailgate, lower and push

down the tailgate firmly. Make sure that

the tailgate is securely latched.

TAILGATE (5 DOOR)

WARNING

The tailgate swings upward. Make

sure no objects or people are near

the rear of the vehicle when open-

ing the tailgate.

CAUTION

Make certain that you close the tail-

gate before driving your vehicle.

Possible damage may occur to the

tailgate lift cylinders and attaching

hardware if the tailgate is not

closed prior to driving.

ORB041404

Information Provided by:

415

Features of your vehicle

WARNING - Exhaust

fumes

If you drive with the tailgate open,

you will draw dangerous exhaust

fumes into your vehicle which can

cause serious injury or death to

vehicle occupants.

If you must drive with the tailgate

open, keep the air vents and all win-

dows open so that additional out-

side air comes into the vehicle.

WARNING - Rear cargo

area

Occupants should never ride in the

rear cargo area where no restraints

are available. To avoid injury in the

event of an accident or sudden

stops, occupants should always be

properly restrained.

Information Provided by:

Features of your vehicle

164

(1) Driver’s door power window switch

(2) Front passenger’s door power win-

dow switch

(3) Rear door (left) power window switch

(4) Rear door (right) power window

switch

(5) Window opening and closing

(6) Automatic power window up/down*

(Driver’s window)

(7) Power window lock switch

* : if equipped

✽✽NOTICE

In cold and wet climates, power windows

may not work properly due to freezing

conditions.

WINDOWS

ORB043008L

Information Provided by:

417

Features of your vehicle

Power windows

• The ignition switch must be in the ON

position for power windows to operate.

Each door has a power window switch

that controls that door's window. The

driver has a power window lock switch

which can block the operation of pas-

senger windows. The driver’s door has

a master power window switch that

controls all the windows in the vehicle.

• The power windows can be operated for

approximately 30 seconds after the igni-

tion key is removed or turned to the ACC

or LOCK position. However, if the front

doors open, the power windows cannot

be operated within the 30 second period

(if equipped : remote keyless entry sys-

tem).

✽✽NOTICE

While driving with the rear windows

down or with the sunroof (if equipped) in

an open (or partially open) position, your

vehicle may demonstrate a wind buffet-

ing or pulsation noise. This noise is a

normal occurrence and can be reduced

or eliminated by taking the following

actions. If the noise occurs with one or

both of the rear windows down, partially

lower both front windows approximate-

ly one inch. If you experience the noise

with the sunroof open, slightly reduce the

size of the sunroof opening.

Window opening and closing

To open or close a window, press down

or pull up the front portion of the corre-

sponding switch to the first detent posi-

tion (5).

ORB043092

Information Provided by:

Features of your vehicle

184

Auto down window (if equipped)

(Driver’s window)

Pressing the power window switch

momentarily to the second detent posi-

tion (6) completely lowers the driver’s

window even when the switch is

released. To stop the window at the

desired position while the window is in

operation, momentarily pull the switch in

the direction opposite of the window

movement.

Auto up/down window (if equipped)

(Driver's window)

Depressing or pulling up the power win-

dow switch momentarily to the second

detent position (6) completely lowers or

lifts the window even when the switch is

released. To stop the window at the

desired position while the window is in

operation, pull up or depress and release

the switch to the opposite direction of the

movement.

If the power window is not operated cor-

rectly, the automatic power window sys-

tem must be reset as follows:

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON posi-

tion.

2. Close the window and continue pulling

up on the driver’s power window switch

for at least 1 second after the window

is completely closed.

ORB043093L ORB043303L

Information Provided by:

419

Features of your vehicle

Automatic reversal

If the upward movement of the window is

blocked by an object or part of the body,

the window will detect the resistance and

will stop upward movement. The window

will then lower approximately 30 cm (11.8

in.) to allow the object to be cleared.

If the window detects the resistance

while the power window switch is pulled

up continuously, the window will stop

upward movement then lower approxi-

mately 2.5 cm (1 in.). And if the power

window switch is pulled up continuously

again within 5 seconds after the window

is lowered by the automatic window

reversal feature, the automatic window

reversal will not operate.

✽✽NOTICE

The automatic reverse feature for the

driver’s window is only active when the

“auto up” feature is used by fully

pulling up the switch. The automatic

reverse feature will not operate if the

window is raised using the halfway posi-

tion on the power window switch.

Power window lock button

The driver can disable the power window

switches on the front and rear passen-

gers' doors by pressing the power window

lock switch to lock position (pressed).

When the power window lock switch is

pressed, the driver's master control can-

not operate the front and rear passen-

gers' power windows.

ORB043009L

WARNING

Always check for obstructions

before raising any window to avoid

injuries or vehicle damage. If an

object less than 4 mm (0.16 in.) in

diameter is caught between the

window glass and the upper win-

dow channel, the automatic reverse

window may not detect the resist-

ance and will not stop and reverse

direction.

OUN026013

Information Provided by:

Features of your vehicle

204

WARNING - Windows

• NEVER leave the keys in your

vehicle with unsupervised chil-

dren, when the Engine is running.

• NEVER leave any child unattend-

ed in the vehicle. Even very

young children may inadvertently

cause the vehicle to move, entan-

gle themselves in the windows,

or otherwise injure themselves or

others.

• Always double check to make

sure all arms, hands, head and

other obstructions are safely out

of the way before closing a win-

dow.

• Do not allow children to play with

the power windows. Keep the dri-

ver’s door power window lock

switch in the LOCK position

(depressed). Serious injury can

result from unintentional window

operation by the child.

• Do not extend any head or arms

outside through the window open-

ing while driving.

CAUTION

• To prevent possible damage to

the power window system, do not

open or close two windows or

more at the same time. This will

also ensure the longevity of the

fuse.

• Never try to operate the main

switch on the driver's door and

the individual door window

switch in opposing directions at

the same time. If this is done, the

window will stop and cannot be

opened or closed.

Information Provided by:

421

Features of your vehicle

Opening the hood

1.Pull the release lever to unlatch the

hood. The hood should pop open

slightly.

2. Go to the front of the vehicle, raise the

hood slightly, push the secondary latch

(1) to the left and lift the hood (2).

3.Pull out the support rod from the

engine room (3).

4.Hold the hood open with the support

rod (4).

HOOD

ORB040010 ORB040011 ORBC044012

WARNING - Hot parts

Grasp the support rod in the area

wrapped in rubber. The rubber will

help prevent you from being burned

by hot metal when the engine is

hot.

WARNING

Open the hood after turning off the

engine on a flat surface, shifting

the shift lever to the P(Park) posi-

tion for automatic transaxle and to

the 1st(First) gear or R(Reverse) for

manual transaxle, and setting the

parking brake.

Information Provided by:

Features of your vehicle

224

Closing the hood

1. Before closing the hood, check the fol-

lowing:

• All filler caps in engine compartment

must be correctly installed.

• Gloves, rags or any other com-

bustible material must be removed

from the engine compartment.

2. Return the support rod to its clip to

prevent it from rattling.

3. Lower the hood until it is about 1 ft. (30

cm) above the closed position and let

it drop. Make sure that it locks into

place.

WARNING

• Before closing the hood, ensure

that all obstructions are removed

from the hood opening. Closing

the hood with an obstruction

present in the hood opening may

result in property damage or

severe personal injury.

• Do not leave gloves, rags or any

other combustible material in the

engine compartment. Doing so

may cause a heat-induced fire.

• Always double check to be sure

that the hood is firmly latched

before driving away. If it is not

latched, the hood could open

while the vehicle is being driven,

causing a total loss of visibility,

which might result in an accident.

• Do not move the vehicle with the

hood in the raised position, as

vision is obstructed and the hood

could fall or be damaged.

Information Provided by:

423

Features of your vehicle

Opening the fuel filler lid

The fuel filler lid must be opened from

inside the vehicle by pulling the fuel filler

lid opener switch.

✽✽NOTICE

If the fuel filler lid will not open because

ice has formed around it, tap lightly or

push on the lid to break the ice and

release the lid. Do not pry on the lid. If

necessary, spray around the lid with an

approved de-icer fluid (do not use radi-

ator anti-freeze) or move the vehicle to a

warm place and allow the ice to melt.

1. Stop the engine.

2. To open the fuel filler lid, pull the fuel

filler lid opener switch.

3. Pull the fuel filler lid (1) out to fully

open.

4. To remove the cap, turn the fuel tank

cap (2) counterclockwise.

5. Refuel as needed.

Closing the fuel filler lid

1. To install the cap, turn it clockwise until

it clicks one time. This indicates that

the cap is securely tightened.

2. Close the fuel filler lid and push it in

lightly making sure that it is securely

closed.

FUEL FILLER LID

ORB040013 ORB044014A

WARNING - Refueling

• If pressurized fuel sprays out, it

can cover your clothes or skin

and thus subject you to the risk

of fire and burns. Always remove

the fuel cap carefully and slowly.

If the cap is venting fuel or if you

hear a hissing sound, wait until

the condition stops before com-

pletely removing the cap.

• Do not "top off" after the nozzle

automatically shuts off when

refueling.

• Tighten the cap until it clicks one

time, otherwise the fuel cap open

warning light will illuminate.

• Always check that the fuel cap is

installed securely to prevent fuel

spillage in the event of an acci-

dent.

Information Provided by:

Features of your vehicle

244

(Continued)

Use only approved portable plas-

tic fuel containers designed to

carry and store gasoline.

• Do not use cellular phones while

refueling. Electric current and/or

electronic interference from cel-

lular phones can potentially

ignite fuel vapors causing a fire.

• When refueling, always shut the

engine off. Sparks produced by

electrical components related to

the engine can ignite fuel vapors

causing a fire. Once refueling is

complete, check to make sure the

filler cap and filler door are

securely closed, before starting

the engine.

• DO NOT use matches or a lighter

and DO NOT SMOKE or leave a lit

cigarette in your vehicle while at

a gas station especially during

refueling. Automotive fuel is

highly flammable and can, when

ignited, result in fire.

(Continued)

• Do not get back into a vehicle

once you have begun refueling

since you can generate static

electricity by touching, rubbing

or sliding against any item or fab-

ric (polyester, satin, nylon, etc.)

capable of producing static elec-

tricity. Static electricity discharge

can ignite fuel vapors resulting in

rapid burning. If you must re-

enter the vehicle, you should

once again eliminate potentially

dangerous static electricity dis-

charge by touching a metal part

of the vehicle, away from the fuel

filler neck, nozzle or other gaso-

line source.

• When using an approved

portable fuel container, be sure to

place the container on the

ground prior to refueling. Static

electricity discharge from the

container can ignite fuel vapors

causing a fire. Once refueling has

begun, contact with the vehicle

should be maintained until the

filling is complete.

(Continued)

WARNING - Refueling dan-

gers

Automotive fuels are flammable

materials. When refueling, please

note the following guidelines care-

fully. Failure to follow these guide-

lines may result in severe personal

injury, severe burns or death by fire

or explosion.

• Read and follow all warnings

posted at the gas station facility.

• Before refueling, note the loca-

tion of the Emergency Gasoline

Shut-Off, if available, at the gas

station facility.

• Before touching the fuel nozzle,

you should eliminate potentially

dangerous static electricity dis-

charge by touching another metal

part of the vehicle, a safe dis-

tance away from the fuel filler

neck, nozzle, or other gas source.

(Continued)

Information Provided by:

425

Features of your vehicle

(Continued)

• If a fire breaks out during refuel-

ing, leave the vicinity of the vehi-

cle, and immediately contact the

manager of the gas station and

then contact the local fire depart-

ment or 911. Follow any safety

instructions they provide.

CAUTION

• Make sure to refuel your vehicle

according to the "Fuel require-

ments" suggested in section 1.

• If the fuel filler cap requires

replacement, use only a genuine

HYUNDAI cap or the equivalent

specified for your vehicle. An

incorrect fuel filler cap can result

in a serious malfunction of the

fuel system or emission control

system.

• Do not spill fuel on the exterior

surfaces of the vehicle. Any type

of fuel spilled on painted surfaces

may damage the paint.

• After refueling, make sure the fuel

cap is installed securely to pre-

vent fuel spillage in the event of

an accident.

Information Provided by:

Features of your vehicle

264

If your vehicle is equipped with a sunroof,

you can slide or tilt your sunroof with the

sunroof control switch located on the

overhead console.

The sunroof can only be opened, closed,

or tilted when the ignition switch is in the

ON position.

✽✽NOTICE

• In cold and wet climates, the sunroof

may not work properly due to freez-

ing conditions.

• After washing the car or after there is

rain, be sure to wipe off any water that

is on the sunroof before operating it.

✽✽NOTICE

The sunroof cannot slide when it is in

the tilt position nor can it be tilted while

in an open or slide position.

CAUTION

Do not continue to move the sun-

roof control lever after the sunroof

is in the fully open, closed, or tilt

position. Damage to the motor or

system components could occur.

WARNING

Never adjust the sunroof or sun-

shade while driving. This could

result in loss of control and an acci-

dent that may cause death, serious

injury, or property damage.

SUNROOF (IF EQUIPPED)

ORB040015

Information Provided by:

427

Features of your vehicle

Sliding the sunroof

To open or close the sunroof (manual

slide feature), pull or push the sunroof

control lever backward or forward to the

first detent position.

To open the sunroof (autoslide feature),

press the sunroof control switch towards

the rear of the vehicle for more than 0.5

second.

The sunroof will slide to the recommend-

ed open position (about 2 in. before the

maximum slide open position).

To stop the sunroof sliding at any point,

pull or push the sunroof control switch

momentarily.

To open the sunroof to the maximum

slide open position, press the the switch

towards the rear of the vehicle once

again and hold it until the sunroof slides

all the way open.

✽✽NOTICE

To reduce wind noise while driving, we

recommend you to drive at the recom-

mended postion (about 2 in. before the

maximum slide open positon).

To close the sunroof (autoslide feature),

move the sunroof control switch towards

the front of the vehicle for more than 0.5

second.

The sunroof will close all the way. To stop

the sunroof sliding at any point, pull or

push the sunroof control switch momen-

tarily.

Automatic reversal

If an object or part of the body is detect-

ed while the sunroof is closing automati-

cally, it will reverse direction, and then

stop.

The auto reverse function does not work

if a small obstacle is between the sliding

glass and the sunroof sash. You should

always check that all passengers and

objects are away from the sunroof before

closing it.

OBK049018ORB040016

Information Provided by:

Features of your vehicle

284

Tilting the sunroof

To open the sunroof

Push the sunroof control lever upward

until the sunroof moves to the desired

position.

To close the sunroof

Pull the sunroof lever downward until the

sunroof moves to the desired position.

CAUTION

• Periodically remove any dirt that

may accumulate on the guide rail.

• If you try to open the sunroof when

the temperature is below freezing

or when the sunroof is covered

with snow or ice, the glass or the

motor could be damaged.

• While using sunroof for a long

time, a dust between sunroof and

roof panel can make a noise. Open

the sunroof and regularly remove

the dust using clean cloth.

WARNING - Sunroof

• Be careful that someone’s head,

hands and body are not trapped

by a closing sunroof.

• Do not extend face, neck, arms or

body outside through the sunroof

opening while driving.

• Make sure hand and face are

safely out of the way before clos-

ing a sunroof.

ORB040017

Information Provided by:

429

Features of your vehicle

Sunshade

The sunshade will be opened with the

glass panel automatically when the glass

panel is opened. You will have to close it

manually if you want it closed.

Resetting the sunroof

Whenever the vehicle battery is discon-

nected or discharged, or related fuse is

blown, you must reset your sunroof sys-

tem as follows:

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON posi-

tion and close the sunroof completely.

2. Release the control lever.

3. Push and hold the control lever for-

ward (for more than 10 seconds) until

the sunroof tilts and slightly moves.

Then, release the lever.

4. Within 3 seconds, push and hold the

control lever forward (for more than 5

seconds) until the sunroof is operated

as follows;

TILT DOWN →SLIDE OPEN →

SLIDE CLOSE

Then, release the control lever.

When this is complete, the sunroof sys-

tem is reset.

❈For more detailed information, contact

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

CAUTION

The sunroof is made to slide

together with the sunshade. Do not

leave the sunshade closed while

the sunroof is open.

OBK049019

CAUTION

If the sunroof is not reset when the

vehicle battery is disconnected or

discharged, or related fuse is blown,

the sunroof may operate improperly.

Information Provided by:

Features of your vehicle

304

Electric power steering (EPS)

The power steering uses a motor to

assist you in steering the vehicle. If the

engine is off or if the power steering sys-

tem becomes inoperative, the vehicle

may still be steered, but it will require

increased steering effort.

The motor driven power steering is con-

trolled by a power steering control unit

which senses the steering wheel torque

and vehicle speed to command the

motor.

The steering becomes heavier as the

vehicle’s speed increases and becomes

lighter as the vehicle’s speed decreases

for optimum steering control.

Should you notice any change in the

effort required to steer during normal

vehicle operation, have the power steer-

ing checked by an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer.

✽✽NOTICE

The following symptoms may occur dur-

ing normal vehicle operation:

• The EPS warning light does not illu-

minate.

• The steering gets heavy immediately

after turning the ignition switch on.

This happens as the system performs

the EPS system diagnostics. When the

diagnostics is completed, the steering

wheel will return to its normal condi-

tion.

• A click noise may be heard from the

EPS relay after the ignition switch is

turned to the ON or LOCK (OFF)

position.

• A motor noise may be heard when the

vehicle is at a stop or at a low driving

speed.

• If the Electric Power Steering System

does not operate normally, the warning

light will illuminate on the instrument

cluster. The steering wheel may

become difficult to control or operate

abnormally. Take your vehicle to an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer and have

the vehicle checked as soon as possible.

• When you operate the steering wheel in

low temperature, abnormal noise could

occur. If temperature rises, the noise will

disappear. This is a normal condition.

(Continued)

STEERING WHEEL

CAUTION

• If the Electric Power Steering

System does not operate normal-

ly, the warning light will illuminate

on the instrument cluster. The

steering wheel may become diffi-

cult to control or operate abnor-

mally. Take your vehicle to an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer and

have the vehicle checked as soon

as possible.

• When you operate the steering

wheel in low temperature, abnor-

mal noise could occur. If tempera-

ture rises, the noise will disap-

pear. This is a normal condition.

• When the vehicle is stationary, if

you turn the steering wheel all the

way to the left or right continu-

ously, the steering wheel

becomes heavier from the end.

But this is for your safety, not sys-

tem malfunction. As time passes,

the steering wheel will return to

its normal condition.

Information Provided by:

431

Features of your vehicle

(Continued)

• When the charging system warning

light comes on or the voltage is low

(When the alternator (or battery) does

not operate normally or it malfunc-

tions), the steering wheel may get

heavy and become difficult to control

operate abnormally.

Tilt and telescopic steering

(if equipped)

Tilt and telescopic steering allows you to

adjust the steering wheel before you

drive. You can also raise it to give your

legs more room when you exit and enter

the vehicle.

The steering wheel should be positioned

so that it is comfortable for you to drive,

while permitting you to see the instru-

ment panel warning lights and gauges.

To change the steering wheel angle and

height, pull down the lock release lever

(1), adjust the steering wheel to the

desired angle (2) and height (3), then pull

up the lock-release lever to lock the

steering wheel in place. Be sure to adjust

the steering wheel to the desired position

before driving.

ORB044018N

WARNING

• Never adjust the angle of the

steering wheel while driving. You

may lose steering control and

cause severe personal injury,

death or accidents.

• After adjusting, push the steering

wheel both up and down to be

certain it is locked in position.

Information Provided by:

Features of your vehicle

324

Horn

To sound the horn, press the horn sym-

bol on your steering wheel.

Check the horn regularly to be sure it

operates properly.

✽✽NOTICE

To sound the horn, press the area indi-

cated by the horn symbol on your steer-

ing wheel (see illustration). The horn will

operate only when this area is pressed.

Inside rearview mirror

Adjust the rearview mirror so that the

center view through the rear window is

seen. Make this adjustment before you

start driving.

Day/night rearview mirror

Make this adjustment before you start

driving and while the day/night lever is in

the day position.

Pull the day/night lever toward you to

reduce glare from the headlights of the

vehicles behind you during night driving.

Remember that you lose some rearview

clarity in the night position.

WARNING - Rear visibility

Do not place objects in the rear

seat or cargo area which would

interfere with your vision through

the rear window.

ORB040020

DDaa

aayy

NNii

iigg

gghh

hhtt

WARNING

Do not modify the inside mirror and

do not install a wide mirror. It could

result in injury, during an accident

or deployment of the air bag.

ORBC040019

CAUTION

Do not strike the horn severely to

operate it, or hit it with your fist. Do

not press on the horn with a sharp-

pointed object.

MIRRORS

Information Provided by:

433

Features of your vehicle

Outside rearview mirror

Be sure to adjust mirror angles before

driving.

Your vehicle is equipped with both left-

hand and right-hand outside rearview

mirrors. The mirrors can be adjusted

remotely with the remote switch. The mir-

ror heads can be folded back to prevent

damage during an automatic car wash or

when passing in a narrow street.

Blind zone mirror (if equipped)

The blind zone mirror (BZM) is supple-

mental mirror to reduce a driver's blind

zone that will show the rear side territory

of your vehicle. The blind zone mirror is

equipped with the left-hand outside

rearview mirror.

CAUTION

Do not scrape ice off the mirror

face; this may damage the surface

of the glass. If ice should restrict

movement of the mirror, do not

force the mirror for adjustment. To

remove ice, use a deicer spray, or a

sponge or soft cloth with warm

water.

CAUTION

If the mirror is jammed with ice, do

not adjust the mirror by force. Use

an approved spray de-icer (not radi-

ator antifreeze) to release the

frozen mechanism or move the

vehicle to a warm place and allow

the ice to melt.

WARNING

Do not adjust or fold the outside

rearview mirrors while the vehicle

is moving. This could result in loss

of control, and an accident which

could cause death, serious injury

or property damage.

WARNING - Rearview mir-

rors

• The right outside rearview mirror

is convex. Objects seen in the

mirror are closer than they

appear.

• Use your interior rearview mirror

or direct observation to deter-

mine the actual distance of fol-

lowing vehicles when changing

lanes.

ORB044380N

OFS053068

Information Provided by:

Remote control

Electric type

The electric remote control mirror switch

allows you to adjust the position of the

left and right outside rearview mirrors. To

adjust the position of either mirror, the

ignition switch should be in the ACC or

ON position, or engine is running. Push

the switch (1) to R or L to select the right

side mirror or the left side mirror, then

press a corresponding point on the mirror

adjustment control to position the select-

ed mirror up, down, left or right.

After the adjustment, put the switch into

the neutral (center) position to prevent

inadvertent adjustment.

CAUTION

• The mirrors stop moving when

they reach the maximum adjust-

ing angles, but the motor contin-

ues to operate while the switch is

pressed. Do not press the switch

longer than necessary, the motor

may be damaged.

• Do not attempt to adjust the out-

side rearview mirror by hand.

Doing so may damage the mirror.

ORBC040023

Features of your vehicle

344

WARNING

• Always check the road condition

while driving for unexpected situ-

ations even though the vehicle is

equipped with a blind zone mir-

ror.

• The blind zone mirror is a device

made for convenience. Do not

solely rely on the mirror but

always pay attention to drive

safely.

Information Provided by:

435

Features of your vehicle

Folding the outside rearview mirror

(if equipped)

To fold outside rearview mirror, grasp the

housing of mirror and then fold it toward

the rear of the vehicle.

ORB040024

Information Provided by:

Features of your vehicle

364

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

1. Tachometer

2. Turn signal indicators

3. Speedometer

4. Engine temperature gauge

5. Warning and indicator lights

6. Fuel gauge

7. Odometer/Trip computer

ORB044025N/ORB044026N

❈The actual cluster in the vehicle may

differ from the illustration.

For more details refer to the "Gauges"

section in the next pages.

■Type A

■Type B

Information Provided by:

437

Features of your vehicle

Instrument panel illumination

When the vehicle’s parking lights or

headlights are on, press the upper or

lower part of the switch to adjust the

brightness of the instrument panel illumi-

nation.

Gauges

Speedometer

The speedometer indicates the speed of

the vehicle.

The speedometer is calibrated in miles

per hour and/or kilometers per hour.

Tachometer

The tachometer indicates the approxi-

mate number of engine revolutions per

minute (rpm).

Use the tachometer to select the correct

shift points and to prevent lugging and/or

over-revving the engine.

ORB040332

ORB040031N

ORB040030N

■Type A

■Type B

ORB040305

ORB040306

■Type A

■Type B

Information Provided by:

Features of your vehicle

384

When the door is open, or if the engine is

not started within 1 minute, the tachometer

pointer may move slightly in ON position

with the engine OFF. This movement is

normal and will not affect the accuracy of

the tachometer once the engine is running.

Engine temperature gauge

This gauge shows the temperature of the

engine coolant when the ignition switch

is ON.

Do not continue driving with an overheat-

ed engine. If your vehicle overheats, refer

to “If the engine overheats” in section 6.

ORB040308N

CAUTION

If the gauge moves beyond the nor-

mal range area toward the “H” posi-

tion, it indicates overheating that

may damage the engine.

CAUTION

Do not operate the engine within

the tachometer's RED ZONE.

This may cause severe engine dam-

age.

WARNING

Never remove the radiator cap

when the engine is hot. The engine

coolant is under pressure and

could cause severe burns. Wait

until the engine is cool before

adding coolant to the reservoir.

■Type A ■Type B

Information Provided by:

439

Features of your vehicle

Fuel gauge

The fuel gauge indicates the approxi-

mate amount of fuel remaining in the fuel

tank.

The fuel tank capacity is given in

section 8.

The fuel gauge is supplement-

ed by a low fuel warning light, which will

illuminate when the fuel tank is near

empty.

On inclines or curves, the fuel gauge

may fluctuate or the low fuel warning light

may come on earlier than usual due to

the movement of fuel in the tank.

Trip computer

The trip computer is a microcomputer

controlling the driver information system.

It displays information related to driving

on the LCD screen when the ignition

switch is in the ON position. If the battery

is disconnected, then all stored driving

information (except odometer) is reset.

WARNING - Fuel gauge

Running out of fuel can expose

vehicle occupants to danger.

You must stop and obtain addition-

al fuel as soon as possible after the

warning light comes on or when the

gauge indicator comes close to the

E level.

CAUTION

Avoid driving with an extremely low

fuel level. Running out of fuel could

cause the engine to misfire, damag-

ing the catalytic converter.

ORB040034N ORBC040035

■Type A ■Type B

Information Provided by:

Features of your vehicle

404

Odometer (mi. or km)

The odometer indicates the total dis-

tance the vehicle has been driven.

You will also find the odometer useful to

determine when periodic maintenance

should be performed.

Tripmeter (mi. or km)

TRIP A : Tripmeter A

TRIP B : Tripmeter B

This mode indicates the distance of indi-

vidual trips selected since the last trip-

meter reset.

The meter's working range is from 0.0 to

9999.9 miles (0.0 to 9999.9 km).

Pressing the RESET button for more

than 1 second, when the tripmeter (TRIP

A or TRIP B) is being displayed, clears

the tripmeter to zero (0.0).

ORB044036N ORB040037N

TRIP A

TRIP B

Average speed

Elapsed time

Distance to empty

Average fuel consumption

Instant fuel consumption

Outside temperature*

* : if equipped

■Type A ■Type B ■Type A ■Type B

Information Provided by:

441

Features of your vehicle

Distance to empty (mi. or km)

This mode indicates the estimated dis-

tance to empty based on the current fuel

in the fuel tank and the amount of fuel

delivered to the engine. When the

remaining distance is below 30 miles (50

km), “---” will be displayed and the dis-

tance to empty indicator will blink.

The meter’s working range is from 30 to

999 miles (50 to 999 km).

Average fuel consumption (if equipped)

(MPG or l/100 km)

This mode calculates the average fuel

consumption from the total fuel used and

the distance since the last average econ-

omy reset. The total fuel used is calculat-

ed from the fuel consumption input. For

an accurate calculation, drive more than

0.03 miles (50 m).

Pressing the RESET button for more than

1 second, when the average fuel econo-

my is being displayed, clears the average

fuel consumption to zero (----).

If the vehicle speed exceeds 1.6 MPH

(1km/h) after being refueling, the average

fuel economy will be cleared to zero (----).

Instant fuel consumption

(MPG or l/100 km)

This mode calculates the instant fuel

consumption every 2 seconds from the

driving distance and quantity of fuel

injection.

ORB040038N ORB044039N

■Type A ■Type B ■Type A ■Type B

ORB040040N

■Type A ■Type B

Information Provided by:

Features of your vehicle

424

Average speed (MPH or km/h)

This mode calculates the average speed

of the vehicle since the last average

speed reset.

Even if the vehicle is not in motion, the

average speed keeps changing while the

engine is running.

Pressing the RESET button for more

than 1 second, when the average speed

is being displayed, clears the average

speed to zero (---).

Elapsed time

This mode indicates the total time trav-

eled since the last driving time reset.

Even if the vehicle is not in motion, the

driving time keeps increasing while the

engine is running.

The meter’s working range is from

00:00~99:59.

Pressing the RESET button for more

than 1 second, when the driving time is

being displayed, clears the driving time to

zero (00:00).

Outside thermometer (if equipped)

The current outside temperature is dis-

played in 1°C (1°F) increments. The tem-

perature range is between -40°C ~ 60°C

(-40°F ~ 140°F).

• The outside temperature on the display

may not change immediately like a

general thermometer to prevent the

driver from being inattentive.

ORB040042N

■Type A ■Type B

ORB040309N

■Type A ■Type B

ORB044041N

■Type A ■Type B

Information Provided by:

443

Features of your vehicle

Warnings and indicators

All warning lights are checked by turning

the ignition switch ON (do not start the

engine). Any light that does not illuminate

should be checked by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

After starting the engine, check to make

sure that all warning lights are off. If any

are still on, this indicates a situation that

needs attention. When releasing the

parking brake, the brake system warning

light should go off. The fuel warning light

will stay on if the fuel level is low.

ECO indicator

Active ECO system

When the active ECO is operating the

ECO indicator is green.

For more detailed information, refer to

“Active ECO” in chapter 5.

Air bag warning light

This warning light will illuminate for

approximately 6 seconds each time you

turn the ignition switch to the ON posi-

tion.

This light also comes on when the

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) is

not working properly. If the SRS air bag

warning light does not come on, or

continuously remains on after operating

for about 6 seconds when you turned the

ignition switch to the ON position or start-

ed the engine, or if it comes on while

driving, have the SRS inspected by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

ECO

WARNING

Don't keep watching the indicator

while driving. It will distract you

while driving and cause an accident

that results in severe personal injury.

Information Provided by:

Features of your vehicle

444

Anti-lock brake system

(ABS) warning light

This light illuminates if the ignition switch

is turned ON and goes off in approxi-

mately 3 seconds if the system is operat-

ing normally.

If the ABS warning light remains on,

comes on while driving, or does not

come on when the ignition switch is

turned to the ON position, this indicates

that there may be a malfunction with the

ABS.

If this occurs, have your vehicle checked

by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as

soon as possible. The normal braking

system will still be operational, but with-

out the assistance of the anti-lock brake

system.

If the ABS warning light turns on while

driving

1.Park the vehicle in a safe place and

turn off the engine.

2.Turn on the engine again.

3.If the warning light illuminates and

turns off in approximately 3 seconds,

the system is operating normally.

If the warning light does not turn off, have

your vehicle checked by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.

Electronic brake force distri-

bution (EBD) system warning

light

If these two warning lights illuminate at

the same time while driving, your vehicle

may have a malfunction with the ABS

and EBD system.

In this case, your ABS and regular brake

system may not work normally. Have the

vehicle checked by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.

WARNING

If the both ABS and brake warning

lights are on and stay on, your vehi-

cle’s brake system will not work

normally during sudden braking. In

this case, avoid high speed driving

and abrupt braking. Have your vehi-

cle checked by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possi-

ble.

Information Provided by:

445

Features of your vehicle

✽✽NOTICE

If the ABS warning light or EBD warn-

ing light is on and stays on, the

speedometer or odometer/tripmeter

may not work. In this case, have your

vehicle checked by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.

Seat belt warning

The driver's seat belt warning light and

chime will activate to the following table

when the ignition switch is in "ON" posi-

tion.

*1Warning pattern repeats 11 times with

interval 24 seconds. If the driver's seat

belt is buckled, the light will stop within

6 seconds and chime will stop immedi-

ately.

*2The light will stop within 6 seconds and

chime will stop immediately.

Turn signal indicator

The blinking arrows on the instrument

panel show the direction indicated by the

turn signals. If the arrow comes on but

does not blink, blinks more rapidly than

normal, or does not illuminate at all, a

malfunction in the turn signal system is

indicated. Your dealer should be consult-

ed for repairs.

High beam indicator

This indicator illuminates when the head-

lights are on and in the high beam posi-

tion or when the turn signal lever is pulled

into the Flash-to-Pass position.

Tail light indicator

This indicator illuminates when the tail

lights are on.

Conditions Warning Pattern

Seat Belt Vehicle

Speed Light-Blink Chime-

Sound

Unbuckled 6 seconds

Buckled 6 seconds None

Buckled →

Unbuckled

Below 3 mph

(5 km/h) 6 seconds None

3 mph~

6 mph 6 seconds

Above 6 mph

(10 km/h)

6 sec. on / 24 sec. off

(11 times)

Unbuckled

Above 6 mph

(10 km/h)

↓

Below 3 mph

(5 km/h)

6 seconds *1

↓

Stop *2

Information Provided by:

Features of your vehicle

464

Engine oil pressure

warning light

This warning light indicates the engine oil

pressure is low.

If the warning light illuminates while driv-

ing:

1. Drive safely to the side of the road and

stop.

2. With the engine off, check the engine

oil level. If the level is low, add oil as

required.

If the warning light remains on after

adding oil or if oil is not available, call an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Parking brake & brake fluid

warning light

Parking brake warning

This light is illuminated when the parking

brake is applied with the ignition switch in

the START or ON position. The warning

light should go off when the parking

brake is released.

Low brake fluid level warning

If the warning light remains on, it may

indicate that the brake fluid level in the

reservoir is low.

If the warning light remains on:

1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe

location and stop your vehicle.

2. With the engine stopped, check the

brake fluid level immediately and add

fluid as required. Then check all brake

components for fluid leaks.

3. Do not drive the vehicle if leaks are

found, the warning light remains on or

the brakes do not operate properly.

Have the vehicle towed to any author-

ized HYUNDAI dealer for a brake sys-

tem inspection and necessary repairs.

CAUTION

If the engine is not stopped imme-

diately after the engine oil pressure

warning light is illuminated, severe

damage could result.

CAUTION

If the oil pressure warning light

stays on while the engine is run-

ning, serious engine damage may

result. The oil pressure warning

light comes on whenever there is

insufficient oil pressure. In normal

operation, it should come on when

the ignition switch is turned on,

then go out when the engine is

started. If the oil pressure warning

light stays on while the engine is

running, there is a serious malfunc-

tion.

If this happens, stop the car as

soon as it is safe to do so, turn off

the engine and check the oil level. If

the oil level is low, fill the engine oil

to the proper level and start the

engine again. If the light stays on

with the engine running, turn the

engine off immediately. In any

instance where the oil light stays on

when the engine is running, the

engine should be checked by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer before

the car is driven again.

Information Provided by:

447

Features of your vehicle

Your vehicle is equipped with a dual-

diagonal braking system.This means you

still have braking on two wheels even if

one of the brake circuits is damaged or

malfunctions. With only one of the circuits

working, more than normal pedal travel

and greater pedal pressure are required

to stop the car. Also, the car will not stop

in as short a distance with only a portion

of the brake system working. If the

brakes fail while you are driving, shift to a

lower gear for additional engine braking

and stop the car as soon as it is safe to

do so.

To check bulb operation, check whether

the parking brake and brake fluid warning

light illuminates when the ignition switch

is in the ON position.

TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring

System) indicator (if equipped)

Low tire pressure telltale

Low tire pressure position

telltale (if equipped)

The low tire pressure telltale and low tire

position telltale illuminate when one or

more of your tires is significantly underin-

flated.

Inflate your tires to the correct inflation

pressure.

The low tire pressure telltale will illumi-

nate after it blinks for approximately one

minute when there is a problem with the

Tire Pressure Monitoring System.

If this occurs, have the system checked

by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as

soon as possible.

For details, refer to the TPMS on chapter 6.

WARNING

Driving the vehicle with a warning

light on is dangerous. If the brake

warning light remains on, have the

brakes checked and repaired imme-

diately by an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer.

WARNING - Low tire pres-

sure

Significantly low tire pressure

makes the vehicle unstable and can

contribute to loss of vehicle control

and increased braking distances.

Continued driving on tires with low

pressure will cause the tires to

overheat and fail.

WARNING - Safe stopping

• The TPMS cannot alert you to

severe and sudden tire damage

caused by external factors.

• If you feel any vehicle instability,

immediately take your foot off the

accelerator, apply the brakes

gradually and with light force,

and slowly move to a safe posi-

tion off the road.

Information Provided by:

Features of your vehicle

484

Automatic Transaxle shift

indicator

The indicator displays which automatic

transaxle shift position is selected.

Manual transaxle shift

indicator (if equipped)

This indicator informs you which gear is

desired while driving to save fuel.

For example

: Indicates that shifting up to the 3rd

gear is desired (currently the shift

lever is in the 2nd gear).

: Indicates that shifting down to the

3rd gear is desired (currently the

shift lever is in the 4th gear).

Charging system warning

light

This warning light indicates a malfunction

of either the generator or electrical

charging system.

If the warning light comes on while the

vehicle is in motion:

1. Drive to the nearest safe location.

2. With the engine off, check the genera-

tor drive belt for looseness or break-

age.

3. If the belt is adjusted properly, a prob-

lem exists somewhere in the electrical

charging system. Have an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer correct the problem

as soon as possible.

✽✽NOTICE

When the charging system warning light

comes on or the voltage is low (when the

alteranator (or battery) does not operate

normally or it malfunctions), the steer-

ing wheel may get heavy and become dif-

ficult to control operate abnormally.

Front fog light indicator

(if equipped)

This light comes on when the front fog

lights are ON.

Trunk lid / tailgate open

warning light

This warning light illuminates when the

trunk lid / tailgate is not closed securely

with the ignition in any position.

Door open warning light

This indicator illuminates when a door is

not closed securely.

Information Provided by:

449

Features of your vehicle

Key reminder warning chime

(if equipped)

If the driver’s door is opened while the

ignition key is left in the ignition switch

(ACC or LOCK position), the key

reminder warning chime will sound. This

helps prevent you from locking your keys

in the vehicle. The chime sounds until the

key is removed from the ignition switch or

the driver’s door is closed.

Low fuel level warning light

This warning light indicates the fuel tank

is nearly empty. When it comes on, you

should add fuel as soon as possible.

Driving with the fuel level warning light on

or with the fuel level below “E” can cause

the engine to misfire and damage the

catalytic converter.

Malfunction indicator light

(MIL) (check engine light)

This indicator light is part of the Engine

Control System which monitors various

emission control system components. If

this light illuminates while driving, it indi-

cates that a potential malfunction has

been detected somewhere in the emis-

sion control system.

This light will also illuminate when the

ignition switch is turned to the ON posi-

tion, and will go out in a few seconds

after the engine is started. If it illuminates

while driving, or does not illuminate when

the ignition switch is turned to the ON

position, take your vehicle to your near-

est authorized HYUNDAI dealer and

have the system checked.

Generally, your vehicle will continue to be

drivable, but have the system checked by

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer promptly.

CAUTION

• Prolonged driving with the

Malfunction Indicator Light illumi-

nated may cause damage to the

emission control systems which

could effect drivability and/or fuel

economy.

• If the Malfunction Indicator Light

illuminates or blinks, potential

catalytic converter damage is

possible. This could result in loss

of engine power. Have the Engine

Control System inspected as

soon as possible by an author-

ized HYUNDAI dealer.

Information Provided by:

Features of your vehicle

504

ESC (Electronic Stability

Control) indicator

The ESC indicator will illuminate when

the ignition switch is turned ON, but

should go off after approximately 3 sec-

onds. When the ESC is on, it monitors

the driving conditions. Under normal driv-

ing conditions, the ESC light will remain

off. When a slippery or low traction con-

dition is encountered, the ESC will oper-

ate, and the ESC indicator will blink to

indicate the ESC is operating.

The ESC indicator stays on when the

ESC may have a malfunction. Take your

car to an authorized HYUNDAI dealer

and have the system checked.

ESC OFF indicator

The ESC OFF indicator will illuminate

when the ignition switch is turned ON,

but should go off after approximately 3

seconds. To switch to ESC OFF mode,

press the ESC OFF button. The ESC

OFF indicator will illuminate indicating

the ESC is deactivated.

Cruise indicator (if equipped)

CRUISE indicator

The indicator light illuminates when the

cruise control system is enabled.

The cruise indicator light in the instru-

ment cluster is illuminated when the

cruise control ON-OFF button on the

steering wheel is pushed.

The indicator light turns off when the

cruise control ON-OFF button is pushed

again. For more information about the

use of cruise control, refer to “Cruise

control system” in section 5.

CRUISE

Information Provided by:

451

Features of your vehicle

Cruise SET indicator

The indicator light illuminates when the

cruise function switch (SET- or RES+) is

ON.

The cruise SET indicator light in the

instrument cluster is illuminated when

the cruise control switch (SET- or RES+)

is pushed. The cruise SET indicator light

does not illuminate when the cruise con-

trol switch (CANCEL) is pushed or the

system is disengaged.

Electric power steering

(EPS) system warning light

This indicator light comes on after the

ignition key is turned to the ON position

and then it will go out.

This light also comes on when the EPS

needs repairs. If it comes on while driv-

ing, have your vehicle inspected by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Steering effort may increase significantly

if this lamp illuminates. See EPS system

in this section.

Engine coolant tempera-

ture warning light

The warning light illuminates if the tem-

perature of the engine coolant is above

257±4.5°F (125±2.5°C).

Do not continue driving with an overheat-

ed engine. If your vehicle overheats, refer

to “Overheating” in section 6.

✽✽NOTICE

If the engine coolant temperature warn-

ing light illuminates, it indicates over-

heating that may damage the engine.

Fuel cap open warning

indicator

This warning light indicates the fuel filler

cap is not tight securely.

Always make sure that the fuel filler cap

is tight.

SET

Information Provided by:

Features of your vehicle

524

CAUTION

If the driver gets out of the vehicle

through other doors, the battery

saver function does not operate.

Therefore, it causes the battery to

be discharged. In this case, make

sure to turn off the lamp before get-

ting out of the vehicle.

The hazard warning flasher should be

used whenever you find it necessary to

stop the car in a hazardous location.

When you must make such an emer-

gency stop, always pull off the road as far

as possible.

The hazard warning lights are turned on

by pushing in the hazard switch. This

causes all turn signal lights to blink. The

hazard warning lights will operate even

though the key is not in the ignition

switch.

To turn the hazard warning lights off,

push the switch a second time.

Battery saver function (if equipped)

• The purpose of this feature is to pre-

vent the battery from being dis-

charged. The system automatically

turns off the parking lights when the

driver removes the ignition key and

opens the driver-side door.

• With this feature, the parking lights will

be turned off automatically if the driver

parks on the side of road at night.

If necessary, to keep the lights on

when the ignition key is removed, per-

form the following:

1) Open the driver-side door.

2) Turn the parking lights OFF and ON

again using the light switch on the

steering column.

Headlight delay (if equipped)

If you turn the ignition switch to the ACC

or OFF position with the headlights ON,

the headlights (and/or tail lights) remain

on for about 5 minutes. However, if the

driver’s door is opened and closed, the

headlights are turned off after 15 sec-

onds.

The headlights can be turned off by

pressing the lock button on the transmit-

ter twice or turning the light switch to the

OFF or AUTO position.

However, if you turn the light switch to the

AUTO position when it is dark outside,

the headlights will not be turned off.

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER

ORB040045

LIGHTING

Information Provided by:

453

Features of your vehicle

Headlight welcome function

(if equipped)

When the headlight switch is in the ON or

AUTO position and all doors (and tail-

gate) are closed and locked, if you press

the door unlock button on the transmitter,

the headlights will come on for about 15

seconds.

If the headlight switch is in the AUTO

position, the function can only operate at

night.

At this time, if you press the door unlock

button again or door lock button on the

transmitter, the headlights will turn off

immediately.

Tail lamp warning chime

(if equipped)

If you turn the ignition switch to the OFF

position with the tail lamps ON and the

driver's door in an open position, the

warning chime will sound.

To stop the chime, perform one of the fol-

lowing:

1) Turn the ignition key to the ON posi-

tion.

2) Turn the tail lamps OFF.

3) Close the driver's door.

Lighting control

The light switch has a Headlight and a

Parking light position.

To operate the lights, turn the knob at the

end of the control lever to one of the fol-

lowing positions:

(1) OFF position

(2) Parking light position

(3) Headlight position

(4) Auto light position (if equipped)

CAUTION

To prevent the battery from being

discharged, make sure to turn off

the lamp before getting out of the

vehicle.

ORB044046N

Information Provided by:

Features of your vehicle

544

Parking light position ( )

When the light switch is in the parking

light position, the tail, position and

license plate lights will turn on and the

tail light indicator will turn on.

Headlight position ( )

When the light switch is in the headlight

position the head, tail, license and instru-

ment panel lights will turn on.

✽✽NOTICE

The ignition switch must be in the ON

position to turn on the headlights.

Auto light position (if equipped)

When the light switch is in the AUTO light

position, the taillights and headlights will

turn ON or OFF automatically depending

on the amount of light outside the vehi-

cle.

ORB040047D ORB040048D ORB044360N

Information Provided by:

455

Features of your vehicle

High beam operation

To turn on the high beam headlights,

push the lever away from you. Pull it back

for low beams.

The high beam indicator will light when

the headlight high beams are switched on.

To prevent the battery from being dis-

charged, do not leave the lights on for a

prolonged time while the engine is not

running.

To flash the headlights, pull the lever

towards you. It will return to the normal

(low beam) position when released. The

headlight switch does not need to be on

to use this flashing feature.

CAUTION

• Never place anything over sensor

(1) located on the instrument

panel. This will ensure better

auto-light system control.

• Don’t clean the sensor using a

window cleaner. The cleaner may

leave a light film which could

interfere with sensor operation.

• If your vehicle has window tint or

other types of metallic coating on

the front windshield, the Auto

light system may not work prop-

erly.

ORB040049D ORB040050D

WARNING

Do not use high beam when there

are other vehicles. Using high

beam could obstruct the other dri-

ver's vision.

Information Provided by:

Features of your vehicle

564

Turn signals and lane change sig-

nals

The ignition switch must be on for the

turn signals to function. To turn on the

turn signals, move the lever up or down

(A). Green arrow indicators on the instru-

ment panel indicate which turn signal is

operating. They will self-cancel after a

turn is completed. If the indicator contin-

ues to flash after a turn, manually return

the lever to the OFF position.

To signal a lane change, move the turn

signal lever slightly and hold it in position

(B). The lever will return to the OFF posi-

tion when released.

If an indicator stays on and does not

flash or if it flashes abnormally, one of the

turn signal bulbs may be burned out and

will require replacement.

One-touch lane change function

(if equipped)

To activate an one-touch lane change

function, move the turn signal lever

slightly and then release it. The lane

change signals will blink 3 times.

✽✽NOTICE

If an indicator flash is abnormally quick

or slow, a bulb may be burned out or

have a poor electrical connection in the

circuit.

Front fog light (if equipped)

Fog lights are used to provide improved

visibility when visibility is poor due to fog,

rain or snow etc. The fog lights will turn

on when fog light switch (1) is turned to

ON after the headlights are turned on.

To turn off the fog lights, turn the switch

to OFF.

ORB040051D

CAUTION

When in operation, the fog lights

consume large amounts of vehicle

electrical power. Only use the fog

lights when visibility is poor or

unnecessary battery and generator

drain could occur.

ORB040052D

Information Provided by:

457

Features of your vehicle

WIPERS AND WASHERS

D : Rear wiper/washer control

(5 Door)

· – Wash with brief wipes

· ON – Continuous wipe

· OFF – Off

ORBC040054E

ORB044054

■4 Door

• Type A

• Type B

OTA040053

ORB044368

• Type B

■5 Door

• Type A

A : Wiper speed control

· MIST – Single wipe

· OFF – Off

· INT – Intermittent wipe

(if equipped)

· LO – Low wiper speed

· HI – High wiper speed

B : Intermittent wipe time adjustment

(if equipped)

C : Wash with brief wipes (front)

(if equipped)

ORB044369

■5 Door

• Type A

• Type B

Information Provided by:

Features of your vehicle

584

Operates as follows when the ignition

switch is turned ON.

MIST : For a single wiping cycle, push the

lever upward and release it with

the lever in the OFF position. The

wipers will operate continuously if

the lever is pushed upward and

held.

OFF : Wiper is not in operation

INT (if equipped) :

Wiper operates intermittently at

the same wiping intervals. Use

this mode in a light rain or mist. To

vary the speed setting, turn the

speed control knob.

LO : Normal wiper speed

HI : Fast wiper speed

✽✽NOTICE

If there is heavy accumulation of snow

or ice on the windshield, defrost the

windshield for about 10 minutes, or

until the snow and/or ice is removed

before using the windshield wipers to

ensure proper operation.

ORBC040055E

ORB044055E

■4 Door

• Type A

• Type B

OTA040055

ORB044370

• Type B

■5 Door

• Type A

Windshield wipers

Information Provided by:

459

Features of your vehicle

Windshield washers

To use the windshield washer, pull the lever

gently toward you in the OFF position.

- Type A: The washer fluid will spray on

the windshield and the wipers

will operate 1~3 cycles.

- Type B: The washer fluid will spray on

the windshield but the wipers

will not operate.

Use this function when the windshield is

dirty.

The spray operation will continue until

you release the lever.

If the washer does not work, check the

washer fluid level. If the fluid level is not

sufficient, you will need to add appropri-

ate non-abrasive windshield washer fluid

to the washer reservoir.

The reservoir filler neck is located in the

front of the engine compartment on the

passenger side.

CAUTION

To prevent possible damage to the

washer pump, do not operate the

washer when the fluid reservoir is

empty.

ORB044371

ORB044372

■4 Door

• Type A

• Type B

■5 Door

• Type A

• Type B

CAUTION

When starting the vehicle in winter,

set the wiper switch in the OFF

position. Otherwise, wipers may

operate and ice may damage the

windshield wiper blades. Always

remove all snow and ice and defrost

the windshield properly prior to

operating the windshield wipers.

Information Provided by:

Features of your vehicle

604

Rear window wiper and washer

switch (5 Door)

The rear window wiper and washer

switch is located at the end of the wiper

and washer switch lever. Turn the switch

to desired position to operate the rear

wiper and washer.

- Spraying washer fluid and wiping

ON - Normal wiper operation

OFF - Wiper is not in operation

ORB044373

■5 Door

• Type A

• Type B

CAUTION

• To prevent possible damage to

the wipers or windshield, do not

operate the wipers when the

windshield is dry.

• To prevent damage to the wiper

blades, do not use gasoline,

kerosene, paint thinner, or other

solvents on or near them.

• To prevent damage to the wiper

arms and other components, do

not attempt to move the wipers

manually.

WARNING

Do not use the washer in freezing

temperatures without first warming

the windshield with the defrosters;

the washer solution could freeze on

contact with the windshield and

obscure your vision.

Information Provided by:

461

Features of your vehicle

Automatic turn off function

(if equipped)

The interior lights automatically turn off

approximately 20 minutes after the igni-

tion switch is turned off.

Map lamp

Push the lens (1) to turn the map lamp on

or off. This light produces a spot beam for

convenient use as a map lamp at night or

as a personal lamp for the driver and the

front passenger.

• DOOR :

In the DOOR position, the map lamp and

the room lamp come on when any door is

opened regardless of the ignition switch

position.

When doors are unlocked by the trans-

mitter, the map lamp and the room lamp

come on for approximately 30 seconds

as long as any door is not open. The map

lamp and the room lamp goes out gradu-

ally after approximately 30 seconds if the

door is closed. However, if the ignition

switch is ON or all doors are locked, the

map lamp and the room lamp will turn off

immediately. If a door is opened with the

ignition switch in the ACC or LOCK posi-

tion, the map lamp and the room lamp

stay on for about 20 minutes. However, if

a door is opened with the ignition switch

in the ON position, the map lamp and the

room lamp stay on continuously.

INTERIOR LIGHT

WARNING

Do not use the interior lights when

driving in the dark. Accidents could

happen because the view may be

obscured by interior lights.

CAUTION

Do not use the interior lights for

extended periods when the engine

is not running.

It may cause battery discharge.

ORB040057

Information Provided by:

Features of your vehicle

624

• ON :

Map lamp and room lamp stay on at all

times.

• OFF :

The lights turn off even if a door is

opened.

❈ When the lamp is turned ON by press-

ing the lens (1) the lamp does not turn

off even if the switch (2) is in the OFF

position.

Room lamp

• ON (1):

In the ON position, the light stays on at all

times.

• DOOR (2) :

In the DOOR position, the light comes on

when any door is opened regardless of

the ignition switch position.

When doors are unlocked by the trans-

mitter, the light comes on for approxi-

mately 30 seconds as long as any door is

not open. The light goes out gradually

after approximately 30 seconds if the

door is closed. However, if the ignition

switch is ON or all doors are locked, the

light will turn off immediately.

If a door is opened with the ignition

switch in the ACC or LOCK position, the

light stays on for about 20 minutes.

However, if a door is opened with the

ignition switch in the ON position, the

light stays on continuously.

• OFF (3) :

In the OFF position, the light stays off at

all times even when a door is open.

ORB040361

Information Provided by:

463

Features of your vehicle

Luggage room lamp

The luggage room lamp comes on when

the trunk lid/tailgate is opened.

ORB041402

5 Door

ORBC040059

4 Door

CAUTION

The luggage room lamp comes on

as long as the trunk lid/tailgate

opens. To prevent unnecessary

charging system drain, close the

trunk lid/tailgate securely after

using the luggage room.

Information Provided by:

Features of your vehicle

644

DEFROSTER

✽✽NOTICE

If you want to defrost and defog the

front windshield, refer to “Windshield

defrosting and defogging” in this section. Rear window defroster

The defroster heats the window to

remove frost, fog and thin ice from the

rear window, while the engine is running.

To activate the rear window defroster,

press the rear window defroster button

located in the center facia switch panel.

The indicator on the rear window

defroster button illuminates when the

defroster is ON.

If there is heavy accumulation of snow on

the rear window, brush it off before oper-

ating the rear defroster.

The rear window defroster automatically

turns off after approximately 20 minutes

or when the ignition switch is turned off.

To turn off the defroster, press the rear

window defroster button again.

Outside rearview mirror defroster

(if equipped)

If your vehicle is equipped with the out-

side rearview mirror defrosters, they will

operate at the same time you turn on the

rear window defroster.

CAUTION

To prevent damage to the conduc-

tors bonded to the inside surface of

the rear window, never use sharp

instruments or window cleaners

containing abrasives to clean the

window.

ORB040063L

Information Provided by:

465

Features of your vehicle

MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM

1. Temperature control knob

2. Fan speed control knob

3. Air conditioning button

4. Air intake control button

5. Mode selection knob

ORB040065N

Information Provided by:

Features of your vehicle

664

Heating and air conditioning

1. Start the engine.

2. Set the mode to the desired position.

For improving the effectiveness of

heating and cooling;

- Heating:

- Cooling:

3. Set the temperature control to the

desired position.

4. Set the air intake control to the outside

(fresh) air position.

5. Set the fan speed control to the

desired speed.

6. If air conditioning is desired, turn the

air conditioning system on.

ORB040066

Information Provided by:

467

Features of your vehicle

Mode selection

The mode selection knob controls the

direction of the air flow through the venti-

lation system.

Air can be directed to the floor, dash-

board outlets, or windshield. Five sym-

bols are used to represent Five, Face, Bi-

Level, Floor, Floor-Defrost and Defrost

air position.

Face-Level (B, D)

Air flow is directed toward the upper body

and face. Additionally, each outlet can be

controlled to direct the air discharged

from the outlet.

Bi-Level (B, D, E, C)

Air flow is directed towards the face and

the floor.

Floor-Level (C, A, D, E)

Most of the air flow is directed to the

floor, with a small amount of the air being

directed to the windshield and side win-

dow defrosters.

Floor/Defrost-Level (A, C, D, E)

Most of the air flow is directed to the floor

and the windshield with a small amount

directed to the side window defrosters.

Defrost-Level (A, D)

Most of the air flow is directed to the

windshield with a small amount of air

directed to the side window defrosters.

ORB040067

Information Provided by:

Features of your vehicle

684

MAX A/C-Level (B, D, E)

To select the MAX A/C, turn the temper-

ature knob to the extreme the left.

Air flow is directed toward the upper body

and face.

In this mode, the air conditioning and the

recirculated air position will be selected

automatically.

✽✽NOTICE

This setting should be used briefly to

help quickly cool the interior. After the

interior temperature has cooled suffi-

ciently, turn the temperature knob away

from the MAX A/C position to a com-

fortable setting.

Instrument panel vents

The outlet vents can be opened or closed

separately using the horizontal thumb-

wheel. To close the vent, rotate it left to

the maximum position. To open the vent,

rotate it right to the desired position.

Also, you can adjust the direction of air

delivery from these vents using the vent

control lever as shown.

Temperature control

The temperature control knob allows you

to control the temperature of the air flow-

ing from the ventilation system. To

change the air temperature in the pas-

senger compartment, turn the knob to

the right position for warm and hot air or

left position for cooler air.

ORB040356 ORB040069ORB040068

Information Provided by:

469

Features of your vehicle

Air intake control

The air intake control is used to select

the outside (fresh) air position or recircu-

lated air position.

To change the air intake control position,

press the control button.

Recirculated air position

With the recirculated

air position selected,

air from the passen-

ger compartment will

be drawn through the

heating system and

heated or cooled

according to the

function selected.

Outside (fresh) air position

With the outside

(fresh) air position

selected, air enters

the vehicle from out-

side and is heated or

cooled according to

the function selected.

✽✽NOTICE

Prolonged operation of the heater in the

recirculated air position (without air

conditioning selected) may cause fog-

ging of the windshield and side windows

and the air within the passenger com-

partment may become stale.

In addition, prolonged use of the air con-

ditioning with the recirculated air posi-

tion selected will result in excessively dry

air in the passenger compartment.

ORB040070

WARNING

• Continue using the climate con-

trol system in the recirculated air

position may allow humidity to

increase inside the vehicle which

may fog the glass and obscure

visibility.

• Do not sleep in a vehicle with the

air conditioning or heating sys-

tem on. It may cause serious

harm or death due to a drop in the

oxygen level and/or body temper-

ature.

• Continue using the climate control

system in the recirculated air

position can cause drowsiness or

sleepiness, and loss of vehicle

control. Set the air intake control

to the outside (fresh) air position

as much as possible while driving.

Information Provided by:

Features of your vehicle

704

Fan speed control

The ignition switch must be in the ON

position for fan operation.

The fan speed control knob allows you to

control the fan speed of the air flowing

from the ventilation system. To change

the fan speed, turn the knob to the right

for higher speed or left for lower speed.

Setting the fan speed control knob to the

“0” position turns off the fan.

To turn off the blowers

To turn off the blowers, turn the fan

speed control knob to the "0" position.

Air conditioning

Press the A/C button to turn the air con-

ditioning system on (indicator light will

illuminate). Press the button again to turn

the air conditioning system off.

ORB040073N ORB040354N

ORB043099N

Information Provided by:

471

Features of your vehicle

System operation

Ventilation

1. Set the mode to the position.

2. Set the air intake control to the outside

(fresh) air position.

3. Set the temperature control to the

desired position.

4. Set the fan speed control to the

desired speed.

Heating

1. Set the mode to the position.

2. Set the air intake control to the outside

(fresh) air position.

3. Set the temperature control to the

desired position.

4. Set the fan speed control to the

desired speed.

5. If dehumidified heating is desired, turn

the air conditioning system (if

equipped) on.

• If the windshield fogs up, set the mode

to the or position.

Operation Tips

• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes from

entering the vehicle through the venti-

lation system, temporarily set the air

intake control to the recirculated air

position. Be sure to return the control

to the fresh air position when the irrita-

tion has passed to keep fresh air in the

vehicle. This will help keep the driver

alert and comfortable.

• Air for the heating/cooling system is

drawn in through the grilles just ahead

of the windshield. Care should be

taken that these are not blocked by

leaves, snow, ice or other obstructions.

• To prevent interior fog on the wind-

shield, set the air intake control to the

fresh air position and fan speed to the

desired position, turn on the air condi-

tioning system, and adjust the temper-

ature control to desired temperature.

Air conditioning

HYUNDAI Air Conditioning Systems are

filled with environmentally friendly

R-134a refrigerant.

1. Start the engine. Press the air condi-

tioning button.

2. Set the mode to the position.

3. Set the air intake control to the outside

air or recirculated air position.

4. Adjust the fan speed control and tem-

perature control to maintain maximum

comfort.

• When maximum cooling is desired, set

the temperature control to the extreme

left position (the MAX A/C position),

then set the fan speed control to the

highest speed.

Information Provided by:

Features of your vehicle

724

✽✽NOTICE

• When using the air conditioning sys-

tem, monitor the temperature gauge

closely while driving up hills or in

heavy traffic when outside tempera-

tures are high. Air conditioning sys-

tem operation may cause engine over-

heating. Continue to use the blower

fan but turn the air conditioning sys-

tem off if the temperature gauge indi-

cates engine overheating.

• When opening the windows in humid

weather air conditioning may create

water droplets inside the vehicle.

Since excessive water droplets may

cause damage to electrical equipment,

air conditioning should only be used

with the windows closed.

Air conditioning system operation tips

• If the vehicle has been parked in direct

sunlight during hot weather, open the

windows for a short time to let the hot

air inside the vehicle escape.

• To help reduce moisture inside of the

windows on rainy or humid days,

decrease the humidity inside the vehi-

cle by operating the air conditioning

system.

• During air conditioning system opera-

tion, you may occasionally notice a

slight change in engine speed as the

air conditioning compressor cycles.

This is a normal system operation

characteristic.

• Use the air conditioning system every

month only for a few minutes to ensure

maximum system performance.

• When using the air conditioning sys-

tem, you may notice clear water drip-

ping (or even puddling) on the ground

under the passenger side of the vehi-

cle. This is a normal system operation

characteristic.

• Operating the air conditioning system

in the recirculated air position provides

maximum cooling, however, continual

operation in this mode may cause the

air inside the vehicle to become stale.

• During cooling operation, you may

occasionally notice a misty air flow

because of rapid cooling and humid air

intake. This is a normal system opera-

tion characteristic.

• If you operate air conditioner exces-

sively, the difference between the tem-

perature of the outside air and that of

the windshield could cause the outer

surface of the windshield to fog up,

causing loss of visibility. In this case,

set the mode selection knob or button

to the position and fan speed con-

trol to the lower speed.

Information Provided by:

473

Features of your vehicle

Climate control air filter

(if equipped)

The climate control air filter installed

behind the glove box filters the dust or

other pollutants that come into the vehi-

cle from the outside through the heating

and air conditioning system. If dust or

other pollutants accumulate in the filter

over a period of time, the air flow from the

air vents may decrease, resulting in

moisture accumulation on the inside of

the windshield even when the outside

(fresh) air position is selected. If this hap-

pens, have the climate control air filter

replaced by an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer.

✽✽NOTICE

• Replace the filter according to the

Maintenance Schedule.

If the vehicle is being driven in severe

conditions such as dusty or rough

roads, more frequent air conditioner

filter inspections and changes are

required.

• When the air flow rate suddenly

decreases, the system should be

checked at an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer.

Checking the amount of air con-

ditioner refrigerant and compres-

sor lubricant

When the amount of refrigerant is low,

the performance of the air conditioning is

reduced. Overfilling also has a negative

impact on the air conditioning system.

Therefore, if abnormal operation is

found, have the system inspected by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

✽✽NOTICE

It is important that the correct type and

amount of oil and refrigerant is used.

Otherwise, damage to the compressor

and abnormal system operation may

occur.

OHM048209

Outside air

Recirculated

air

Climate control air filter

Blower Evaporator core

Heater core

WARNING

The air conditioning system should

be serviced by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer. Improper service

may cause serious injury to the

person performing the service.

Information Provided by:

Features of your vehicle

744

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

1. AUTO (automatic control) button

2. OFF button

3. Temperature control knob

4. A/C display

5. Air intake control button

6. Fan speed control knob

7. Air conditioning button

8. Mode selection button

9. Front windshield defrost button.

ORB040340N

Information Provided by:

475

Features of your vehicle

Automatic heating and air condi-

tioning

1. Press the AUTO button.

The modes, fan speeds, air intake and

air-conditioning will be controlled auto-

matically according to the temperature

setting.

2. Turn the temperature control knob to

set the desired temperature.

✽✽NOTICE

• To turn the automatic operation off,

select any button of the following:

- Mode selection button

- Front windshield defrost button

- Fan speed control button

The selected function will be con-

trolled manually while other functions

operate automatically.

• For your convenience and to improve

the effectiveness of the climate con-

trol, use the AUTO button and set the

temperature to 23°C (73°F).

✽✽NOTICE

Never place anything over the sensor

located on the instrument panel to

ensure better control of the heating and

cooling system.

ORB040353ORB040342 ORB040341

Information Provided by:

Features of your vehicle

764

Manual heating and air condition-

ing

The heating and cooling system can be

controlled manually by pushing buttons

other than the AUTO button. In this case,

the system works sequentially according

to the order of buttons selected.

When pressing any button except the

AUTO button while using automatic oper-

ation, the functions not selected will be

controlled automatically.

1. Start the engine.

2. Set the mode to the desired position.

For improving the effectiveness of

heating and cooling;

- Heating:

- Cooling:

3. Set the temperature control to the

desired position.

4. Set the air intake control to the outside

(fresh) air position.

5. Set the fan speed control to the

desired speed.

6. If air conditioning is desired, turn the

air conditioning system on.

Press the AUTO button in order to con-

vert to full automatic control of the sys-

tem.

Mode selection

The mode selection button controls the

direction of the air flow through the venti-

lation system.

The air flow outlet port is converted as

follows:

Refer to the illustration in the “Manual cli-

mate control system”.

Floor & Defrost

Most of the air flow is directed to the floor

and the windshield with a small amount

directed to the side window defrosters.

Face-Level

Air flow is directed toward the upper body

and face. Additionally, each outlet can be

controlled to direct the air discharged

from the outlet.

Bi-Level

Air flow is directed towards the face and

the floor.

Floor-Level

Most of the air flow is directed to the

floor, with a small amount of the air being

directed to the windshield and side win-

dow defrosters.

ORB040347N

Information Provided by:

477

Features of your vehicle

Defrost-Level

Most of the air flow is directed to the

windshield with a small amount of air

directed to the side window defrosters.

Instrument panel vents

The outlet vents can be opened or closed

separately using the horizontal thumb-

wheel. To close the vent, rotate it left to

the maximum position. To open the vent,

rotate it right to the desired position.

Also, you can adjust the direction of air

delivery from these vents using the vent

control lever as shown.

Temperature control

The temperature will increase to the

maximum by turning the knob to the right

extremely.

The temperature will decrease to the

minimum by turning the knob to the left

extremely.

When turning the knob, the temperature

will increase or decrease by 1°F (0.5°C).

When set to the lowest temperature set-

ting, the air conditioning will operate con-

tinuously.

ORB040355N ORB040068 ORB040341

Information Provided by:

Features of your vehicle

784

Air intake control

This is used to select the outside (fresh)

air position or recirculated air position.

To change the air intake control position,

push the control button.

Recirculated air position

With the recirculated air

position selected, air from

the passenger compart-

ment will be drawn through

the heating system and

heated or cooled according

to the function selected.

Outside (fresh) air position

With the outside (fresh) air

position selected, air

enters the vehicle from out-

side and is heated or

cooled according to the

function selected.

✽✽NOTICE

Prolonged operation of the heater in the

recirculated air position (without air

conditioning selected) may cause fog-

ging of the windshield and side windows

and the air within the passenger com-

partment may become stale.

In addition, prolonged use of the air con-

ditioning with the recirculated air posi-

tion selected will result in excessively dry

air in the passenger compartment.

ORB040345N

■Type A

■Type B

Information Provided by:

479

Features of your vehicle

Fan speed control

The fan speed can be set to the desired

speed by turning the fan speed control

knob.

The higher the fan speed is, the more air

is delivered.

Pressing the OFF button turns off the

fan.

Air conditioning

Push the A/C button to turn the air condi-

tioning system on (indicator light will illu-

minate).

Push the button again to turn the air con-

ditioning system off.

ORB040344N ORB040346N

WARNING

• Continued climate control system

operation in the recirculated air

position may allow humidity to

increase inside the vehicle which

may fog the glass and obscure

visibility.

• Do not sleep in a vehicle with the

air conditioning or heating system

on. It may cause serious harm or

death due to a drop in the oxygen

level and/or body temperature.

• Continued climate control system

operation in the recirculated air

position can cause drowsiness or

sleepiness, and loss of vehicle

control. Set the air intake control

to the outside (fresh) air position

as much as possible while driving.

Information Provided by:

Features of your vehicle

804

OFF mode

Push the OFF button to turn off the air cli-

mate control system. However, you can

still operate the mode and air intake but-

tons as long as the ignition switch is in

the ON position.

ORB040343

Information Provided by:

481

Features of your vehicle

• For maximum defrosting, set the tem-

perature control to the extreme

right/hot position and the fan speed

control to the highest speed.

• If warm air to the floor is desired while

defrosting or defogging, set the mode

to the floor-defrost position.

• Before driving, clear all snow and ice

from the windshield, rear window, out-

side rear view mirrors, and all side win-

dows.

• Clear all snow and ice from the hood

and air inlet in the cowl grill to improve

heater and defroster efficiency and to

reduce the probability of fogging up the

inside of the windshield.

Manual climate control system

To defog inside windshield

1. Set the fan speed to the desired posi-

tion.

2. Select desired temperature.

3. Select the or position.

4. The outside (fresh) air will be selected

automatically. If the position is

selected, air conditioning will also be

selected automatically.

If the air conditioning and/or outside

(fresh) air position are not selected auto-

matically, press the corresponding button

manually.

WINDSHIELD DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING

WARNING - Windshield

heating

Do not use the or position

during cooling operation in

extremely humid weather. The dif-

ference between the temperature of

the outside air and that of the wind-

shield could cause the outer sur-

face of the windshield to fog up,

causing loss of visibility. In this

case, set the mode selection knob

or button to the position and

fan speed control knob or button to

the lower speed.

ORB040075N

Information Provided by:

Features of your vehicle

824

To defrost outside windshield

1. Set the fan speed to the highest posi-

tion.

2. Set the temperature to the extreme hot

position.

3. Select the position.

4. The outside (fresh) air and air condi-

tioning will be selected automatically.

Automatic climate control system

To defog inside windshield

1. Set the fan speed to the desired posi-

tion.

2. Select desired temperature.

3. Press the defrost button ( ).

4. The air conditioning will be turned on

according to the detected ambient tem-

perature and outside (fresh) air posi-

tion will be selected automatically.

If the air conditioning and outside (fresh)

air position are not selected automatical-

ly, adjust the corresponding button man-

ually. If the position is selected,

lower fan speed is adjusted to a higher

fan speed.

To defrost outside windshield

1. Set the fan speed to the highest

(extreme right) position.

2. Set the temperature to the extreme hot

(HI) position.

3. Press the defrost button ( ).

4. The air conditioning will be turned on

according to the detected ambient

temperature and outside (fresh) air

position will be selected automatically.

If the position is selected, lower fan

speed is adjusted to a higher fan speed.

ORB040348N ORB040349NORB040076N

Information Provided by:

483

Features of your vehicle

Defogging logic

To reduce the probability of fogging up

the inside of the windshield, the air intake

or air conditioning are controlled auto-

matically according to certain conditions

such as or position. To cancel or

return the defogging logic, do the follow-

ing.

Manual climate control system

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON posi-

tion.

2. Select the defrost button ( ).

3. Press the air intake control button at

least 5 times within 3 seconds.

The indicator on the air intake button

blinks 3 times with 0.5 second of interval.

It indicates that the defogging logic is

canceled or returned to the programmed

status.

If the battery has been discharged or dis-

connected, it resets to the defog logic

status.

Automatic climate control system

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON posi-

tion.

2. Press the defrost button ( ).

3. While holding the air conditioning

(A/C) button pressed, press the air

intake control button (recirculated air

position) at least 5 times within 3 sec-

onds.

The A/C display blinks 3 times with 0.5

second of interval. It indicates that the

defogging logic is canceled or returned to

the programmed status.

If the battery has been discharged or dis-

connected, it resets to the defog logic

status.

ORB040077N ORB040350N

Information Provided by:

Features of your vehicle

844

These compartments can be used to

store small items.

Center console storage

To open the center console storage, pull

up the lever.

Sliding armrest (if equipped)

To move forward

Grab the front portion of the armrest (1)

then pull it forward.

To move rearward

Push the armrest rearward with your

palm.

STORAGE COMPARTMENTS

WARNING - Flammable

materials

Do not store cigarette lighters,

propane cylinders, or other flamma-

ble/explosive materials in the vehi-

cle. These items may catch fire

and/or explode if the vehicle is

exposed to hot temperatures for

extended periods.

CAUTION

• To avoid possible theft, do not

leave valuables in the storage

compartments.

• Always keep the storage com-

partment covers closed while

driving. Do not attempt to place

so many items in the storage

compartment that the storage

compartment cover cannot close

securely.

WARNING

Do not grap the front portion of the

armrest (1) when moving the arm-

rest rearward. It may pinch your fin-

gers.

ORB040351 ORB040362

Information Provided by:

485

Features of your vehicle

Glove box

To open the glove box, push the button

and the glove box will automatically

open. Close the glove box after use.

Sunglass holder (if equipped)

To open the sunglass holder, press the

cover and the holder will slowly open.

Place your sunglasses in the compart-

ment door with the lenses facing out.

Push to close.

WARNING

• Do not keep objects except sun-

glasses inside the sunglass hold-

er. Such objects can be thrown

from the holder in the event of a

sudden stop or an accident, pos-

sibly injuring the passengers in

the vehicle.

• Do not open the sunglass holder

while the vehicle is moving. The

rear view mirror of the vehicle

can be blocked by an open sun-

glass holder.

• Do not put the glasses forcibly

into a sunglass holder to prevent

breakage or deformation of

glasses. It may cause personal

injury if you try to open it forcibly

when the glasses are jammed in

holder.

WARNING

To reduce the risk of injury in an

accident or sudden stop, always

keep the glove box door closed

while driving.

CAUTION

Do not keep food in the glove box

for a long time.

ORB040081ORB040080

Information Provided by:

Features of your vehicle

864

Luggage net (holder)

(if equipped)

To keep items from shifting in the cargo

area, you can use the holders located in

the cargo area to attach the luggage net.

OYF049225

CAUTION

To prevent damage to the goods or

the vehicle, care should be taken

when carrying fragile or bulky

objects in the luggage compart-

ment.

WARNING

Avoid eye injury. DO NOT over-

stretch the luggage net, ALWAYS

keep your face and body out of the

luggage net’s recoil path. DO NOT

use when the strap has visible

signs of wear or damage.

Information Provided by:

487

Features of your vehicle

INTERIOR FEATURES

Cup holder

Cups or small beverage cans may be

placed in the cup holders.

Sunvisor

Use the sunvisor to shield direct light

through the front or side windows.

To use a sunvisor, pull it downward.

To use a sunvisor for a side window, pull

it downward, unsnap it from the bracket

(1) and swing it to the side (2).

To use the vanity mirror, pull down the

visor and slide the mirror cover (3).

Adjust the sunvisor extension forward or

rearward (4).

The ticket holder (5) is provided for hold-

ing a tollgate ticket. (if equipped)

WARNING - Hot liquids

• Do not place uncovered cups of

hot liquid in the cup holder while

the vehicle is in motion. If the hot

liquid spills, you may burn your-

self. Such a burn to the driver

could lead to loss of control of

the vehicle.

• To reduce the risk of personal

injury in the event of sudden stop

or collision, do not place uncov-

ered or unsecured bottles, glass-

es, cans, etc., in the cup holder

while the vehicle is in motion.

ORB044085N

WARNING

Keep cans or bottles out of direct

sun light and do not put them in a

vehicle that is heated up. It may

explode.

ORB040078

CAUTION

Do not place uncovered cups in the

cup holder while the vehicle is in

motion. If the liquid spills, electric

systems may malfunction.

WARNING

For your safety, do not obstruct your

vision when using the sunvisor.

Information Provided by:

Features of your vehicle

884

Power outlet

The power outlet is designed to provide

power for mobile telephones or other

devices designed to operate with vehicle

electrical systems. The devices should

draw less than 10 amps with the engine

running.

CAUTION

• Use the power outlet only when

the engine is running and remove

the accessory plug after use.

Using the accessory plug for pro-

longed periods of time with the

engine off could cause the bat-

tery to discharge.

• Only use 12V electric accessories

which are less than 10A in elec-

tric capacity. If not, it could lead

to an overheated power outlet or

electric wiring in the vehicle and

electric systems may malfunc-

tion.

• Adjust the air-conditioner or

heater to the lowest operating

level when using the power outlet.

• Close the cover when not in use.

• Some electronic devices can

cause electronic interference

when plugged into a vehicle’s

power outlet. These devices may

cause excessive audio static and

malfunctions in other electronic

systems or devices used in your

vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING

Do not put a finger or a foreign ele-

ment (pin, etc.) into a power outlet

and do not touch with a wet hand.

You may get an electric shock.

ORB041084N

(Continued)

• Make sure that the electric

devices are plugged in securely. If

not, it could cause a malfunction

of electric systems.

• If you use an electric device with

a battery, electric current may

flow from the electric device into

the vehicle and may cause a mal-

function of electric systems. Only

use electric devices which could

prevent inverse current.

Information Provided by:

489

Features of your vehicle

Digital clock (if equipped)

Whenever the battery terminals or relat-

ed fuses are disconnected, you must

reset the time.

When the ignition switch is in the ACC or

ON position, the clock buttons operate as

follows:

Setup the clock

With audio off

1. Press the [SETUP] button until the

clock of the display blinks.

2. Set the clock by turning the knob(1)

and press it.

With audio on

1. Press the [SETUP] button.

2. Select the [CLOCK] mode by turning

the knob(1) and press it.

3. Set the clock by turning the knob(1)

and press it. Clothes hanger (if equipped)

To use the hanger, pull down the upper

portion of hanger.

WARNING

Do not adjust the clock while driv-

ing. You may lose your steering

control and cause an accident that

results in severe personal injury or

death.

ORB044086N OUN026348

CAUTION

Do not hang heavy clothes,

because it may damage the hook.

Information Provided by:

Features of your vehicle

904

Floor mat anchor(s)

When using a floor mat on the front floor

carpet, make sure it attaches to the floor

mat anchor(s) in your vehicle. This keeps

the floor mat from sliding forward.

Cargo area cover (if equipped)

Use the cover to hide items stored in the

cargo area.

The cargo area cover will be lifted when

the tailgate is opened. Disconnect the

strap (1) from holder if you want to return

the cover to original position. To remove

the cargo area cover completely, lift the

cover to a 50-degree angle and pull it out

to the full (2). For installation of the cover,

reverse the removal procedure.

OMD040195N

WARNING

The floor mat must be properly

anchored so that it will not interfere

with the operation of the accelera-

tor pedal. Any interference with the

accelerator pedal could cause the

accelerator pedal to be unable to

return to the idle position. A pedal

that cannot return to the idle posi-

tion could lead to an accident

which may result in severe person-

al injury or death.

WARNING

The following must be observed

when installing ANY floor mat to

the vehicle, so that it will not inter-

fere with the pedal.

• Ensure that the floor mats are

securely attached to the vehicle’s

floor mat anchor(s) before driving

the vehicle.

• Do not use ANY floor mat that

cannot be firmly attached to the

vehicle’s floor mat anchors.

• Do not stack floor mats on top of

one another (e.g. all-weather rub-

ber mat on top of a carpeted floor

mat). Only a single floor mat

should be installed in each posi-

tion.

IMPORTANT – Your vehicle was

manufactured with driver’s side

floor mat anchors that are designed

to securely hold the floor mat in

place. To avoid any interference

with pedal operation, HYUNDAI rec-

ommends that only the HYUNDAI

floor mat designed for use in your

vehicle be installed.

ORB041403

Information Provided by:

491

Features of your vehicle

Aux, USB and iPod®port

If your vehicle has an aux and/or

USB(universal serial bus) port or iPod®

port, you can use an aux port to connect

audio devices and an USB port to plug in

an USB and also an iPod®port to plug in

an iPod®.

✽✽NOTICE

When using a portable audio device

connected to the power outlet, noise may

occur during playback. If this happens,

use the power source of the portable

audio device.

❈iPod®is a trademark of Apple Inc.

Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology

hands-free (if equipped)

You can use a

Bluetooth®

Wireless

Technology phone.

Detailed information for the

Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology hands-free is

described in the “Audio section” in this

chapter or in the manual supplied sepa-

rately.

ORB044087N

CAUTION

• When you return the cargo area

cover to its original position, hold

the cover and lower it.

• Do not operate the vehicle with

the cover removed. It may dam-

age to the cover.

• The cargo area cover may be lift-

ed when the tailgate is opened.

Ensure that the luggage on the

cover is moved to a safe place.

• Since the cargo area cover may be

damaged or malformed, do not

apply excessive force to the cover

or do not put the heavy loads on it.

WARNING

• Do not place objects on the cargo

area cover while driving. Such

objects may be thrown about

inside the vehicle and possibly

injure vehicle occupants during

an accident or when braking.

• Never allow anyone to ride in the

luggage compartment. It is

designed for luggage only.

• Maintain the balance of the vehi-

cle and locate the weight as far

forward as possible.

Information Provided by:

Features of your vehicle

924

Mounting bracket for roof carrier

(if equipped)

To install or remove a roof carrier, you

can use the mounting bracket and cover

on the roof.

When you install a roof carrier, use

approved HYUNDAI accessories and do

the following procedure.

1. Insert a slim tool (coin or flat blade

driver) into the slot and slide the cover

toward the arrow on the cover.

2. Rotate the cover half way and insert

the cover on the roof hole as the illus-

tration.

✽✽NOTICE

To prevent losing the roof carrier cover,

install the cover on the roof before you

install the roof carrier.

3. After using the roof carrier, install the

cover back on the roof in the reverse

order.

EXTERIOR FEATURES

OED046091OED046090

WARNING

Use a coin or flat blade driver when

you remove the roof carrier cover.

If you use your fingernail, it may

injure your finger.

Information Provided by:

493

Features of your vehicle

✽✽NOTICE

If the vehicle is equipped with a sunroof,

be sure not to position cargo onto the

roof in such a way that it could interfere

with sunroof operation.

WARNING

• The vehicle center of gravity will

be higher when items are loaded

onto the roof. Avoid sudden

starts, braking, sharp turns,

abrupt maneuvers or high speeds

that may result in loss of vehicle

control or rollover resulting in an

accident.

• Always drive slowly and turn cor-

ners carefully when carrying

items on the roof. Severe wind

updrafts, caused by passing

vehicles or natural causes, can

cause sudden upward pressure

on items loaded on the roof. This

is especially true when carrying

large, flat items such as wood

panels or mattresses. This could

cause the items to fall off the roof

and cause damage to your vehi-

cle or others around you.

• To prevent damage or loss of

cargo while driving, check fre-

quently before or while driving to

make sure the items on the roof

are securely fastened.

CAUTION

• When carrying cargo on the roof,

take the necessary precautions to

make sure the cargo does not

damage the roof of the vehicle.

• When carrying large objects on

the roof, make sure they do not

exceed the overall roof length or

width.

Information Provided by:

Features of your vehicle

944

✽✽NOTICE

If you install an after market HID (high

intensity discharge) head lamp, your

vehicle's audio and electronic device

may malfunction.

Antenna

Roof antenna

Your car uses a roof antenna to receive

both AM and FM broadcast signals. This

antenna is a removable type. To remove

the antenna, turn it counterclockwise. To

install the antenna, turn it clockwise.

AUDIO SYSTEM

CAUTION

• Before entering a place with a low

height clearance or a car wash,

remove surely the antenna by

rotating it counter-clockwise. If

not, the antenna may be dam-

aged.

• When reinstalling your antenna, it

is important that it is fully tight-

ened and adjusted to the upright

position to ensure proper recep-

tion. But it could be folded or

removed when parking the vehi-

cle or when loading cargo on the

roof rack.

• When cargo is loaded on the roof

rack, do not place the cargo near

the antenna pole to ensure proper

reception.

ORB040088

Information Provided by:

495

Features of your vehicle

Steering wheel audio control

(if equipped)

The steering wheel audio control button

is installed to promote safe driving.

VOLUME (VOL +/-) (1)

• Press the up button (+) to increase vol-

ume.

• Press the down button (-) to decrease

volume.

MUTE (2)

• Press the MUTE button to cancel the

sound.

• Press the MUTE button again to acti-

vate the sound.

MODE (3)

Press the MODE button to select Radio,

CD (Compact Disc).

SEEK/PRESET ( / ) (4)

If the SEEK/PRESET button is pressed

for 0.8 second or more, it will work as fol-

lows in each mode.

RADIO mode

It will function as the AUTO SEEK select

button. It will SEEK until you release the

button.

CDP mode

It will function as the FF/REW button.

If the SEEK/PRESET button is pressed

for less than 0.8 second, it will work as

follows in each mode.

RADIO mode

It will function as the PRESET STATION

select buttons.

CDP mode

It will function as the TRACK UP/DOWN

button.

Detailed information for audio control

buttons is included in the following pages

in this section.

CAUTION

Do not operate audio remote con-

trol buttons simultaneously.

ORB040089

PA710RBU SW

Type A

Type B

Information Provided by:

Features of your vehicle

964

How vehicle audio works

AM and FM radio signals are broadcast

from transmitter towers located around

your city. They are intercepted by the

radio antenna on your vehicle. This signal

is then processed by the radio and sent

to your vehicle speakers.

When a strong radio signal has reached

your vehicle, the precise engineering of

your audio system ensures the best pos-

sible quality reproduction. However, in

some cases the signal coming to your

vehicle may not be strong and clear.

This can be due to factors, such as the

distance from the radio station, close-

ness of other strong radio stations or the

presence of buildings, bridges or other

large obstructions in the area.

AM broadcasts can be received at

greater distances than FM broadcasts.

This is because AM radio waves are

transmitted at low frequencies. These

long distance,low frequency radio waves

can follow the curvature of the earth

rather than travelling straight. In addition,

they curve around obstructions resulting

in better signal coverage.

FM broadcasts are transmitted at high

frequencies and do not bend to follow the

earth's surface. Because of this, FM

broadcasts generally begin to fade within

short distances from the station. short

distances from the station. Also, FM sig-

nals are easily affected by buildings,

mountains, and obstructions. This can

lead to undesirable or unpleasant listen-

ing conditions which might lead you to

believe a problem exists with your radio.

The following conditions are normal and

do not indicate radio trouble:

JBM002

AM reception

JBM001

FM reception

JBM003

FM radio station

Information Provided by:

497

Features of your vehicle

• Fading - As your vehicle moves away

from the radio station, the signal will

weaken and sound will begin to fade.

When this occurs, we suggest that you

select another stronger station.

• Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or

large obstructions between the trans-

mitter and your radio can disturb the

signal causing static or fluttering nois-

es to occur. Reducing the treble level

may lessen this effect until the distur-

bance clears.

• Station Swapping - As an FM signal

weakens, another more powerful sig-

nal near the same frequency may

begin to play. This is because your

radio is designed to lock onto the clear-

est signal. If this occurs, select another

station with a stronger signal.

• Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio signals

being received from several directions

can cause distortion or fluttering. This

can be caused by a direct and reflect-

ed signal from the same station, or by

signals from two stations with close

frequencies. If this occurs, select

another station until the condition has

passed.

Using a cellular phone or a two-way

radio

When a cellular phone is used inside the

vehicle, noise may be produced from the

audio system. This does not mean that

something is wrong with the audio equip-

ment. In such a case, use the cellular

phone at a place as far as possible from

the audio equipment.

JBM005JBM004

WARNING

Do not use a cellular phone while

driving. Stop at a safe location to

use a cellular phone.

CAUTION

When using a communication sys-

tem such as a cellular phone or a

radio set inside the vehicle, a sepa-

rate external antenna must be fitted.

When a cellular phone or a radio set

is used with an internal antenna

alone, it may interfere with the vehi-

cle's electrical system and adversely

affect safe operation of the vehicle.

Information Provided by:

Features of your vehicle

984

Caring for disc

• If the temperature inside the car is too

high, open the car windows to ventilate

before using the system.

• It is illegal to copy and use MP3/WMA

files without permission. Use CDs that

are created only by lawful means.

• Do not apply volatile agents, such as

benzene and thinner, normal cleaners

and magnetic sprays made for ana-

logue disc onto CDs.

• To prevent the disc surface from get-

ting damaged, hold CDs by the edges

or the center hole only.

• Clean the disc surface with a piece of

soft cloth before playback (wipe it from

the center to the outside edge).

• Do not damage the disc surface or

attach pieces of sticky tape or paper.

• Make certain only CDs are inserted

into the CD player (Do not insert more

than one CD at a time).

• Keep CDs in their cases after use to

protect them from scratches or dirt.

• Depending on the type of CD-R/CD-

RW CDs, certain CDs may not operate

normally according to the manufactur-

ing companies. In such circumstances,

continued use may cause malfunctions

to your audio system.

✽✽NOTICE

- Playing an Incompatible Copy

Protected Audio CD

Some copy protected CDs, which do not

comply with international audio CD

standards (Red Book), may not play on

your car audio. Please note that inabili-

ties to properly play a copy protected

CD may indicate that the CD is defec-

tive, not the CD player.

NOTE:

Order of playing files (folders) :

1. Song playing order : to sequen-

tially.

2. Folder playing order :

❋If no song file is contained in the fold-

er, that folder is not displayed.

Information Provided by:

499

Features of your vehicle

WARNING

• Do not stare at the screen while

driving. Staring at the screen for

prolonged periods of time could

lead to traffic accidents.

• Do not disassemble, assemble, or

modify the audio system. Such

acts could result in accidents,

fire, or electric shock.

• Using the phone while driving

may lead to a lack of attention of

traffic conditions and increase

the likelihood of accidents.

Use the phone feature after park-

ing the vehicle.

• Heed caution not to spill water or

introduce foreign objects into the

device. Such acts could lead to

smoke, fire, or product malfunc-

tion.

(Continued)

• Please refrain from use if the

screen is blank or no sound can

be heard as these signs may indi-

cate product malfunction.

Continued use in such conditions

could lead to accidents(fires,

electric shock) or product mal-

functions.

• Do not touch the antenna during

thunder or lightening as such

acts may lead to lightning

induced electric shock.

• Do not stop or park in parking-

restricted areas to operate the

product. Such acts could lead to

traffic accidents.

• Use the system with the vehicle

ignition turned on. Prolonged use

with the ignition turned off could

result in battery discharge.

Information Provided by:

Features of your vehicle

1004

(Continued)

• Turn on the car ignition before

using this device. Do not operate

the audio system for long periods

of time with the ignition turned off

as such operations may lead to

battery discharge.

• Do not subject the device to

severe shock or impact. Direct

pressure onto the front side of

the monitor may cause damage to

the LCD or touch screen.

• When cleaning the device, make

sure to turn off the device and

use a dry and smooth cloth.

Never use tough materials, chem-

ical cloths, or solvents (alcohol,

benzene, thinners, etc.) as such

materials may damage the device

panel or cause color/quality dete-

rioration.

(Continued)

• Do not place beverages close to

the audio system. Spilling bever-

ages may lead to system mal-

function.

• In case of product malfunction,

please contact your place of pur-

chase or After Service center.

• Placing the audio system within

an electromagnetic environment

may result in noise interference.

• Prevent caustic solutions such as

perfume and cosmetic oil from

contacting the dashboard

because they may cause damage

or discoloration.

CAUTION

• Operating the device while driving

could lead to accidents due to a

lack of attention to external sur-

roundings. First park the vehicle

before operating the device.

• Adjust the volume to levels that

allow the driver to hear sounds

from outside of the vehicle. Driving

in a state where external sounds

cannot be heard may lead to acci-

dents.

• Pay attention to the volume setting

when turning the device on. A sud-

den output of extreme volume

upon turning the device on could

lead to hearing impairment.

(Adjust the volume to a suitable

levels before turning off the

device.)

(Continued)

Information Provided by:

4101

Features of your vehicle

✽✽NOTICE

- USING THE USB DEVICE

• To use an external USB device, make

sure the device is not connected

when starting up the vehicle.

Connect the device after starting up.

• If you start the engine when the

USB device is connected, it may

damage the USB device. (USB

flashdrives are very sensitive to

electric shock.)

• If the engine is started up or turned

off while the external USB device is

connected, the external USB device

may not work.

•The System may not play unauthenti-

cated MP3 or WMA files.

1) It can only play MP3 files with

the compression rate between

8Kbps~320Kbps.

2) It can only play WMA music

files with the compression rate

between 8Kbps~320Kbps.

• Take precautions for static electric-

ity when connecting or disconnect-

ing the external USB device.

(Continued)

• An encrypted MP3 PLAYER is not

recognizable.

• Depending on the condition of the

external USB device, the connected

external USB device can be unrec-

ognizable.

• When the formatted byte/sector

setting of External USB device is

not either 512BYTE or 2048BYTE,

then the device will not be recog-

nized.

• Use only a USB device formatted to

FAT 12/16/32.

• USB devices without USB I/F

authentication may not be recog-

nizable.

• Make sure the USB connection ter-

minal does not come in contact with

the human body or other objects.

• If you repeatedly connect or discon-

nect the USB device in a short peri-

od of time, it may break the device.

• You may hear a strange noise when

connecting or disconnecting a USB

device.

(Continued)

• If you disconnect the external USB

device during playback in USB

mode, the external USB device can

be damaged or may malfunction.

Therefore, disconnect the external

USB device when the audio is

turned off or in another mode. (e.g,

Radio, CD)

• Depending on the type and capacity

of the external USB device or the

type of the files stored in the device,

there is a difference in the time

taken for recognition of the device.

• Do not use the USB device for pur-

poses other than playing music

files.

• Playing videos through the USB is

not supported.

• Use of USB accessories such as

rechargers or heaters using USB

I/F may lower performance or

cause trouble.

(Continued)

Information Provided by:

Features of your vehicle

1024

(Continued)

• Some USB flash memory readers

(such as CF, SD, micro SD, etc.) or

external-HDD type devices can be

unrecognizable.

• Music files protected by DRM

(DIGITAL RIGHTS MANAGE-

MENT) are not recognizable.

• The data in the USB memory may

be lost while using this audio.

Always back up important data on

a personal storage device.

• Please avoid using USB

memory products which

can be used as key

chains or cellular phone

accessories as they could

cause damage to the USB jack.

Please make certain only to use

plug type connector products.

(Continued)

• If you use devices such as a USB hub

purchased separately, the vehicle’s

audio system may not recognize the

USB device. In that case, connect the

USB device directly to the multimedia

terminal of the vehicle.

• If the USB device is divided by logical

drives, only the music files on the

highest-priority drive are recognized

by car audio.

• Devices such as MP3 Player/ Cellular

phone/Digital camera can be unrec-

ognizable by standard USB I/F can be

unrecognizable.

• Charging through the USB may not

be supported in some mobile devices.

• USB HDD or USB types liable to con-

nection failures due to vehicle vibra-

tions are not supported.

(i-stick type)

• Some non-standard USB devices

(METAL COVER TYPE USB) can be

unrecognizable.

(Continued)

Information Provided by:

4103

Features of your vehicle

✽✽NOTICE - USING THE

iPod®DEVICE

• Some iPod®models may not sup-

port communication protocol and

files may not properly play.

Supported iPod®models:

- iPhone®3GS/4

- iPod®touch 1st~4th generation

- iPod®nano 1st~6th generation

- iPod®classic

• The order of search or playback of

songs in the iPod®can be different

from the order searched in the

audio system.

• If the iPod®is disabled due to its

own malfunction, reset the iPod®.

(Reset: Refer to iPod®manual)

• An iPod®may not operate normal-

ly on low battery.

(Continued)

• Some iPod®devices, such as the

iPhone®, can be connected through

the Bluetooth®Wireless Technology

interface. The device must have

audio Bluetooth®Wireless

Technology capability (such as for

stereo headphone Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology).

The device can play, but it will not

be controlled by the audio system.

• To use iPod®features within the

audio, use the cable provided upon

purchasing an iPod®device.

• Skipping or improper operation

may occur depending on the char-

acteristics of your iPod®/ iPhone®

device.

• If your iPhone®is connected to

both the Bluetooth®Wireless

Technology and USB, the sound

may not be properly played. In

your iPhone®, select the Dock con-

nector or Bluetooth®Wireless

Technology to change the sound

output (source).

(Continued)

• When connecting iPod®with the

iPod®Power Cable, insert the con-

nector to the multimedia socket

completely. If not inserted com-

pletely, communications between

iPod®and audio may be interrupt-

ed.

• When adjusting the sound effects of

the iPod®and the audio system, the

sound effects of both devices will

overlap and might reduce or distort

the quality of the sound.

• Deactivate (turn off) the equalizer

function of an iPod®when adjust-

ing the audio system’s volume, and

turn off the equalizer of the audio

system when using the equalizer of

an iPod®.

• When not using iPod®with car

audio, detach the iPod®cable from

iPod®. Otherwise, iPod®may

remain in accessory mode, and may

not work properly.

Information Provided by:

Features of your vehicle

1044

✽✽NOTICE -

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

• The Bluetooth®word mark and logos

are registered trademarks owned by

Bluetooth SIG, lnc. and any use of

such marks is under license.

ABluetooth®enabled call phone is

required to use Bluetooth®wireless

technology.

•Bluetooth®Wirelss Technology phone

compatibility can be checked by visit-

ing www. hyundaiusa.com and under

the SERVICE & PARTS -

BLUETOOTH COMPATIBILITY

menu.

✽✽NOTICE - BEFORE USING

THE

Bluetooth

HANDSFREE

What is Bluetooth®?

•Bluetooth®refers to a short-distance

wireless networking technology which

uses a 2.4GHz ~ 2.48GHz frequency to

connect various devices within a cer-

tain distance.

• Supported within PCs, external

devices, Bluetooth®phones, PDAs,

various electronic devices, and auto-

motive environments, Bluetooth®

allows data to be transmitted at high

speeds without having to use a con-

nector cable.

•Bluetooth®Handsfree refers to a device

which allows the user to conveniently

make phone calls with Bluetooth®

mobile phones through the audio sys-

tem.

•Bluetooth®Handsfree may not be sup-

ported in some mobile phones. To learn

more about mobile device compatibility,

visit www. hyundaiusa.com.

✽✽NOTICE - PRECAUTIONS

FOR SAFE DRIVING

•Bluetooth®Handsfree is a feature that

enables drivers to practice safe driv-

ing. Connecting the head unit with a

Bluetooth®phone allows the user to

conveniently make and receive calls

and use contacts. Before using

Bluetooth®, carefully read the contents

of this user’s manual.

• Excessive use or operations while

driving may lead to negligent driving

practices and result in accidents.

Refrain from excessive operations

while driving.

• Viewing the screen for prolonged peri-

ods of time is dangerous and may lead

to accidents. When driving, view the

screen only for short periods of time.

Information Provided by:

4105

Features of your vehicle

✽✽NOTICE - WHEN CONNECT-

ING A

Bluetooth

PHONE

• Before connecting the head unit with

the mobile phone, check to see that the

mobile phone supports Bluetooth®

features.

• Even if the phone supports

Bluetooth®, the phone will not be

found during device searches if the

phone has been set to hidden state or

the Bluetooth®power is turned off.

Disable the hidden state or turn on the

Bluetooth®power prior to

searching/connecting with the Head

unit.

• Bluetooth phone is automatically con-

nected when the ignition on.

• If you do not want automatic connec-

tion with your Bluetooth®device, turn

off the Bluetooth®feature within your

mobile phone.

• The Handsfree call volume and quality

may differ depending on the mobile

phone.

(Continued)

• Park the vehicle when connecting the

head unit with the mobile phone.

•Bluetooth®connection may become

intermittently disconnected in some

mobile phones. Follow these steps to

try again.

1. Within the mobile phone, turn the

Bluetooth®function off/on and try

again.

2.Turn the mobile phone power

Off/On and try again.

3.Completely remove the mobile

phone battery, reboot, and then

again.

4. Reboot the Audio System and try

again.

5. Delete all paired devices, pair and

try again.

• Handsfree call quality and volume

may differ depending on the model of

your mobile phone.

Information Provided by:

Features of your vehicle

1064

✽✽NOTICE - USING THE Voice

Recognition

• When using the voice recognition fea-

ture, only commands listed within the

user's manual are supported.

• Be aware that during the operation of

the voice recognition system, pressing

any key other than the key termi-

nate voice recognition mode.

• For superior voice recognition per-

formance, position the microphone

used for voice recognition above the

head of the driver’s seat and maintain

a proper position when saying com-

mands.

• Within the following situations, voice

recognition may not function properly

due to external sound.

- When the windows and sunroof are

open

- When the wind of the cooling / heat-

ing device is strong

- When entering and passing through

tunnels

(Continued)

- When driving on rugged and

uneven roads

- During severe rain (heavy rains,

windstorms)

• Phone related voice commands can be

used only when a Bluetooth®Wireless

Technology device is connected.

• When making calls by stating a name,

the corresponding contact must be

downloaded and stored within the

audio system.

• After downloading the Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology phone book, it

takes some times to convert the phone

book data into voice information.

During this time, voice recognition

may not properly operate.

• Pronounce the voice commands natu-

rally and clearly as if in a normal con-

versation.

Information Provided by:

4107

Features of your vehicle

■■ CD Player : AC180SBAN,AC180SBKN,AC1B0SBAN,AC1B0SBKN

❋No logo will be shown if the

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology feature is not supported.

Information Provided by:

Features of your vehicle

1084

SYSTEM CONTROLLERS AND

FUNCTIONS

Audio Head Unit

(for

Bluetooth

®equipped model)

1. (EJECT)

• Ejects the disc.

• Changes to FM, AM, XM mode.

• Each time the key is pressed, the

mode is changed in order of FM1,

FM2, AM, XM1, XM2, XM3.

❈In Setup>Display, the radio pop up

screen will be displayed when [Mode

Pop up] is turned .

When the pop up screen is displayed,

use the TUNE knob or keys

~ to select the desired mode.

• Changes to CD, USB(iPod®), AUX, My

Music, BT Audio mode.

• Each time the key is pressed, the

mode is changed in order of CD,

USB(iPod®), AUX, My Music, BT

Audio.

❈In Setup>Display, the media pop up

screen will be displayed when [Mode

Pop up] is turned . When the

pop up screen is displayed, use the

TUNE knob or keys ~ to

select the desired mode.

4. (for

Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology equipped model)

• Operates Phone Screen

❈When a phone is not connected, the

connection screen is displayed.

• Radio Mode : Automatically searches

for broadcast frequencies.

• CD, USB, iPod®, My Music modes

- Shortly press the key (under 0.8 sec-

onds): Moves to next or previous

song (file)

- Press and hold the key (over 0.8 sec-

onds): Rewinds or fast-forwards the

current song.

• BT Audio mode : Moves to next or pre-

vious song(file)

❈The Play/Pause feature may operate

differently depending on the mobile

phone.

6. PWR/VOL knob

• Power : Turns power On/Off by

pressing the knob

• Volume : Sets volume by turning

the knob left/right

SEEK

TRACK

PHONE

MEDIA

RADIO

Information Provided by:

4109

Features of your vehicle

• Each time the button is shortly pressed

(under 0.8 seconds), it sets the screen

Off ➟Screen On ➟Screen Off

❈Audio operation is maintained and only

the screen will be turned Off. In the

screen Off state, press any key to turn

the screen On again.

• Radio Mode

- Shortly press the key (under 0.8 sec-

onds): Previews each broadcast for 5

seconds each.

- Press and hold the key (over 0.8 sec-

onds): Previews the broadcasts saved

in Preset ~ for 5 seconds

each.

❈Press the key again to contin-

ue listening to the current frequency.

❈SiriusXM™Radio: does not support

the Preset scan feature.

• CD, USB, My Music mode

- Shortly press the key (under 0.8 sec-

onds): Previews each song (file) for 10

seconds each.

❈Press the key again to contin-

ue listening to the current song (file).

• Shortly press the key (under 0.8 sec-

onds) : Moves to the Display, Sound,

Clock, Phone, System setting modes.

• Press and hold the key (over 0.8 sec-

onds): Moves to the Clock setting

mode.

10.

• Displays menus for the current mode.

11.

• Radio Mode

- SiriusXM™RADIO : Category Search

• MP3, CD, USB mode : Folder Search

12. TUNE knob

• Radio mode : Changes frequency by

turning the knob left/right.

• CD, USB, iPod®, My Music mode:

Searches songs (files) by turning the

knob left/right.

❈When the desired song is displayed,

press the knob to play the song.

• Moves focus in all selection menus and

selects menus.

13. ~ (Preset)

• Radio Mode: Saves frequencies (chan-

nels) or receives saved frequencies

(channels)

• CD, USB, iPod®, My Music mode

- : Repeat

- : Random

• In the Radio, Media, Setup, and Menu

pop up screen, the number menu is

selected.

2 RDM

1 RPT

CAT

FOLDER

SETUP

CLOCK

SCAN

DISP

Information Provided by:

Features of your vehicle

1104

Audio Head Unit

14.

• Changes to FM mode.

• Each time the key is pressed, the

mode changed in order of FM1, FM2,

AM.

15.

• Changes to XM mode.

SAT

FM/AM

Information Provided by:

4111

Features of your vehicle

SETUP

Display Settings

Press the key Select [Display]

Select menu through TUNE knob

Mode Pop up

[Mode Pop up] Changes /

selection mode

• During On state, press the or

key to display the mode

change pop up screen.

Text Scroll

[Text Scroll] Set /

• : Maintains scroll

• : Scrolls only one (1) time.

Media Display

When playing an MP3 file, select the

desired display info from ‘Folder/File’ or

‘Album/Artist/Song’.

Sound Settings

Press the key Select [Sound]

Select menu through TUNE knob

SETUP

Off

MEDIA

RADIO

Off

SETUP

Information Provided by:

Features of your vehicle

1124

Sound Settings

This menu allows you to set the ‘Bass,

Middle, Treble’ and the Sound Fader and

Balance.

Select [Sound Settings] Select menu

through

TUNE knob

Tu r n

TUNE

knob

left/right to set

• Bass, Middle, Treble : Selects the sound

tone.

• Fader, Balance : Moves the sound fader

and balance.

• Default : Restores default settings.

❈Back : While adjusting values, re-

pressing the TUNE knob will

restore the parent menu.

Speed Dependent Volume Control

This feature is used to automatically con-

trol the volume level according to the

speed of the vehicle.

Select [Speed Dependent Vol.] Set in 4

levels [Off/Low/Mid/High] of

TUNE

knob

Voice Recognition Volume

Adjusts voice recognition volume.

Select [Voice Recognition Vol.] Set vol-

ume of

TUNE

knob

Information Provided by:

4113

Features of your vehicle

CLOCK SETTINGS

Press the key Select [Clock]

through TUNE knob or key

Select menu through TUNE knob

Clock Settings

This menu is used to set the time.

Select [Clock Settings] Set through

TUNE knob Press TUNE knob

❈Adjust the number currently in focus to

set the [hour] and press the tune knob

to set the [minute].

Calendar Settings

This menu is used to set the date

(MM/DD/YYYY).

Select [Calendar Settings] Set through

TUNE knob Press TUNE knob

❈Adjust the number currently in focus to

make the settings and press the tune

knob to move to the next setting. (Set

in order of Year/Month/Day)

Time Format

This function is used to set the 12/24

hour time format of the audio system.

Select [Time Format] Set 12Hr / 24Hr

through TUNE knob

Clock Display when Power is OFF

Select [Clock Disp.(Pwr Off) Set

through

TUNE

knob

: Displays time/date on screen

: Turn off.

Off

SETUP

CLOCK

Information Provided by:

Features of your vehicle

1144

SYSTEM SETTINGS

Press the key Select [System]

Select menu through TUNE knob

Memory Information

Displays currently used memory and

total system memory.

Select [Memory Information] OK

The currently used memory is displayed

on the left side while the total system

memory is displayed on the right side.

Prompt Feedback

This feature is used to change voice

command feedback between Normal and

Expert modes.

Select [Prompt Feedback] Set through

TUNE

knob

• Normal(On) : This mode is for beginner

users and provides detailed instruc-

tions during voice command operation.

• Expert(Off) : This mode is for expert

users and omits some information dur-

ing voice command operation. (When

using Expert mode, guidance instruc-

tions can be heard through the [Help]

or [Menu] commands.

Language

This menu is used to set the display and

voice recognition language.

Select [Language] Set through

TUNE knob

❈ The system will reboot after the lan-

guage is changed.

❈ Language support by region

- English, Francais, Espanol

SETUP

Information Provided by:

4115

Features of your vehicle

RADIO : FM, AM OR

SIRIUSXMTM

SEEK

Press the key

• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8

seconds): Changes the frequency.

• Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8

seconds): Automatically searches for

the next frequency.

Preset SEEK

Press the ~ key

• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8

seconds): Plays the frequency saved in

the corresponding key.

• Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8

seconds): Pressing and holding the

desired key from ~ will

save the currently playing broadcast to

the selected key and sound a BEEP.

SCAN

Press the key

• Shortly pressing the key : The broad-

cast frequency increases and previews

each broadcast for 5 seconds each.

After scanning all frequencies, returns

and plays the current broadcast fre-

quency.

• Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8

seconds): Previews the broadcasts

saved in Preset ~ for 5

seconds each.

Selecting through manual search

Turn the TUNE knob left/right to adjust

the frequency.

• FM : Changes by 200KHz

• AM : Changes by 10KHz

SCAN

SEEK

TRACK

Information Provided by:

Features of your vehicle

1164

Within key are the A.Store (Auto

Store) and Info functions.

A.Store

Press the key Set [A.Store]

through TUNE knob or key.

Saves broadcasts with superior recep-

tion to ~ keys. If no frequen-

cies are received, then the most recently

received frequency will be broadcast.

Information Provided by:

4117

Features of your vehicle

Satellite Radio channels:

SiriusXMTM Satellite Radio offers 150+

channels with 100% commercial-free

music, plus sports, news, talk and enter-

tainment, available nationwide in your

vehicle. For more information and a com-

plete list of SiriusXMTM Satellite Radio

channels, visit www.siriusxm.com in the

United States, sirius-canada.ca in

Canada, or call SiriusXMTM at 1-800-643-

2112.

Satellite Radio reception factors:

To receive the satellite signal, your vehi-

cle has been equipped with a satellite

radio antenna located on the roof of your

vehicle. The vehicle roof provides the

best location for an unobstructed, open

view of the sky, a requirement of a satel-

lite radio system. Like AM/FM, there are

several factors that can affect satellite

radio reception performance:

• Antenna obstructions: For optimal

reception performance, keep the

antenna clear of snow and ice build-up

and keep luggage and other material

as far away from the antenna as possi-

ble.

• Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings,

bridges, tunnels, freeway overpasses,

parking garages, dense tree foliage

and thunderstorms can interfere with

your reception.

SiriusXMTM Satellite Radio service:

SiriusXMTM Satellite Radio is a subscrip-

tion-based satellite radio service that

broadcasts music, sports, news and

entertainment programming to radio

receivers, which are available for installa-

tion in motor vehicles or factory installed,

as well as for the home, portable and

wireless devices, and through an Internet

connection on personal computer.

Vehicles that are equipped with a factory

installed SiriusXMTM Satellite Radio sys-

tem include:

• Hardware and an introductory trial sub-

scription term, which begins on the

date of sale or lease of the vehicle.

• For a small upgrade fee, access to

SiriusXMTM music channels, and other

select channels over the Internet using

any computer connected to the

Internet (U.S. customers only).

For information on extended subscrip-

tion terms, contact SiriusXMTM at 1-

866-635-2349.

NOTE:

All SiriusXMTM services require a sub-

scription, sold separately or as a

package, after 3-month trial included

with vehicle purchase or lease. If you

decide to continue your SiriusXMTM

service at the end of your trial sub-

scription, the plan you choose will

automatically renew and bill at then-

current rates until you call us at 1-866-

635-2349 to cancel. See our Customer

Agreement for complete terms at

www.siriusxm.com. Other fees and

taxes apply. All fees and program-

ming are subject to change. Sirius

satellite service is available only to

those at least 18 and older in the 48

contiguous USA, D.C., and PR (with

coverage limitations). Our Internet

radio service is available throughout

our satellite service area and in AK

and HI. Certain channels are not avail-

able on our Internet radio service or

on mobile devices.

and all related marks and logos are

trademarks of SiriusXMTM Radio Inc.

SiriusXMTM Satellite Radio information

Information Provided by:

Features of your vehicle

1184

SiriusXMTM RADIO

Using SiriusXMTM Satellite

Radio

Your vehicle is equipped with a 3 month

complimentary period of SiriusXMTM

Satellite Radio. XM provides access to

over 130 channels of music, information,

and entertainment programming.

SEEK

Press the key

• Shortly pressing the key: select previ-

ous or next channel.

• Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8

seconds): continuously move to previ-

ous or next channel.

❈If the “Category” icon is displayed,

channels are changed within the cur-

rent category.

SCAN

Press the key

• Shortly pressing the key: Previews

each broadcast for 5 seconds each

❈Press the key again to contin-

ue listening to the current frequency

❈If the “Category” icon is displayed,

channels are changed within the cur-

rent category.

Category

Press the key Set through

the

TUNE

knob

• The display will indicate the category

menus, highlight the category that the

current channel belongs to.

• In the Category List Mode, press the

key to navigate category

list.

• Press the tune knob to select the low-

est channel in the highlighted category.

❈If channel is selected by selecting cat-

egory, then the “CATEGORY” icon is

displayed at the top of the screen.

Preset

Press the ~ key

• Shortly pressing the key: Plays the fre-

quency saved in the corresponding

key.

• Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8

seconds): Pressing and holding the

desired key from ~ will

save the current broadcast to the

selected key and sound a BEEP.

CAT

FOLDER

CAT

FOLDER

SCAN

SEEK

TRACK

Information Provided by:

4119

Features of your vehicle

Tune

• Rotate TUNE knob : Changes the

channel number or scrolls category list.

• Press TUNE knob : Selects the

menu.

Select category menu through the

TUNE knob Press the key

Select [ Info] through the TUNE knob

or key

Info (Information)

Displays the Artist/Song info of the cur-

rent song.

Information Provided by:

Features of your vehicle

1204

BASIC METHOD OF USE :

AUDIO CD / MP3 CD / USB /

iPOD®/ MY MUSIC

Press the key to change the

mode in order of CD➟USB(iPod®)➟AUX

➟My Music➟BT Audio.

The folder/file name is displayed on the

screen.

<USB>

❈The CD is automatically played when a

CD is inserted.

❈The USB music is automatically played

when a USB is connected.

Repeat

While song (file) is playing (RPT)

key

Audio CD, MP3 CD, USB, iPod®, My

Music mode: RPT on screen

• To repeat one song (press the key :

Repeats the current song.

MP3 CD, USB mode: FLD.RPT on

screen

• To repeat folder (pressing twice):

repeats all files within the current fold-

er.

❈Press the key again to turn off

repeat.

Random

While song (file) is playing (RDM)

key

Audio CD, iPod®, My Music mode: RDM

on screen

• Random (press the key : Plays all

songs in random order.

2 RDM

1 RPT

MEDIA

Information Provided by:

4121

Features of your vehicle

MP3 CD, USB mode: FLD.RDM on

screen

• Folder Random (press the key : Plays

all files within the current folder in ran-

dom order.

MP3 CD, USB mode : ALL RDM on

screen

• All Random (pressing twice): Plays all

files in random order.

❈Press the key again to turn off

repeat.

Changing Song/File

While song (file) is playing key

• Shortly pressing the key : Plays the

current song from the beginning.

❈If the key is pressed again

within 1 second, the previous song is

played.

• Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8

seconds): Rewinds the song.

While song (file) is playing

key

• Shortly pressing the key : Plays the

next song.

• Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8

seconds): Fast forwards the song.

Scan

While song (file) is playing key

• Shortly pressing the key : Scans all

songs from the next song for 10 sec-

onds each.

❈Press the key again to turn off.

❈The SCAN function is not supported in

iPod®mode.

Folder Search : MP3 CD, USB

Mode

While file is playing (Folder

Up) key

• Searches the next folder.

While file is playing (Folder

Down) key

• Searches the parent folder.

❈If a folder is selected by pressing the

TUNE knob, the first file within the

selected folder will be played.

Searching Songs (File)

• Turning TUNE knob : Searches for

songs (files)

• Pressing TUNE knob : Plays select-

ed song (file).

CAT

FOLDER

CAT

FOLDER

SCAN

SEEK

TRACK

SEEK

TRACK

SEEK

TRACK

2RDM

Information Provided by:

Features of your vehicle

1224

MENU : Audio CD

Press the CD MP3 mode key to

set the Repeat, Random, Information

features.

Repeat

Press the key Set [ RPT]

through the TUNE knob or key

to repeat the current song.

❈Press RPT again to turn off.

Random

Press the key Set [ RDM]

through the

TUNE

knob or key to

randomly play songs within the current

folder.

❈Press RDM again to turn off.

Information

Press the key Set [ Info]

through the

TUNE

knob or key to

display information of the current song.

❈Press the key to turn off info

display.

MENU : MP3 CD / USB

Press the CD MP3 mode key to

set the Repeat, Folder Random, Folder

Repeat, All Random, Information, and

Copy features.

Repeat

Press the key Set [ RPT]

through the

TUNE

knob or key to

repeat the current song.

❈Press RPT again to turn off.

1 RPT

2 RDM

1 RPT

Information Provided by:

4123

Features of your vehicle

Folder Random

Press the key Set [ F.RDM]

through the TUNE knob or key

to randomly play songs within the current

folder.

❈Press F.RDM again to turn off.

Folder Repeat

Press the key Set [ F.RPT]

through the

TUNE

knob or key to

repeat songs within the current folder.

❈ Press F.RPT again to turn off.

All Random

Press the key Set [ A.RDM]

through the

TUNE

knob or key to

randomly play all songs within the CD.

❈ Press A.RDM again to turn off.

Information

Press the key Set [ Info]

through the

TUNE

knob or key to

display information of the current song.

❈Press the key to turn off info

display.

Copy

Press the key Set [ Copy]

through the TUNE knob or key.

This is used to copy the current song into

My Music. You can play the copied Music

in My Music mode.

❈If another key is pressed while copying

is in progress, a pop up asking you

whether to cancel copying is displayed.

❈If another media is connected or

inserted (USB, CD, iPod®, AUX) while

copying is in progress, copying is can-

celed.

❈Music will not be played while copying

is in progress.

MENU : iPod®

In iPod®mode, press the key to

set the Repeat, Random, Information and

Search features.

Repeat

Press the key Set [ RPT]

through the

TUNE

knob or key to

repeat the current song.

❈ Press RPT again to turn repeat off.

Random

Press the key Set [ RDM]

through the TUNE knob or key.

Plays all songs within the currently play-

ing category in random order.

❈Press RDM again to turn off.

2 RDM

1 RPT

2 RDM

Information Provided by:

Features of your vehicle

1244

Information

Press the key Set [ Info]

through the

TUNE

knob or key.

Displays information of the current song.

❈Press the key to turn off info

display.

Press the key Set [ Search]

through the

TUNE

knob or key.

Displays iPod®category list.

❈Searching iPod®category is

key pressed, move to parent category..

Information Provided by:

4125

Features of your vehicle

MENU : My Music Mode

In My Music mode, press the key

to set the Repeat, Random, Information,

Delete, Delete All, and Delete Selection

features.

Repeat

Press the key Set [ RPT]

through the TUNE knob or key.

Repeats the currently playing song.

❈Press RPT again to turn repeat off.

Random

Press the key Set [ RDM]

through the TUNE knob or key.

Plays all songs in random order.

❈Press RDM again to turn random off.

Information

Press the key Set [ Info]

through the

TUNE

knob or key.

Displays information of the current song.

❈Press the key to turn off info

display.

Delete

Press the key Set [ Delete]

through the TUNE knob or key.

Deletes currently playing file

In the play screen, pressing delete will

delete the currently playing song.

Deletes file from list

➀Select the file you wish to delete by

using the TUNE knob.

➁Press the key and select the

delete menu to delete the selected file.

Delete All

Press the key Set [ Del.All]

through the TUNE knob or key.

Deletes all songs of My Music.

Delete Selection

Press the key Set [ Del.Sel]

through the TUNE knob or key.

Songs within My Music are selected and

deleted.

➀Select the songs you wish to delete

from the list.

➁After selecting, press the key and

select the delete menu.

2 RDM

1 RPT

Information Provided by:

Features of your vehicle

1264

✽✽NOTICE - USING THE MY

MUSIC

• Even if memory is available, a maxi-

mum of 6,000 songs can be stored.

• The same song can be copied up to

1,000 times.

• Memory info can be checked in the

System menu of Setup.

AUX

AUX is used to play external MEDIA cur-

rently connected with the AUX terminal.

AUX mode will automatically start when

an external device is connected with the

AUX terminal.

If an external device is connected, you

can also press the key to change

to AUX mode.

❈AUX mode cannot be started unless

there is an external device connected

to the AUX terminal.

✽✽NOTICE - USING THE AUX

Fully insert the AUX cable into the AUX

terminal for use.

MEDIA

Information Provided by:

4127

Features of your vehicle

Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology

AUDIO (if equipped model)

What is

Bluetooth®

Wireless

Technology

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology allows

devices to be connected in a short distance,

including hands-free devices, stereo head-

sets, wireless remote controllers, etc. For

more information, visit

the

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

website at

www.Bluetooth.com

Before using

Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology audio features

•

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology audio

may not be supported depending on

the compatibility of your

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology mobile phone.

• In order to use

Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology audio, you must first pair

and connect the

Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology mobile phone.

•

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology audio

can be used only when the [Audio

Streaming] of Phone is turned .

❈Setting

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

Audio Streaming : Press the

key Select [Phone] Select [Audio

Streaming] through the TUNE

knob Set

Starting

Bluetooth®

Wireless

Technology Audio

• Press the key to change the

mode in order of CD➟USB➟AUX➟My

Music➟BT Audio.

• If BT Audio is selected,

Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology audio will start

playing.

❈Audio may not automatically start play-

ing in some mobile phones.

Using the

Bluetooth®

Wireless

Technology audio features

• Play / Stop

Press the TUNE knob to play and

pause the current song.

❈The play / pause functions may not be

supported in some mobile phones.

MEDIA

OffOn

SETUP

Information Provided by:

Features of your vehicle

1284

PHONE

Before using the

Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology phone features

• In order to use

Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology phone, you must first pair

and connect the

Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology mobile phone.

• If the mobile phone is not paired or con-

nected, it is not possible to enter Phone

mode. Once a phone is paired or con-

nected, the guidance screen will be dis-

played.

• If Priority is set upon vehicle

ignition(IGN/ACC ON), the

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology phone will be auto-

matically connected. Even if you are out-

side, the first

Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology phone will be automatically

connected once you are in the vicinity of

the vehicle. If you do not want automatic

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology phone

connection, set the

Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology power to OFF.

PHONE

(if equipped model)

Making a call using the Steering

wheel mount controls

❈The actual feature in the vehicle may

differ from the illustration.

1) button : Activates voice

recognition.

2) button : Places and transfers calls.

3) button : Ends calls or cancels func-

tions.

Check call history and making call

➀Shortly press (under 0.8 seconds) the

key on the steering remote con-

troller.

➁The call history list will be displayed on

the screen.

➂Press the key again to connect a

call to the selected number.

Redialing the most recently called

number

➀Press and hold (over 0.8 seconds) the

key on the steering remote con-

troller.

➁The most recently called number is

redialed.

❈ If call history does not exist, a screen

asking whether to download call histo-

ry is displayed. (The download feature

may not be supported in some mobile

phones)

Information Provided by:

4129

Features of your vehicle

Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology

(if equipped model)

Pairing a

Bluetooth®

Wireless

Technology Device

What is Bluetooth®Wireless

Technology Pairing?

Pairing refers to the process of synchro-

nizing your

Bluetooth®

Wireless

Technology phone or device with the car

audio system for connection. Pairing is

necessary to connect and use the

Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology feature.

WARNING

Driving while distracted can

result in a loss of vehicle control

that may lead to an accident,

severe personal injury, and death.

The driver’s primary responsibili-

ty is in the safe and legal opera-

tion of a vehicle, and use of any

handheld devices, other equip-

ment, or vehicle systems which

take the driver’s eyes, attention

and focus away from the safe

operation of a vehicle or which

are not permissible by law should

never be used during operation

of the vehicle.

Information Provided by:

Features of your vehicle

1304

Pairing Key / Key on

the Steering Remote Controller

When No Devices have been Paired

1. Press the key or the key

on the steering remote controller. The

following screen is displayed.

2. Select [OK] button to enter the Pair

Phone screen.

1) Car Name : Name of device as shown

when searching from your

Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology device

2) Passkey : Passkey used to pair the

device

3. From your

Bluetooth®

Wireless

Technology device (i.e. Mobile Phone),

search and select your car audio sys-

tem.

[Non SSP supported device]

(SSP: Secure Simple Pairing)

4. After a few moments, a screen is dis-

played where the passkey is entered.

Hear, enter the passkey “0000” to pair

your

Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology

device with the car audio system.

[SSP supported device]

4. After a few moments, a screen is dis-

played 6 digits passkey .

Hear, check the passkey on your

Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology device

and confirm.

5. Once pairing is complete, the following

screen is displayed.

PHONE

Information Provided by:

4131

Features of your vehicle

✽✽NOTICE

If Bluetooth®Wireless Technology

devices are paired but none are current-

ly connected, pressing the key

or the key on the steering wheel

displays the following screen. Select

[Pair] button to pair a new device or

select [Connect] to connect a previously

paired device.

Pairing through [PHONE] Setup

Press the key Select

[Phone] Select [Pair Phone] Select

TUNE knob

1. The following steps are the same as

those described in the section "When

No Devices have been Paired" on the

previous page.

✽✽NOTICE

•Bluetooth®Wireless Technology fea-

tures supported within the vehicle are

as follows. Some features may not be

supported depending on your

Bluetooth®Wireless Technology

device.

- Outgoing/Incoming Handsfree calls

- Operations during a call (Switch to

Private, Switch to call waiting, MIC

on/off)

- Downloading Call History

- Downloading Mobile Contacts

-Bluetooth®Wireless Technology

device auto connection

- Bluetooth Audio Streaming

• Up to five Bluetooth®Wireless

Technology devices can be paired to

the Car Handsfree system.

• Only one Bluetooth®Wireless

Technology device can be connected at

a time.

• Other devices cannot be paired while

a Bluetooth®Wireless Technology

device is connected.

• Only Bluetooth®Wireless Technology

Handsfree and Bluetooth audio relat-

ed features are supported.

SETUP

PHONE

Information Provided by:

Features of your vehicle

1324

• Bluetooth related operations are pos-

sible only within devices that support

Handsfree or audio features, such as a

Bluetooth®Wireless Technology

mobile phone or a Bluetooth audio

device.

• If a connected Bluetooth®Wireless

Technology device becomes discon-

nected due to being out of communi-

cation range, turning the device OFF,

or a Bluetooth®Wireless Technology

communication error, corresponding

Bluetooth®Wireless Technology

devices are automatically searched

and reconnected.

• If the system becomes unstable due to

communication errors between the

car Handsfree and the Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology device, reset the

device by turning off and back on

again. Upon resetting Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology device, the sys-

tem will be restored.

• After pairing is complete, a contacts

download request is sent once to the

mobile phone. Some mobile phones

may require confirmation upon

receiving a download request, ensure

your mobile phone accepts the con-

nection. Refer to your phones user’s

manual for additional information

regarding phone pairing and connec-

tions.

Connecting a Device

Press the key Select

[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]

1)Connected Phone : Device that is cur-

rently connected

2)Paired Phone : Device that is paired

but not connected

From the paired phone list, select the

device you want to connect and select

[Connect].

SETUP

Information Provided by:

4133

Features of your vehicle

Changing Priority

What is Priority?

It is possible to pair up to five

Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology devices with the car

audio system. The "Change Priority" fea-

ture is used to set the connection priority

of paired phones.

Press the key Select [Phone]

Select [Paired Phone List]

From the paired phone list, select the

phone you want to switch to the highest

priority, then select [Change Priority] but-

ton from the Menu. The selected device

will be changed to the highest priority.

✽✽NOTICE

Priority icon will be displayed when the

selected phone is set as a priority phone.

SETUP

Information Provided by:

Features of your vehicle

1344

Disconnecting a Device

Press the key Select

[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]

From the paired phone list, select the

currently connected device and select

[Disconnect] button.

Deleting a Device

Press the key Select

[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]

From the paired phone list, select the

device you want to delete and select

[Delete] button.

✽✽NOTICE

• When deleting the currently connected

device, the device will automatically be

disconnected to proceed with the delet-

ing process.

• If a paired Bluetooth®Wireless

Technology device is deleted, the

device’s call history and contacts data

will also be deleted.

• To re-use a deleted device, you must

pair the device again.

SETUP SETUP

Information Provided by:

4135

Features of your vehicle

USING

Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology

Phone Menu Screen

Phone Menus

With a

Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology

device connected, press the

key to display the Phone menu screen.

1)Favorite : Up to 20 frequently used

contacts saved for easy access

2)Call History : Device the call history list

screen

3)Contacts : Displays the Contacts list

screen

4)Setup : Displays Phone related set-

tings.

✽✽NOTICE

• If you select the [Call History] button

but there is no call history data, a

prompt is displayed which asks to

download call history data.

• If you select the [Contacts] button but

there is no contacts data stored, a

prompt is displayed which asks to

download contacts data.

• This feature may not be supported in

some mobile phones. For more infor-

mation on download support, refer to

your mobile phone user’s manual.

Answering Calls

Answering a Call

Answering a call with a

Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology device connected

will display the following screen.

To accept the call, press key on the

steering wheel while the call is incoming.

1)Caller : Displays the other party’s

name when the incoming caller is

saved within your contacts

2)Incoming Number : Displays the

incoming number

PHONE

Information Provided by:

Features of your vehicle

1364

✽✽NOTICE

• When an incoming call pop-up is dis-

played, most Audio and SETUP mode

features are disabled. Only the call

volume will operate.

• The telephone number may not be

properly displayed in some mobile

phones.

• When a call is answered with the

mobile phone, the call mode will auto-

matically revert to Private mode.

Favorites

Press the key Select

[Favorites]

1)Saved favorite contact : Connects call

upon selection

2)To add favorite : Downloaded contacts

be saved as favorite.

✽✽NOTICE

• To save Favorite, contacts should be

downloaded.

• Contact saved in Favorites will not be

automatically updated if the contact

has been updated in the phone. To

update Favorites, delete the Favorite

and create a new Favorite.

Call History

Press the key Select [Call

History]

A list of incoming, outgoing and missed

calls is displayed.

• Call history may not be saved in the call

history list in some mobile phones.

• Calls received with hidden caller ID will

not be saved in the call history list.

• Calling through the call history is not

possible when there is no call history

stored or a

Bluetooth®

Wireless

Technology phone is not connected.

• Up to 20 received, dialed and missed

calls are stored in Call History.

• Time of received/dialed calls and call

time information are not saved.

PHONE

Information Provided by:

4137

Features of your vehicle

Contacts

Press the key Select

[Contacts]

The list of saved phone book entries is

displayed.

NOTE:

Find a contact in an alphabetical

order, press the key.

✽✽NOTICE

• Up to 1,000 contacts saved in your

Bluetooth® Wireless Technology

phone can be downloaded into the car

contacts. Contacts that have been

downloaded to the car cannot be edit-

ed or deleted on the phone.

• Mobile phone contacts are managed

separately for each paired Bluetooth®

Wireless Technology device (max 5

devices x 1,000 contacts each).

Previously downloaded data is main-

tained even if the Bluetooth® Wireless

Technology device has been discon-

nected.

(However, the contacts and call histo-

ry saved to the phone will be deleted if

a paired phone is deleted.)

• It is possible to download contacts

during Bluetooth streaming audio.

• When downloading contacts, the icon

will be displayed within the status bar.

• It is not possible to begin downloading

a contact list when the contact down-

load feature has been turned off with-

in the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology

device. In addition, some devices may

require device authorization upon

attempting to download contacts. If

downloading does not normally occur,

check the Bluetooth® Wireless

Technology device settings or the

screen state.

• The contacts download feature may

not be supported in some mobile

phones. For more information of sup-

ported Bluetooth® devices and func-

tion support, refer to your phone’s

user manual.

PHONE

Information Provided by:

Features of your vehicle

1384

Bluetooth®

Wireless

Technology Setting

Pairing a New Device

Press the key Select

[Phone] Select [Pair Phone]

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology devices

can be paired with the audio system.

For more information, refer to the “Pairing

through Phone Setup” section within

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology.

Viewing Paired Phone List

Press the key Select

[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]

This feature is used to view mobile

phones that have been paired with the

audio system. Upon selecting a paired

phone, the setup menu is displayed.

For more information, refer to the “Setting

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

Connection” section within

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology.

1) Connect/Disconnect Phone : Connect/

disconnects currently selected phone

2) Change Priority : Sets currently select-

ed phone to highest connection priori-

3) Delete : Deletes the currently selected

phone

4) Return : Moves to the previous screen

SETUP

Information Provided by:

4139

Features of your vehicle

✽✽NOTICE BEFORE DOWN-

LOADING CONTACTS

• Only contacts within connected

phones can be downloaded. Also

check to see that your mobile phone

supports the download feature.

• To learn more about whether your

mobile phone supports contacts

downloads, refer to your mobile

phone user’s manual.

• The contacts for only the connected

phone can be downloaded.

Downloading Contacts

Press the key Select [Phone]

Select [Contacts Download]

As the contacts are downloaded

from the mobile phone, a download

progress bar is displayed.

✽✽NOTICE

• Upon downloading phone contacts,

the previous corresponding data is

deleted.

• This feature may not be supported in

some mobile phones.

• Voice Recognition may not operate

while contacts are being downloaded.

Auto Download (Contacts)

Press the key Select [Phone]

Select [Auto Download]

This feature is used to automatically

download mobile contacts entries once a

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology phone

is connected.

✽✽NOTICE

• The Auto Download feature will

download mobile contacts entries

every time the phone is connected.

The download time may differ

depending on the number of saved

contacts entries and the communica-

tion state.

• Before downloading contacts, first

check to see that your mobile phone

supports the contacts download fea-

ture.

SETUP

Information Provided by:

Features of your vehicle

1404

Audio Streaming

Press the key Select [Phone]

Select [Audio Streaming]

When Audio Streaming is turned on, you

can play music files saved in your

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology device

through the audio system.

Outgoing Volume

Press the key Select

[Phone] Select [Outgoing Volume]

Use TUNE knob to adjust the outgo-

ing volume level.

✽✽NOTICE

While on a call, the volume can be

changed by using the key.

Turning Bluetooth System Off

Press the key Select

[Phone] Select [Bluetooth System Off]

Once

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology is

turned off,

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

related features will not be supported with-

in the audio system.

✽✽NOTICE

To turn Bluetooth®Wireless Technology

back on, go to [Phone] and

select “Yes”.

SETUP

SEEK

TRACK

SETUP

Information Provided by:

4141

Features of your vehicle

VOICE RECOGNITION

(if equipped model)

Using Voice Recognition

Starting Voice Recognition

Shortly press the key on the steer-

ing wheel. Say a command.

If prompt feedback is in [ON], then the

system will say “Please say a command

after the beep (BEEP)”

• If prompt feedback is in [OFF] mode,

then the system will only say “(BEEP)”

• To change Prompt Feedback

[On]/[Off], go to [System]

[Prompt Feedback]

✽✽NOTICE

For proper recognition, say the com-

mand after the voice instruction and

beep tone.

Contact List Best Practices

1)Do not store single-name entries (e.g.,

“Bob”, “Mom”, “Kim”, etc.).

Instead, always use full names (includ-

ing first and last names) for all contacts

(e.g., use “Jacob Stevenson” instead of

“Dad”).

2)Do not use abbreviations (i.e., use

“Lieutenant” instead of “Lt.” or

“Sergeant” instead of “Sgt.”).

3)Do not use acronyms (i.e., use “County

Finance Department” instead of

“CFD”).

4)Do not use special characters (e.g.,

“@”, “hyphen -”, “asterisk *”, “amper-

sand &”).

5)If a name is not recognized from the

contact list, change it to a more

descriptive name (e.g., use “Grandpa

Joseph” instead of “Pa Joe”).

Skipping Prompt Messages

While prompt message is being stated

Shortly press the key on the steer-

ing remote controller.

The prompt message is immediately

ended and the beep tone will sound.

After the “beep”, say the voice command.

Re-starting Voice Recognition

While system waits for a command

Shortly press the key on the steer-

ing remote controller.

The command wait state is immediately

ended and the beep ton will sound. After

the “beep”, say the voice command.

SETUP

Information Provided by:

Features of your vehicle

1424

ENDING VOICE RECOGNITION

While Voice Recognition is operating

Press and hold the key on the steer-

ing remote controller.

✽✽NOTICE

• While using voice command, pressing

any steering wheel control or a differ-

ent key will end voice command.

• When the system is waiting for a voice

command, say “cancel” or “end” to

end voice command.

• When the system is waiting for a voice

command, press and hold the key

on the steering wheel to end voice

command.

Voice Recognition and Phone

Contact Tips:

The Hyundai Voice Recognition System

may have difficulty understanding some

accents or uncommon names.

When using Voice Recognition to place a

call, speak in a moderate tone, with clear

pronunciation. To maximize the use of

Voice Recognition, consider these guide-

lines when storing contacts:

• Do not store single-name entries (e.g.,

“Bob”, “Mom”, etc.). Instead, always use

full names (including first and last names)

for these contacts

• Do not use special characters (e.g.,

'@', '-', '*', '&', etc.)

• Do not use abbreviations (i.e., use

"Lieutenant" instead of "Lt.") or acronyms

(i.e., use "County Finance Department"

instead of "C. F. D."; Be sure to say the

name exactly as it is entered in the con-

tacts list

Information Provided by:

4143

Features of your vehicle

Illustration on using voice commands

• Starting voice command.

Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):

• Skipping Voice Recognition

Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):

• End voice command.

Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):

while guidance message is being stated

More Help

Contacts

Cancel

More Help

Please say a command after

the beep (BEEP)

Please say a...

Contacts.

Please say the name of the contact you want

to call.

(BEEP)

Beep Beep.. (end beep)

Shortly pressing the key

(under 0.8 seconds)

Beep~

More Help

Here are some examples of mode commands.

You can say a radio type like 'FM', 'AM', or 'Satellite'.

You can also say a media source like 'USB', 'My

Music', or 'iPod'.

Additionally, there are phone commands like

"Contacts', 'Call History', or 'Dial Number".

You can find more detailed commands in the user's

manual.

Please say a command after the beep.

More Help

Here are some examples of mode commands.

You can say a radio type like 'FM', 'AM', or 'Satellite'.

You can also say a media source like 'USB', 'My

Music', or 'iPod'.

Additionally, there are phone commands like

"Contacts', 'Call History', or 'Dial Number".

You can find more detailed commands in the user's

manual.

Please say a command after the beep.

Information Provided by:

Features of your vehicle

1444

Voice Command List

• Common Commands: These commands can be used in most operations. (However a few commands may not be available dur-

ing certain operations)

Command Function

More Help Provides guidance on commands that can be

used anywhere in the system.

Help Provides guidance on commands that can be

used within the current mode.

Call<Name> Calls <Name> saved in Contacts

Ex) Call “John Smith”

Phone Provides guidance on Phone related com-

mands. After saying this command, say

“Favorites”,“Call History”, “Contacts” or ”Dial

Number” execute corresponding functions.

Favorites Display the Favorite screen.

Call History Displays the Call History screen.

Contacts Displays the Contacts screen. After saying

this command, say the name of a contact

saved in the Contacts to automatically con-

nect the call.

Dial Number Display the Dial number screen. After saying

this command, you can say the number that

you want to call.

Redial Connects the most recently called number.

Tutorial Provide guidance on how to use voice

recognition and Bluetooth

connections.

Command Function

•

When listening to the radio, displays the

next radio screen. (FM1

➟

FM2

➟

XM1

➟

XM2

➟

XM3

➟

FM1)

Radio

•

When listening to a different mode, displays

the most recently played radio screen.

•

When currently listening to the FM radio,

maintains the current state.

•

When listening to a different mode, displays

the most recently played FM screen.

FM1(FM One) Displays the FM1 screen.

FM2(FM Two) Displays the FM2 screen.

AM Displays the AM screen.

FM Preset 1~6 Plays the most recently played broadcast

saved in FM Preset 1~6.

AM Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in AM Preset 1~6.

FM 87.5~107.9 Plays the FM broadcast of the corresponding

frequency.

AM 530~1710 Plays the AM broadcast of the corresponding

frequency.

SiriusXMTM •

When currently listening to the

SiriusXMTM

maintains the current state.

•

When listening to a different mode, displays

the most recently played

SiriusXMTM

screen.

(Call by Name)

(Satellite)

Information Provided by:

4145

Features of your vehicle

Command Function

SiriusXM

(Satellite)

Displays the selected SiriusXM

screen.

SiriusXM

Channel Plays the selected SiriusXM

channel.

Media Moves to the most recently played media

screen.

USB Plays USB music.

iPod

Plays iPod

music.

Command Function

My Music Plays the music saved in My Music.

AUX (Auxiliary) Plays the connected external device.

Bluetooth

Audio Plays the music saved in connected Bluetooth

device.

Please repeat Repeats the most recent comment.

Mute Mutes the sound.

Cancel (Exit) Ends voice command.

0~223

1~3

Information Provided by:

Features of your vehicle

1464

• FM/AM radio commands: Commands available during FM,

AM radio operation

• Satellite radio commands: Commands that can be used

while listening to Satellite Radio.

Command Function

Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast station saved in Preset 1~6.

Scan Scans receivable frequencies from the current

broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.

Preset Scan Moves to the next preset from the current

present and plays for 10 seconds each.

Information Displays the information of the current broad-

cast.(This feature can be used when receiving

RBDS broadcasts.)

Command Function

Channel 0~255 Play the selected Satellite Radio channel.

Scan Scans receivable channels from the current

broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.

Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in Preset 1~6.

Information Displays the information of the current broad-

cast.

Information Provided by:

4147

Features of your vehicle

• Audio CD commands: Commands available during Audio

CD operation

• MP3 CD / USB commands: Commands available during

USB and MP3 CD operation

Command Function

Random Randomly plays the tracks within the CD.

Random Off Cancels random play to play tracks in sequen-

tial order.

Repeat Repeats the current track.

Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play tracks in sequen-

tial order.

Track 1~30 Plays the desired track number.

Command Function

Random Randomly plays the files within the current

folder.

Random Off Cancels random play to play files in sequential

order.

Repeat Repeats the current file.

Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential

order.

Information Displays the information screen of the current

file.

Next Folder Play the first file in the next folder

Previous Folder Play the first file in the previous folder

Information Provided by:

Features of your vehicle

1484

•iPod

®Commands: Commands available during iPod®oper-

ation

• My Music Commands: Commands available during My

Music operation

Command Function

Random Randomly plays the songs within the current

category.

Random Off Cancels random play to play songs in sequen-

tial order.

Repeat Repeats the current song.

Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play songs in sequen-

tial order.

Command Function

Random Randomly plays all saved files.

Random Off Cancels random play to play files in sequential

order.

Repeat Repeats the current file.

Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential

order.

Delete Deletes the current file. You will bypass an

additional confirmation process.

Information Provided by:

4149

Features of your vehicle

•

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology Audio Commands:

Commands available during

Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology audio streaming from mobile phone operation

Command Operation

Command Function

Play Plays the currently paused song.

Pause Pauses the current song.

Information Provided by:

Before driving / 5-3

Key / 5-5

Manual transaxle /5-7

Automatic transaxle / 5-10

Brake system / 5-16

Cruise control system / 5-27

Active ECO system / 5-31

Economical operation / 5-32

Special driving conditions / 5-34

Winter driving / 5-38

Vehicle load limit / 5-42

Vehicle weight / 5-47

Trailer towing / 5-48

Driving your vehicle

Information Provided by:

Driving your vehicle

WARNING - ENGINE EXHAUST CAN BE DANGEROUS!

Engine exhaust fumes can be extremely dangerous. If, at any time, you smell exhaust fumes inside the vehicle, open the win-

dows immediately.

• Do not inhale exhaust fumes.

Exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless gas that can cause unconsciousness and death by asphyxia-

tion.

• Be sure the exhaust system does not leak.

The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose. If you hear

a change in the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath side of the car, have the

exhaust system checked as soon as possible by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

• Do not run the engine in an enclosed area.

Letting the engine idle in your garage, even with the garage door open, is a hazardous practice. Never run the engine in your

garage any longer than it takes to start the engine and back the car out.

• Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods with people inside the car.

If it is necessary to idle the engine for a prolonged period with people inside the car, be sure to do so only in an open area

with the air intake set at "Fresh" and fan operating at one of the higher speeds so fresh air is drawn into the interior.

If you must drive with the trunk lid open because you are carrying objects that make this necessary:

1. Close all windows.

2. Open side vents.

3. Set the air intake control at "Fresh", the air flow control at "Floor" or "Face" and the fan at one of the higher speeds.

To assure proper operation of the ventilation system, be sure the ventilation air intakes located just in front of the windshield are

kept clear of snow, ice, leaves or other obstructions.

Information Provided by:

Driving your vehicle

Before entering vehicle

• Be sure that all windows, outside mir-

ror(s), and outside lights are clean.

• Check the condition of the tires.

• Check under the vehicle for any sign of

leaks.

• Be sure there are no obstacles behind

you if you intend to back up.

Necessary inspections

Fluid levels, such as engine oil, engine

coolant, brake fluid, and washer fluid

should be checked on a regular basis,

with the exact interval depending on the

fluid. Further details are provided in sec-

tion 7, “Maintenance”.

BEFORE DRIVING

CALIFORNIA PROPOSI-

TION 65 WARNING

Engine exhaust and a wide variety

of automobile components and

parts, including components found

in the interior furnishings in a vehi-

cle, contain or emit chemicals

known to the State of California to

cause cancer and birth defects and

reproductive harm. In addition, cer-

tain fluids contained in vehicles

and certain products of component

wear contain or emit chemicals

known to the State of California to

cause cancer and birth defects or

other reproductive harm.

WARNING

Driving while distracted can result

in a loss of vehicle control, that

may lead to an accident, severe

personal injury, and death. The dri-

ver’s primary responsibility is in

the safe and legal operation of a

vehicle, and use of any handheld

devices, other equipment, or vehi-

cle systems which take the driver’s

eyes, attention and focus away

from the safe operation of a vehicle

or which are not permissible by law

should never be used during oper-

ation of the vehicle.

Information Provided by:

Driving your vehicle

Before starting

• Close and lock all doors.

• Position the seat so that all controls are

easily reached.

• Adjust the inside and outside rearview

mirrors.

• Be sure that all lights work.

• Check all gauges.

• Check the operation of warning lights

when the ignition switch is turned to

the ON position.

• Release the parking brake and make

sure the brake warning light goes out.

For safe operation, be sure you are famil-

iar with your vehicle and its equipment.

WARNING

Always check the surrounding

areas near your vehicle for people,

especially children, before putting a

car into D (Drive) or R (Reverse).

WARNING - Driving under

the influence of alcohol or

drugs

Drinking and driving is dangerous.

Drunk driving is the number one

contributor to the highway death

toll each year. Even a small amount

of alcohol will affect your reflexes,

perceptions and judgment. Driving

while under the influence of drugs

is as dangerous or more dangerous

than driving drunk.

You are much more likely to have a

serious accident if you drink or

take drugs and drive.

If you are drinking or taking drugs,

don’t drive. Do not ride with a driv-

er who has been drinking or taking

drugs. Choose a designated driver

or call a cab.

WARNING

• When you intend to park or stop

the vehicle with the engine on, be

careful not to depress the accel-

erator pedal for a long period of

time. It may overheat the engine

or exhaust system and cause fire.

• When you make a sudden stop or

turn the steering wheel rapidly,

loose objects may drop on the

floor and it could interfere with

the operation of the foot pedals,

possibly causing an accident.

Keep all things in the vehicle

safely stored.

• If you do not focus on driving, it

may cause an accident. Be care-

ful when operating items that

may distract from such as audio

or heater controls. It is the

responsibility of the driver to

always drive safely with full atten-

tion to the task of driving.

WARNING

All passengers must be properly

belted whenever the vehicle is mov-

ing. Refer to “Seat belts” in section

3 for more information on their

proper use.

Information Provided by:

Driving your vehicle

Ignition switch position

LOCK

The steering wheel locks to protect

against theft (if equipped). The ignition

key can be removed only in the LOCK

position.

When turning the ignition switch to the

LOCK position, push the key inward at

the ACC position and turn the key toward

the LOCK position.

ACC (Accessory)

The steering wheel is unlocked (if

equipped) and electrical accessories are

operative.

✽✽NOTICE

If difficulty is experienced in turning the

ignition switch to the ACC position, turn

the key while turning the steering wheel

right and left to release the tension.

The warning lights can be checked

before the engine is started. This is the

normal running position after the engine

is started.

To prevent discharge of the battery, do

not leave ignition switch on for long time

while engine is not running.

START

Turn the ignition switch to the START posi-

tion to start the engine. The engine will

crank until you release the key; then it

returns to the ON position. The brake warn-

ing lamp can be checked in this position.

KEY

ORBC050001

WARNING - Ignition

switch

• Never turn the ignition switch to

LOCK or ACC while the vehicle is

moving. This would result in loss

of directional control and braking

function, which could cause an

accident.

• Before leaving the driver’s seat,

always make sure the shift lever is

engaged in 1st gear for the manu-

al transaxle or P (Park) for auto-

matic transaxle, set the parking

brake fully and shut the engine off.

Unexpected and sudden vehicle

movement may occur if these pre-

cautions are not taken.

• Never reach for the ignition

switch, or any other controls

through the steering wheel while

the vehicle is in motion.The pres-

ence of your hand or arm in this

area could cause a loss of vehicle

control, an accident and serious

bodily injury or death.

• Do not place any movable objects

around the driver’s seat as they

may move while driving, interfere

with the driver and lead to an

accident.

Information Provided by:

Driving your vehicle

CAUTION

If the engine stalls while the vehicle

is in motion, do not attempt to move

the shift lever to the P (Park) posi-

tion. If traffic and road conditions

permit, you may put the shift lever

in the N (Neutral) position while the

vehicle is still moving and turn the

ignition switch to the START posi-

tion in an attempt to restart the

engine.

CAUTION

Do not engage the starter for more

than 10 seconds. If the engine stalls

or fails to start, wait 5 to 10 seconds

before re-engaging the starter.

Improper use of the starter may

damage it.

Starting the engine

1. Make sure the parking brake is

applied.

2. Manual Transaxle - Depress the

clutch pedal fully and shift the

transaxle into Neutral. Keep the clutch

pedal and brake pedal depressed

while turning the ignition switch to the

start position. The starter will not oper-

ate if the clutch pedal is not fully

depressed.

Automatic Transaxle - Place the

transaxle shift lever in P (Park).

Depress the brake pedal fully.

You can also start the engine when

the shift lever is in the N (Neutral)

position.

3. Turn the ignition switch to START and

hold it there until the engine starts (a

maximum of 10 seconds), then

release the key.

4. In extremely cold weather (below

0°F / -18°C) or after the vehicle has

not been operated for several days, let

the engine warm up without depress-

ing the accelerator.

Whether the engine is cold or warm, it

should be started without depressing

the accelerator.

WARNING

Always wear appropriate shoes

when operating your vehicle.

Unsuitable shoes (high heels, slip-

pers, ski boots, etc.) may interfere

with your ability to use the brake,

accelerator pedal, and clutch (if

equipped).

Information Provided by:

Driving your vehicle

Manual transaxle operation

The manual transaxle has 6 forward

gears.

This shift pattern is imprinted on the shift

knob. The transaxle is fully synchronized

in all forward gears so shifting to either a

higher or a lower gear is easily accom-

plished.

To shift gears, press the clutch pedal

down fully, select the desired gear with

the gearshift lever, and release the clutch

pedal slowly.

If your vehicle is equipped with an igni-

tion lock switch, the engine will not start

when starting the engine without

depressing the clutch pedal.

The shift lever must be returned to the

neutral position before shifting into R

(Reverse). The button (1) located at the

bottom front of the shift knob must be

pressed and held in while moving the

shift lever to the R (Reverse) position.

Make sure the vehicle is completely

stopped before shifting into R (Reverse).

Never operate the engine with the

tachometer (rpm) in the red zone.

MANUAL TRANSAXLE (IF EQUIPPED)

ORB051001N

The shift lever can be moved into any of

the forward gears without pressing the

button (1).

You should press the button (1) when

moving the shift lever into reverse.

CAUTION

• When downshifting from fifth

gear to fourth gear, caution

should be taken not to inadver-

tently press the shift lever side-

ways in such a manner that the

second gear is engaged. Such a

drastic downshift may cause the

engine speed to increase to the

point that the tachometer will

enter the red-zone. Such over-

revving of the engine and

transaxle may possibly cause

engine damage.

• Do not downshift more than 2

gears or downshift the gear when

the engine is running at high

speed (5,000 RPM or higher). Such

a downshifting may damage the

engine, clutch and the transaxle.

Information Provided by:

Driving your vehicle

• During cold weather, shifting may be

difficult until the transaxle lubricant is

warmed up. This is normal and not

harmful to the transaxle.

• If you've come to a complete stop and

it's hard to shift into 1st or R (Reverse),

leave the shift lever in the neutral posi-

tion and release the clutch. Depress the

clutch pedal back down, and then shift

into 1st or R (Reverse) gear position.

Using the clutch

The clutch should be depressed all the

way to the floor before shifting, then

released slowly. The clutch pedal should

always be fully released while driving. Do

not rest your foot on the clutch pedal

while driving. This can cause unneces-

sary wear. Do not partially engage the

clutch to hold the vehicle on an incline.

This causes unnecessary wear. Use the

foot brake or parking brake to hold the

vehicle on an incline. Do not operate the

clutch pedal rapidly and repeatedly.

Downshifting

It is important to downshift when you

must slow down in heavy traffic or while

driving up or down steep hills.

Downshifting reduces the chance of

stalling and gives better acceleration.

When the vehicle is traveling down steep

hills, downshifting helps maintain safe

speed and prolongs brake life.

WARNING

Before leaving the driver’s seat,

always set the parking brake fully

and shut the engine off. Then make

sure the transaxle is shifted into 1st

gear when the vehicle is parked on

a level or uphill grade, and shifted

into R (Reverse) on a downhill

grade. Unexpected and sudden

vehicle movement can occur if

these precautions are not followed

in the order identified.

CAUTION

• To avoid premature clutch wear

and damage, do not drive with

your foot resting on the clutch

pedal. Also, do not use the clutch

to hold the vehicle stopped on an

uphill grade, while waiting for a

traffic light, etc.

• Do not use the shift lever as a

handrest during driving, as this

can result in premature wear of

the transaxle shift forks.

• When operating the clutch pedal,

press the clutch pedal down fully.

If you don't press the clutch pedal

fully, the clutch may be damaged

or noise may occur.

Information Provided by:

Driving your vehicle

Good driving practices

• Never take the vehicle out of gear and

coast down a hill. This is extremely haz-

ardous. Always leave the vehicle in gear.

• Do not "ride" the brakes. This can

cause them to overheat and malfunc-

tion. Instead, when you are driving

down a long hill, shift to a lower gear.

When you do this, engine braking will

help slow down the vehicle.

• Slow down before shifting to a lower

gear. This will help avoid over-revving

the engine, which can cause damage.

• Slow down when you encounter cross

winds. This gives you much better con-

trol of your vehicle.

• Be sure the vehicle is completely

stopped before you attempt to shift into

R (Reverse).The transaxle can be dam-

aged if you do not.

• Exercise extreme caution when driving

on a slippery surface. Be especially

careful when braking, accelerating or

shifting gears. On a slippery surface,

an abrupt change in vehicle speed can

cause the drive wheels to lose traction

and the vehicle to go out of control.

WARNING

• Always buckle-up! In a collision,

an unbelted occupant is signifi-

cantly more likely to be seriously

injured or killed than a properly

belted occupant.

• Avoid high speeds when corner-

ing or turning.

• Do not make quick steering

wheel movements, such as sharp

lane changes or fast, sharp turns.

• The risk of rollover is greatly

increased if you lose control of

your vehicle at highway speeds.

• Loss of control often occurs if

two or more wheels drop off the

roadway and the driver over-

steers to reenter the roadway.

• In the event your vehicle leaves

the roadway, do not steer sharply.

Instead, slow down before pulling

back into the travel lanes.

• Never exceed posted speed limits.

Information Provided by:

Driving your vehicle

105

Automatic transaxle operation

The automatic transaxle has 6 forward

speeds and one reverse speed. The indi-

vidual speeds are selected automatically,

depending on the position of the shift

lever.

To move the shift lever from the P (Park)

position, the brake pedal must be

depressed and the lock release button

must be pressed.

✽✽NOTICE

The first few shifts on a new vehicle,

may be somewhat abrupt. This is a nor-

mal condition, and the shifting sequence

will adjust after shifts are cycled a few

times by the TCM (Transaxle Control

Module) or PCM (Powertrain Control

Module).

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE

ORB050004

+ (UP)

- (DOWN)

The shift lever can be moved freely

Depress the brake pedal when shifting

Information Provided by:

511

Driving your vehicle

For smooth operation, depress the brake

pedal when shifting from N (Neutral) to a

forward or reverse gear.

Transaxle ranges

The indicator in the instrument cluster

displays the shift lever position when the

ignition switch is in the ON position.

P (Park)

Always come to a complete stop before

shifting into P (Park). This position locks

the transaxle and prevents the drive

wheels from rotating.

WARNING - Automatic

transaxle

• Always check the surrounding

areas near your vehicle for peo-

ple, especially children, before

shifting a car into D (Drive) or R

(Reverse).

• Before leaving the driver’s seat,

always make sure the shift lever

is in the P (Park) position; then

set the parking brake fully and

shut the engine off. Unexpected

and sudden vehicle movement

can occur if these precautions

are not followed in the order iden-

tified.

CAUTION

• To avoid damage to your

transaxle, do not accelerate the

engine in R (Reverse) or any for-

ward gear position with the

brakes on.

• When stopped on an incline, do

not hold the vehicle stationary

with engine power. Use the serv-

ice brake or the parking brake.

• Do not shift from N (Neutral) or P

(Park) into D (Drive), or R

(Reverse) when the engine is

above idle speed.

WARNING

• Shifting into P (Park) while the

vehicle is in motion will cause the

drive wheels to lock which will

cause you to lose control of the

vehicle.

• Do not use the P (Park) position

in place of the parking brake.

Always make sure the shift lever

is latched in the P (Park) position

and set the parking brake fully.

• Never leave a child unattended in

a vehicle.

Information Provided by:

Driving your vehicle

125

R (Reverse)

Use this position to drive the vehicle

backward.

N (Neutral)

The wheels and transaxle are not

engaged. The vehicle will roll freely even

on the slightest incline unless the parking

brake or service brakes are applied.

D (Drive)

This is the normal forward driving posi-

tion. The transaxle will automatically shift

through a 6-gear sequence, providing the

best fuel economy and power.

For extra power when passing another

vehicle or climbing grades, depress the

accelerator fully, at which time the

transaxle will automatically downshift to

the lower gear.

✽✽NOTICE

Always come to a complete stop before

shifting into D (Drive).

Sports mode

Whether the vehicle is stationary or in

motion, sports mode is selected by push-

ing the shift lever from the D (Drive) posi-

tion into the manual gate. To return to D

(Drive) range operation, push the shift

lever back into the main gate.

In sports mode, moving the shift lever

backwards and forwards will allow you to

make gearshifts.

Up (+) : Push the lever forward once to

shift up one gear.

Down (-) : Pull the lever backwards once

to shift down one gear.

CAUTION

Always come to a complete stop

before shifting into or out of R

(Reverse); except as explained in

“Rocking the vehicle” in this sec-

tion.

ORB050008

+ (UP)

- (DOWN)

Sports mode

CAUTION

The transaxle may be damaged if

you shift into P (Park) while the

vehicle is in motion.

Information Provided by:

513

Driving your vehicle

✽✽NOTICE

• In sports mode, the driver must exe-

cute upshifts in accordance with road

conditions, taking care to keep the

engine speed below the red zone.

• In sports mode, only the 6 forward

gears can be selected. To reverse or

park the vehicle, move the shift lever

to the R (Reverse) or P (Park) position

as required.

• In sports mode, downshifts are made

automatically when the vehicle slows

down. When the vehicle stops, 1st gear

is automatically selected.

• In sports mode, when the engine rpm

approaches the red zone, the transaxle

will upshift automatically.

• To maintain the required levels of

vehicle performance and safety, the

system may not execute certain

gearshifts when the shift lever is oper-

ated.

• When driving on a slippery road,

move the shift lever to the sports mode

and push the shift lever forward into

the + (up) position. This causes the

transaxle to shift into the next upper

gear which is better for smooth driv-

ing on a slippery road. Push the shift

lever to the -(down) side to shift back

to the next lower gear.

Shift lock system

For your safety, the automatic transaxle

has a shift lock system which prevents

shifting the transaxle from P (Park) or N

(Neutral) into R (Reverse) unless the

brake pedal is depressed.

To shift the transaxle from P (Park) or N

(Neutral) into R (Reverse):

1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON posi-

tion. (if equipped)

3. Move the shift lever.

Shift-lock override (if equipped)

If the shift lever cannot be moved from

the P (Park) or N (Neutral) position into R

(Reverse) position with the brake pedal

depressed, continue depressing the

brake, then do the following:

1. Carefully remove the cap covering the

shift-lock override access hole.

2. Insert a screwdriver into the access

hole and press down on the screwdriv-

er.

3. Move the shift lever.

4. Have your vehicle inspected by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer immedi-

ately.

WARNING

Always fully depress the brake

pedal before and while shifting out

of the P (Park) position into anoth-

er position to avoid inadvertent

motion of the vehicle which could

injure persons in or around the car.

ORB054041N

Information Provided by:

Driving your vehicle

145

Ignition key interlock system

The ignition key cannot be removed

unless the shift lever is in the P (Park)

position. Even if the ignition switch is in

the LOCK position, the key also cannot

be removed.

Good driving practices

• Never move the gear shift lever from P

(Park) or N (Neutral) to any other posi-

tion with the accelerator pedal

depressed.

• Never move the gear shift lever into P

(Park) when the vehicle is in motion.

• Be sure the car is completely stopped

before you attempt to shift into R

(Reverse) or D (Drive).

• Never take the car out of gear and

coast down a hill. This may be

extremely hazardous. Always leave the

car in gear when moving.

• Do not "ride" the brakes. This can

cause them to overheat and malfunc-

tion. Instead, when you are driving

down a long hill, slow down, shift into

Sport mode and shift to a lower gear.

When you do this, engine braking will

help slow the car.

• Slow down before shifting to a lower

gear. Otherwise, the lower gear may

not be engaged.

• Always use the parking brake. Do not

depend on placing the transaxle in P

(Park) to keep the car from moving.

• Exercise extreme caution when driving

on a slippery surface. Be especially

careful when braking, accelerating or

shifting gears. On a slippery surface,

an abrupt change in vehicle speed can

cause the drive wheels to lose traction

and the vehicle to go out of control.

• Optimum vehicle performance and

economy is obtained by smoothly

depressing and releasing the accelera-

tor pedal.

Information Provided by:

515

Driving your vehicle

Moving up a steep grade from a stand-

ing start

To move up a steep grade from a stand-

ing start, depress the brake pedal, shift

the shift lever to D (Drive). Depress the

accelerator gradually while releasing the

service brakes.

WARNING

• Always buckle-up! In a collision,

an unbelted occupant is signifi-

cantly more likely to be seriously

injured or killed than a properly

belted occupant.

• Avoid high speeds when corner-

ing or turning.

• Do not make quick steering

wheel movements, such as sharp

lane changes or fast, sharp turns.

• The risk of rollover is greatly

increased if you lose control of

your vehicle at highway speeds.

• Loss of control often occurs if

two or more wheels drop off the

roadway and the driver over-

steers to reenter the roadway.

• In the event your vehicle leaves

the roadway, do not steer sharply.

Instead, slow down before pulling

back into the travel lanes.

• Never exceed posted speed lim-

its.

WARNING

If your vehicle becomes stuck in

snow, mud, sand, etc., then you

may attempt to rock the vehicle free

by moving it forward and backward.

Do not attempt this procedure if

people or objects are anywhere

near the vehicle. During the rocking

operation the vehicle may suddenly

move forward or backward as it

becomes unstuck, causing injury

or damage to nearby people or

objects.

Do not rev up the engine. This may

cause engine over-heating,

transaxle damage or failure, and

tire damage.

Information Provided by:

Driving your vehicle

165

Power brakes

Your vehicle has power-assisted brakes

that adjust automatically through normal

usage.

In the event that the power-assisted

brakes lose power because of a stalled

engine or some other reason, you can

still stop your vehicle by applying greater

force to the brake pedal than you nor-

mally would. The stopping distance, how-

ever, will be longer.

When the engine is not running, the

reserve brake power is partially depleted

each time the brake pedal is applied. Do

not pump the brake pedal when the

power assist has been interrupted.

Pump the brake pedal only when neces-

sary to maintain steering control on slip-

pery surfaces.

In the event of brake failure

If service brakes fail to operate while the

vehicle is in motion, you can make an

emergency stop with the parking brake.

The stopping distance, however, will be

much greater than normal.

BRAKE SYSTEM

WARNING - Brakes

• Do not drive with your foot rest-

ing on the brake pedal. This will

create abnormal high brake tem-

peratures, excessive brake lining

and pad wear, and increased

stopping distances.

(Continued)

• When descending a long or steep

hill, shift to a lower gear and avoid

continuous application of the

brakes. Continuous brake applica-

tion will cause the brakes to over-

heat and could result in a tempo-

rary loss of braking performance.

• Wet brakes may impair the vehi-

cle’s ability to safely slow down;

the vehicle may also pull to one

side when the brakes are applied.

Applying the brakes lightly will

indicate whether they have been

affected in this way. Always test

your brakes in this fashion after

driving through deep water. To

dry the brakes, apply them lightly

while maintaining a safe forward

speed until brake performance

returns to normal.

• Always, confirm the position of

the brake and accelerator pedal

before driving. If you do not

check the position of the acceler-

ator and brake pedal before driv-

ing, you may depress the acceler-

ator instead of the brake pedal. It

may cause a serious accident.

WARNING - Parking brake

Applying the parking brake while

the vehicle is moving at normal

speeds can cause a sudden loss of

control of the vehicle. If you must

use the parking brake to stop the

vehicle, use great caution in apply-

ing the brake.

Information Provided by:

517

Driving your vehicle

Disc brakes wear indicator

(if equipped)

Your vehicle has disc brakes.

When your brake pads are worn and new

pads are required, you will hear a high-

pitched warning sound from your front

brakes or rear brakes. You may hear this

sound come and go or it may occur

whenever you depress the brake pedal.

Please remember that some driving con-

ditions or climates may cause a brake

squeal when you first apply (or lightly

apply) the brakes.This is normal and does

not indicate a problem with your brakes.

Rear drum brakes (if equipped)

Your rear drum brakes do not have wear

indicators.Therefore, have the rear brake

linings inspected if you hear a rear brake

rubbing noise. Also have your rear

brakes inspected each time you change

or rotate your tires and when you have

the front brakes replaced.

Parking brake

Applying the parking brake

To engage the parking brake, first apply

the foot brake and then pull up the park-

ing brake lever as far as possible without

pressing the release button.

In addition it is recommended that when

parking the vehicle on an incline, the shift

lever should be in the appropriate low

gear on manual transaxle vehicles or in

the P (Park) position on automatic

transaxle vehicles.

WARNING - Brake wear

This brake wear warning sound

means your vehicle needs service.

If you ignore this audible warning,

you will eventually lose braking

performance, which could lead to a

serious accident.

CAUTION

• To avoid costly brake repairs, do

not continue to drive with worn

brake pads.

• Always replace the front or rear

brake pads as pairs.

ORB050003

Information Provided by:

Driving your vehicle

185

Releasing the parking brake

To release the parking brake, first apply

the foot brake and pull up the parking

brake lever slightly. Secondly press the

release button (1) and lower the parking

brake lever (2) while holding the button.

If the parking brake does not release or

does not release all the way, have the

system checked by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

ORB050002

CAUTION

• Driving with the parking brake

applied will cause excessive

brake pad and brake rotor wear.

• Do not operate the parking brake

while the vehicle is moving except

in an emergency situation. It could

damage the vehicle system and

make hazardous driving or lead to

an accident.

WARNING

• To prevent unintentional move-

ment when stopped and leaving

the vehicle, do not use the

gearshift lever in place of the

parking brake. Set the parking

brake AND make sure the

gearshift lever is securely posi-

tioned in 1st (First) gear or R

(Reverse) for manual transaxle

equipped vehicles and in P (Park)

for automatic transaxle equipped

vehicles.

• Never allow anyone who is unfa-

miliar with the vehicle to touch

the parking brake. If the parking

brake is released unintentionally,

serious injury may occur.

• All vehicles should always have

the parking brake fully engaged

when parking to avoid inadver-

tent movement of the vehicle

which can injure occupants or

pedestrians.

Information Provided by:

519

Driving your vehicle

Check the brake warning light by turning

the ignition switch ON (do not start the

engine). This light will be illuminated when

the parking brake is applied with the igni-

tion switch in the START or ON position.

Before driving, be sure the parking brake

is fully released and the brake warning

light is off.

If the brake warning light remains on after

the parking brake is released while the

engine is running, there may be a mal-

function in the brake system. Immediate

attention is necessary.

If at all possible, cease driving the vehi-

cle immediately. If that is not possible,

use extreme caution while operating the

vehicle and only continue to drive the

vehicle until you can reach a safe loca-

tion or repair shop.

Anti-lock brake system (ABS) The ABS continuously senses the speed

of the wheels. If the wheels are going to

lock, the ABS system repeatedly modu-

lates the hydraulic brake pressure to the

wheels.

When you apply your brakes under con-

ditions which may lock the wheels, you

may hear a “tik-tik’’ sound from the

brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation

in the brake pedal. This is normal and it

means your ABS is active.

In order to obtain the maximum benefit

from your ABS in an emergency situa-

tion, do not attempt to modulate your

brake pressure and do not try to pump

your brakes. Press your brake pedal as

hard as possible or as hard as the situa-

tion warrants and allow the ABS to con-

trol the force being delivered to the

brakes.

WARNING

ABS (or ESC) will not prevent acci-

dents due to improper or dangerous

driving maneuvers. Even though

vehicle control is improved during

emergency braking, always maintain

a safe distance between you and

objects ahead. Vehicle speeds

should be reduced if the road condi-

tion calls for it, not just in "extreme"

road conditions.

The braking distance for cars

equipped with an anti-lock braking

system (or Electronic Stability

Control system) may be longer than

for those without it in the following

road conditions.

During these conditions the vehicle

should be driven at reduced speeds:

• Rough, gravel or snow-covered

roads.

• With tire chains installed.

• On roads where the road surface

is pitted or has different surface

height.

The safety features of an ABS (or

ESC) equipped vehicle should not

be tested by high speed driving or

cornering. This could endanger the

safety of yourself or others.

W-75

Information Provided by:

Driving your vehicle

205

✽✽NOTICE

A click sound may be heard in the

engine compartment when the vehicle

begins to move after the engine is start-

ed. These conditions are normal and

indicate that the anti-lock brake system

is functioning properly.

• Even with the anti-lock brake system,

your vehicle still requires sufficient

stopping distance. Always maintain a

safe distance from the vehicle in front

of you.

• Always slow down when cornering.

The anti-lock brake system cannot pre-

vent accidents resulting from exces-

sive speeds.

• On loose or uneven road surfaces,

operation of the anti-lock brake system

may result in a longer stopping dis-

tance than for vehicles equipped with a

conventional brake system.

✽✽NOTICE

When you jump start your vehicle

because of a drained battery, the engine

may not run as smoothly and the ABS

warning light may turn on at the same

time. This happens because of the low

battery voltage. It does not mean your

ABS is malfunctioning.

• Do not pump your brakes!

• Have the battery recharged before

driving the vehicle.

W-78

CAUTION

• If the ABS warning light is on and

stays on, you may have a problem

with the ABS. In this case, howev-

er, your regular brakes will work

normally.

• The ABS warning light will stay on

for approximately 3 seconds after

the ignition switch is ON. During

that time, the ABS will go through

self-diagnosis and the light will go

off if everything is normal. If the

light stays on, you may have a

problem with your ABS. Contact

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as

soon as possible.

CAUTION

• When you drive on a road having

poor traction, such as an icy road,

and operate your brakes continu-

ously, the ABS will be active con-

tinuously and the ABS warning

light may illuminate. Pull your car

over to a safe place and stop the

engine.

• Restart the engine. If the ABS

warning light is off, then your

ABS system is normal.

Otherwise, you may have a prob-

lem with the ABS. Contact an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer as

soon as possible.

Information Provided by:

521

Driving your vehicle

Electronic stability control (ESC)

The Electronic Stability control (ESC)

system is designed to stabilize the vehicle

during cornering maneuvers. ESC checks

where you are steering and where the

vehicle is actually going. ESC applies the

brakes at individual wheels and

intervenes in the engine management

system to stabilize the vehicle.

The Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

system is an electronic system designed

to help the driver maintain vehicle control

under adverse conditions. It is not a

substitute for safe driving practices.

Factors including speed, road conditions

and driver steering input can all affect

whether ESC will be effective in

preventing a loss of control. It is still your

responsibility to drive and corner at

reasonable speeds and to leave a

sufficient margin of safety.

When you apply your brakes under con-

ditions which may lock the wheels, you

may hear a “tik-tik’’ sound from the

brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation

in the brake pedal. This is normal and it

means your ESC is active.

✽✽NOTICE

A click sound may be heard in the

engine compartment when the vehicle

begins to move after the engine is start-

ed. These conditions are normal and

indicate that the Electronic Stability

Control System is functioning properly.

WARNING

Never drive too fast for the road

conditions or too quickly when cor-

nering. Electronic stability control

(ESC) will not prevent accidents.

Excessive speed in turns, abrupt

maneuvers and hydroplaning on

wet surfaces can still result in seri-

ous accidents. Only a safe and

attentive driver can prevent acci-

dents by avoiding maneuvers that

cause the vehicle to lose traction.

Even with ESC installed, always fol-

low all the normal precautions for

driving - including driving at safe

speeds for the conditions.

ORB050009

Information Provided by:

Driving your vehicle

225

ESC operation

ESC ON condition

• When the ignition is turned ON, ESC

and ESC OFF indicator lights illumi-

nate for approximately 3 seconds, then

ESC is turned on.

• Press the ESC OFF button for at least

half a second after turning the ignition

ON to turn ESC off. (ESC OFF indica-

tor will illuminate). To turn the ESC on,

press the ESC OFF button (ESC OFF

indicator light will go off).

• When starting the engine, you may

hear a slight ticking sound. This is the

ESC performing an automatic system

self-check and does not indicate a

problem.

When operating

When the ESC is in operation,

ESC indicator light blinks.

• When the Electronic Stability

Control is operating properly,

you can feel a slight pulsation

in the vehicle. This is only the

effect of brake control and indi-

cates nothing unusual.

• When moving out of the mud

or driving on a slippery road,

pressing the accelerator

pedal may not cause the

engine rpm (revolutions per

minute) to increase.

ESC operation off

ESC OFF state

• To cancel ESC operation,

press the ESC OFF button

(ESC OFF indicator light illu-

minates).

• If the ignition switch is turned

to LOCK position when ESC

is off, ESC remains off. Upon

restarting the engine, the

ESC will automatically turn

on again.

Indicator light

When ignition switch is turned to ON, the

indicator light illuminates, then goes off if

the ESC system is operating normally.

The ESC indicator light blinks whenever

ESC is operating or illuminates when

ESC fails to operate.

The ESC OFF indicator light comes on

when the ESC is turned off with the button.

■ESC indicator light

■ ESC OFF indicator light

Information Provided by:

523

Driving your vehicle

ESC OFF usage

When driving

• ESC should remain on for daily driving

whenever possible.

• To turn ESC off while driving, press the

ESC OFF button while driving on a flat

road surface.

✽✽NOTICE

• When operating the vehicle on a

dynamometer, ensure that the ESC is

turned off (ESC OFF light illuminated).

• Turning the ESC off does not affect

ABS or brake system operation.

Good braking practices

CAUTION

Driving with varying tire or wheel

sizes may cause the ESC system to

malfunction. When replacing tires,

make sure they are the same size as

your original tires.

WARNING

The Electronic Stability Control sys-

tem is only a driving aid; use pre-

cautions for safe driving by slowing

down on curved, snowy, or icy

roads. Drive slowly and do not

attempt to accelerate whenever the

ESC indicator light is blinking, or

when the road surface is slippery.

WARNING

Never press the ESC OFF button

while ESC is operating (ESC indica-

tor light blinks).

If ESC is turned off while ESC is

operating, the vehicle may slip out

of control and cause an accident.

WARNING

• Whenever you leave or park your

vehicle, always set the parking

brake as far as possible and fully

engage the vehicle's transaxle

into the P (Park) position. If the

parking brake is not fully

engaged, the vehicle may move

inadvertently and injure yourself

and others.

• All vehicles should always have

the parking brake fully engaged

when parking to avoid inadver-

tent movement of the vehicle

which can injure occupants or

pedestrians.

Information Provided by:

Driving your vehicle

245

• After parking the vehicle, check to be

sure the parking brake is not engaged

and that the parking brake indicator

light is out before driving away.

• Driving through water may get the

brakes wet. They can also get wet when

the car is washed. Wet brakes can be

dangerous! Your car will not stop as

quickly if the brakes are wet. Wet brakes

may cause the car to pull to one side.

To dry the brakes, apply the brakes light-

ly until the braking action returns to nor-

mal, taking care to keep the car under

control at all times. If the braking action

does not return to normal, stop as soon

as it is safe to do so and call an author-

ized HYUNDAI dealer for assistance.

• Do not coast down hills with the car out

of gear. This is extremely hazardous.

Keep the car in gear at all times, use

the brakes to slow down, then shift to a

lower gear so that engine braking will

help you maintain a safe speed.

• Do not "ride" the brake pedal. Resting

your foot on the brake pedal while driv-

ing can be dangerous because it can

result in the brakes overheating and los-

ing their effectiveness. It also increases

the wear of the brake components.

• If a tire goes flat while you are driving,

apply the brakes gently and keep the

car pointed straight ahead while you

slow down. When you are moving slow-

ly enough for it to be safe to do so, pull

off the road and stop in a safe place.

• If your vehicle is equipped with an auto-

matic transaxle, do not let your vehicle

creep forward. To avoid creeping for-

ward, keep your foot firmly on the brake

pedal when the vehicle is stopped.

• Use caution when parking on a hill.

Firmly engage the parking brake and

place the shift lever in P (automatic

transaxle) or in first or reverse gear

(manual transaxle). If your vehicle is

facing downhill, turn the front wheels

into the curb to help keep the vehicle

from rolling. If your vehicle is facing

uphill, turn the front wheels away from

the curb to help keep the vehicle from

rolling. If there is no curb or if it is

required by other conditions to keep

the vehicle from rolling, block the

wheels.

• Under some conditions your parking

brake can freeze in the engaged posi-

tion. This is most likely to happen when

there is an accumulation of snow or ice

around or near the rear brakes or if the

brakes are wet. If there is a risk that the

parking brake may freeze, apply it only

temporarily while you put the gear

selector lever in P (automatic

transaxle) or in first or reverse gear

(manual transaxle) and block the rear

wheels so the vehicle cannot roll. Then

release the parking brake.

• Do not hold the vehicle on the incline

with the accelerator pedal pressed.

This can cause the transaxle to over-

heat. Always use the brake pedal or

parking brake.

Information Provided by:

525

Driving your vehicle

Vehicle stability management

(VSM) (if equipped)

This system provides further enhance-

ments to vehicle stability and steering

responses when the vehicle is driving on a

slippery road or the vehicle detects a

change in coefficient of friction between

the left and right wheels.

VSM operation

When the VSM is in operation, ESC indi-

cator light ( ) blinks.

When the vehicle stability management

is operating properly, you can feel a slight

pulsation in the vehicle and/or abnormal

steering responses (EPS). This is only

the effect of brake and EPS control and

is a normal operating condition.

The VSM does not operate when:

• Driving on a gradient or incline

• Driving in reverse

• ESC OFF indicator light ( ) remains

on the instrument cluster

• EPS indicator light remains on the

instrument cluster

VSM operation off

If you press the ESC OFF button to turn off

the ESC, the VSM will also cancel and the

ESC OFF indicator light ( ) illuminates.

To turn on the VSM, press the button again.

The ESC OFF indicator light goes out.

Malfunction indicator

The VSM can be deactivated even if you

don’t cancel the VSM operation by press-

ing the ESC OFF button. It indicates that

a malfunction has been detected some-

where in the Electric Power Steering sys-

tem or VSM system. If the ESC indicator

light ( ) or EPS warning light ( )

remains on, take your vehicle to an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer and have

the system checked.

WARNING

• The Vehicle Stability Management

system is not a substitute for

safe driving practices but a sup-

plementary function only. It is the

responsibility of the driver to

always check the speed and the

distance to the vehicle ahead.

Always hold the steering wheel

firmly while driving.

• Your vehicle is designed to acti-

vate according to the driver’s

intention, even with installed

VSM. Always follow all the normal

precautions for driving at safe

speeds for the conditions –

including driving inclement

weather and on a slippery road.

• Driving with varying tire or wheel

sizes may cause the VSM system

to malfunction. When replacing

tires, make sure they are the

same size as your original tires.

Information Provided by:

Driving your vehicle

265

Hill-start assist control (HAC)

(if equipped)

Hill start Assist Control is a convenience

function. The main intent is to help pre-

vent the vehicle from rolling backwards

while taking off uphill from a stop. HAC

holds the braking pressure built up by the

driver during stopping for 2 seconds after

releasing the brake pedal.

During the pressure-hold period, the

driver has enough time to press the

accelerator pedal to drive off.

The braking pressure is reduced as soon

as the system detects the driver's inten-

tion to drive off.

✽✽NOTICE

• The HAC does not operate when the

transaxle shift lever is in the P (Park)

or N (Neutral) position.

• The HAC activates even though the

ESP is off but it does not activate

when the ESP has malfunctioned.

WARNING

The HAC is usually activated only

for 2 seconds: If the built-up brake

hold pressure is insufficient to hold

the vehicle, the driver must quickly

activate the brake pedal to prevent

the vehicle from rolling backward.

Unexpectedly rolling backward

could cause an accident, and seri-

ous injury.

Information Provided by:

527

Driving your vehicle

➀CRUISE indicator

➁SET indicator

The cruise control system allows you to

program the vehicle to maintain a con-

stant speed without resting your foot on

the accelerator pedal.

This system is designed to function

above approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).

✽✽NOTICE

• During normal cruise control opera-

tion, when the SET switch is activated

or reactivated after applying the

brakes, the cruise control will ener-

gize after approximately 3 seconds.

This delay is normal.

• To activate cruise control, depress the

brake pedal at least once after turning

the ignition switch to the ON position

or starting the engine. This is to check

if the brake switch which is important

part to cancel cruise control is in nor-

mal condition.

CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNING

• If the cruise control is left on,

(CRUISE indicator light in the

instrument cluster illuminated)

the cruise control can be activat-

ed unintentionally. Keep the

cruise control system off

(CRUISE indicator light OFF)

when the cruise control is not in

use, to avoid inadvertently set-

ting a speed.

• Use the cruise control system

only when traveling on open

highways in good weather.

• Do not use the cruise control

when it may not be safe to keep

the car at a constant speed, for

instance, driving in heavy or

varying traffic, or on slippery

(rainy, icy or snow-covered) or

winding roads or over 6% up-hill

or down-hill roads.

• Pay particular attention to the

driving conditions whenever

using the cruise control system.

• Be careful when driving downhill

using the cruise control system,

which may increase the vehicle

speed.

ORB050018

CAUTION

During cruise control operation of a

manual transaxle vehicle, do not

shift into neutral without depress-

ing the clutch pedal, since the

engine will be overrevved. If this

happens, depress the clutch pedal

or release the cruise control ON-

OFF switch.

Information Provided by:

Driving your vehicle

285

To set cruise control speed:

1. Push the cruise ON-OFF button on the

steering wheel to turn the system on.

The CRUISE indicator light in the

instrument cluster will illuminate.

2. Accelerate to the desired speed, which

must be more than 25 mph (40 km/h).

3. Move the lever down (to SET-), and

release it at the desired speed. The

SET indicator light in the instrument

cluster will illuminate. Release the accel-

erator at the same time. The desired

speed will automatically be maintained.

On a steep grade, the vehicle may slow

down or speed up slightly while going

uphill or downhill.

To increase cruise control set

speed:

Follow either of these procedures:

• Move the lever up (to RES+) and hold

it. Your vehicle will accelerate. Release

the lever at the speed you want.

• Move the lever up (to RES+) and

release it immediately. The cruising

speed will increase by 1.0 mph (1.6

km/h) each time the lever is operated in

this manner.

ORB051033N ORB051032NORB051030N

Information Provided by:

529

Driving your vehicle

To decrease the cruising speed:

Follow either of these procedures:

• Move the lever down (to SET-) and

hold it. Your vehicle will gradually slow

down. Release the lever at the speed

you want to maintain.

• Move the lever down (to SET-) and

release it immediately. The cruising

speed will decrease by 1.0 mph (1.6

km/h) each time the lever is operated in

this manner.

To temporarily accelerate with the

cruise control on:

If you want to speed up temporarily when

the cruise control is on, depress the

accelerator pedal. Increased speed will

not interfere with cruise control operation

or change the set speed.

To return to the set speed, take your foot

off the accelerator.

To cancel cruise control, do one

of the following:

• Press the brake pedal.

• Press the clutch pedal with a manual

transaxle.

• Shift the shift lever into N (Neutral) with

an automatic transaxle

• Press the CANCEL switch located on

the steering wheel.

• Decrease the vehicle speed lower than

the memory speed by 9 mph (15 km/h).

• Decrease the vehicle speed to less

than approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).

ORB051031NORB051033N

Information Provided by:

Driving your vehicle

305

Each of these actions will cancel cruise

control operation (the SET indicator light

in the instrument cluster will go off), but it

will not turn the system off. If you wish to

resume cruise control operation, move

the lever up (to RES+). You will return to

your previously preset speed.

To resume cruising speed at

more than approximately 25 mph

(40 km/h):

If any method other than the ON-OFF

switch was used to cancel cruising speed

and the system is still activated, the most

recent set speed will automatically

resume when you move the lever up (to

RES+).

✽✽NOTICE

Always check the road conditions when

you move the lever up (to RES+) to

resume the speed.

To turn cruise control off, do one

of the following:

• Push the cruise ON/OFF button (the

CRUISE indicator light in the instru-

ment cluster will go off).

• Turn the ignition off.

Both of these actions cancel cruise con-

trol operation. If you want to resume

cruise control operation, repeat the steps

provided in “To set cruise control speed”

on the previous page.

ORB051032N ORB051030N

Information Provided by:

531

Driving your vehicle

Active ECO operation

Active ECO helps improve fuel efficiency

by controlling the engine and transaxle.

But fuel-efficiency can be changed by the

driver's driving habits and road conditions.

• When the Active ECO button is

pressed the ECO indicator (green) will

illuminate to show that the Active ECO

is operating.

• When the Active ECO is activated, it

does not turn off even though the

engine is restarted again. To turn off

the system, press the active ECO but-

ton again.

• If Active ECO is turned off, it will return

to the normal mode.

Limitation of Active ECO

operation:

If the following conditions occur while

Active ECO is operating, the system

operation is limited even though there is

no change in the ECO indicator.

• When the coolant temperature is low:

The system will be limited until engine

performance becomes normal.

• When driving up a hill:

The system will be limited to gain

power when driving uphill because the

engine torque is restricted.

• When using sports mode:

The system will be limited according to

the manually selected gear.

• When the accelerator pedal is deeply

pressed for a few seconds:

The system will be limited, judging that

the driver desires additional accelera-

tion.

ACTIVE ECO SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

ORB050017

Information Provided by:

Driving your vehicle

325

Your vehicle's fuel economy depends

mainly on your style of driving, where you

drive and when you drive.

Each of these factors affects how many

miles (kilometers) you can get from a gal-

lon (liter) of fuel. To operate your vehicle

as economically as possible, use the fol-

lowing driving suggestions to help save

money in both fuel and repairs:

• Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a moder-

ate rate. Don't make "jack-rabbit" starts

or full-throttle shifts and maintain a

steady cruising speed. Don't race

between stoplights. Try to adjust your

speed to that of the other traffic so you

don't have to change speeds unneces-

sarily. Avoid heavy traffic whenever

possible. Always maintain a safe dis-

tance from other vehicles so you can

avoid unnecessary braking. This also

reduces brake wear.

• Drive at a moderate speed. The faster

you drive, the more fuel your car uses.

Driving at a moderate speed, especial-

ly on the highway, is one of the most

effective ways to reduce fuel consump-

tion.

• Don't "ride" the brake pedal. This can

increase fuel consumption and also

increase wear on these components.

In addition, driving with your foot rest-

ing on the brake pedal may cause the

brakes to overheat, which reduces

their effectiveness and may lead to

more serious consequences.

• Take care of your tires. Keep them

inflated to the recommended pressure.

Incorrect inflation, either too much or

too little, results in unnecessary tire

wear. Check the tire pressures at least

once a month.

• Be sure that the wheels are aligned

correctly. Improper alignment can

result from hitting curbs or driving too

fast over irregular surfaces. Poor align-

ment causes faster tire wear and may

also result in other problems as well as

greater fuel consumption.

• Keep your car in good condition. For

better fuel economy and reduced

maintenance costs, maintain your car

in accordance with the maintenance

schedule in section 7. If you drive your

car in severe conditions, more frequent

maintenance is required (see section 7

for details).

• Keep your car clean. For maximum serv-

ice, your vehicle should be kept clean

and free of corrosive materials. It is

especially important that mud, dirt, ice,

etc. not be allowed to accumulate on the

underside of the car. This extra weight

can result in increased fuel consumption

and also contribute to corrosion.

• Travel lightly. Don't carry unnecessary

weight in your car. Weight reduces fuel

economy.

• Don't let the engine idle longer than

necessary. If you are waiting (and not

in traffic), turn off your engine and

restart only when you're ready to go.

ECONOMICAL OPERATION

Information Provided by:

533

Driving your vehicle

• Remember, your vehicle does not

require extended warm-up. After the

engine has started, allow the engine to

run for 10 to 20 seconds prior to plac-

ing the vehicle in gear. In very cold

weather, however, give your engine a

slightly longer warm-up period.

• Don't "lug" or "over-rev" the engine.

Lugging is driving too slowly in too high

a gear resulting in the engine bucking.

If this happens, shift to a lower gear.

Over-revving is racing the engine

beyond its safe limit. This can be avoid-

ed by shifting at the recommended

speeds.

• Use your air conditioning sparingly.

The air conditioning system is operat-

ed by engine power so your fuel econ-

omy is reduced when you use it.

• Open windows at high speeds can

reduce fuel economy.

• Fuel economy is less in crosswinds

and headwinds. To help offset some of

this loss, slow down when driving in

these conditions.

Keeping a vehicle in good operating con-

dition is important both for economy and

safety. Therefore, have an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer perform scheduled

inspections and maintenance.

WARNING - Engine off dur-

ing motion

Never turn the engine off to coast

down hills or anytime the vehicle is

in motion. The power steering and

power brakes will not function

properly without the engine run-

ning. Instead, keep the engine on

and downshift to an appropriate

gear for engine braking effect. In

addition, turning off the ignition

while driving could engage the

steering wheel lock resulting in

loss of vehicle steering which

could cause serious injury or

death.

Information Provided by:

Driving your vehicle

345

Hazardous driving conditions

When hazardous driving conditions are

encountered such as water, snow, ice,

mud, sand, or similar hazards, follow

these suggestions:

• Drive cautiously and allow extra dis-

tance for braking.

• Avoid sudden braking or steering.

• If stalled in snow, mud, or sand, use

second gear. Accelerate slowly to

avoid spinning the drive wheels.

• Use sand, rock salt, tire chains, or

other non-slip material under the drive

wheels to provide traction when stalled

in ice, snow, or mud.

Rocking the vehicle

If it is necessary to rock the vehicle to

free it from snow, sand, or mud, first turn

the steering wheel right and left to clear

the area around your front wheels. Then,

shift back and forth between 1st (First)

and R (Reverse) in vehicles equipped

with a manual transaxle or R (Reverse)

and any forward gear in vehicles

equipped with an automatic transaxle.

Do not race the engine, and spin the

wheels as little as possible. If you are still

stuck after a few tries, have the vehicle

pulled out by a tow vehicle to avoid

engine overheating and possible dam-

age to the transaxle.

SPECIAL DRIVING CONDITIONS

1JBB3302

WARNING - ABS

Do not pump the brake pedal on a

vehicle equipped with ABS.

WARNING - Downshifting

Downshifting with an automatic

transaxle, while driving on slippery

surfaces can cause an accident.

The sudden change in tire speed

could cause the tires to skid. Be

careful when downshifting on slip-

pery surfaces.

CAUTION

Prolonged rocking may cause

engine over-heating, transaxle dam-

age or failure, and tire damage.

Information Provided by:

535

Driving your vehicle

✽✽NOTICE

The ESC system should be turned OFF

prior to rocking the vehicle. Smooth cornering

Avoid braking or gear changing in cor-

ners, especially when roads are wet.

Ideally, corners should always be taken

under gentle acceleration. If you follow

these suggestions, tire wear will be held

to a minimum.

Driving at night

Because night driving presents more

hazards than driving in the daylight, here

are some important tips to remember:

• Slow down and keep more distance

between you and other vehicles, as it

may be more difficult to see at night,

especially in areas where there may

not be any street lights.

WARNING - Spinning tires

Do not spin the wheels, especially

at speeds more than 35 mph (56

km/h). Spinning the wheels at high

speeds when the vehicle is station-

ary could cause a tire to overheat

which could result in tire damage

that may injure bystanders.

OBH058035L OMC035004

WARNING

If your vehicle becomes stuck in

snow, mud, sand, etc., then you

may attempt to rock the vehicle free

by moving it forward and backward.

Do not attempt this procedure if

people or objects are anywhere

near the vehicle. During the rocking

operation the vehicle may suddenly

move forward or backward as it

becomes unstuck, causing injury

or damage to nearby people or

objects.

Information Provided by:

Driving your vehicle

365

• Adjust your mirrors to reduce the glare

from other driver's headlights.

• Keep your headlights clean and prop-

erly aimed on vehicles not equipped

with the automatic headlight aiming

feature. Dirty or improperly aimed

headlights will make it much more diffi-

cult to see at night.

• Avoid staring directly at the headlights

of oncoming vehicles. You could be

temporarily blinded, and it will take

several seconds for your eyes to read-

just to the darkness.

Driving in the rain

Rain and wet roads can make driving

dangerous, especially if you’re not pre-

pared for the slick pavement. Here are a

few things to consider when driving in the

rain:

• A heavy rainfall will make it harder to

see and will increase the distance

needed to stop your vehicle, so slow

down.

• Keep your windshield wiping equip-

ment in good shape. Replace your

windshield wiper blades when they

show signs of streaking or missing

areas on the windshield.

• If your tires are not in good condition,

making a quick stop on wet pavement

can cause a skid and possibly lead to

an accident. Be sure your tires are in

good shape.

• Turn on your headlights to make it eas-

ier for others to see you.

• Driving too fast through large puddles

can affect your brakes. If you must go

through puddles, try to drive through

them slowly.

• If you believe you may have gotten

your brakes wet, apply them lightly

while driving until normal braking oper-

ation returns.

Driving in flooded areas

Avoid driving through flooded areas

unless you are sure the water is no high-

er than the bottom of the wheel hub.

Drive through any water slowly. Allow

adequate stopping distance because

brake performance may be affected.

After driving through water, dry the

brakes by gently applying them several

times while the vehicle is moving slowly.

Driving off-road

Drive carefully off-road because your

vehicle may be damaged by rocks or

roots of trees. Become familiar with the

off-road conditions where you are going

to drive before you begin driving.

Information Provided by:

537

Driving your vehicle

Highway driving

Tires

Adjust the tire inflation pressures to

specification. Low tire inflation pressures

will result in overheating and possible

failure of the tires.

Avoid using worn or damaged tires which

may result in reduced traction or tire fail-

ure.

✽✽NOTICE

Never exceed the maximum tire inflation

pressure shown on the tires.

Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil

High speed travel consumes more fuel

than urban motoring. Do not forget to

check both engine coolant and engine

oil.

Drive belt

A loose or damaged drive belt may result

in overheating of the engine. Inspect your

drive belt for proper tension, or have your

Hyundai dealer inspect this at the normal

service intervals listed in section 7.

WARNING

• Underinflated or overinflated

tires can cause poor handling,

loss of vehicle control, and sud-

den tire failure leading to acci-

dents, injuries, and even death.

Always check tires for proper

inflation before driving. For prop-

er tire pressures, refer to “Tires

and wheels” in section 8.

• Driving on tires with no or insuffi-

cient tread is dangerous. Worn-

out tires can result in loss of

vehicle control, collisions, injury,

and even death. Worn-out tires

should be replaced as soon as

possible and should never be

used for driving. Always check

the tire tread before driving your

car. For further information and

tread limits, refer to “Tires and

wheels” in section 7.

OMG015008

Information Provided by:

Driving your vehicle

385

More severe weather conditions of winter

result in greater wear and other prob-

lems. To minimize winter driving problem,

you should follow these suggestions:

Snowy or icy conditions

To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it may

be necessary to use snow tires or to

install tire chains on your tires. If snow

tires are needed, it is necessary to select

tires equivalent in size and type of the

original equipment tires. Failure to do so

may adversely affect the safety and han-

dling of your car. Furthermore, speeding,

rapid acceleration, sudden brake appli-

cations, and sharp turns are potentially

very hazardous practices.

During deceleration, use engine braking

to the fullest extent. Sudden brake appli-

cations on snowy or icy roads may cause

skids to occur. You need to keep suffi-

cient distance between the vehicle in

operation in front and your vehicle. Also,

apply the brake gently. It should be noted

that installing tire chains on the tire will

provide a greater driving force, but will

not prevent side skids.

✽✽NOTICE

Tire chains are not legal in all states.

Check state laws before fitting tire

chains.

Snow tires

If you mount snow tires on your vehicle,

make sure they are radial tires of the

same size and load range as the original

tires. Mount snow tires on all four wheels

to balance your vehicle’s handling in all

weather conditions. Keep in mind that the

traction provided by snow tires on dry

roads may not be as high as your vehi-

cle's original equipment tires. You should

drive cautiously even when the roads are

clear. Check with the tire dealer for max-

imum speed recommendations.

Do not install studded tires without first

checking local, state and municipal regu-

lations for possible restrictions against

their use.

WINTER DRIVING

WARNING - Snow tire size

Snow tires should be equivalent in

size and type to the vehicle's stan-

dard tires. Otherwise, the safety

and handling of your vehicle may

be adversely affected.

1JBB3305

Information Provided by:

539

Driving your vehicle

Tire chains

Since the sidewalls of radial tires are

thinner, they can be damaged by mount-

ing some types of snow chains on them.

Therefore, the use of snow tires is rec-

ommended instead of snow chains. Do

not mount tire chains on vehicles

equipped with aluminum wheels; snow

chains may cause damage to the wheels.

If snow chains must be used, use gen-

uine HYUNDAI parts and install the tire

chain after going over the instruction.

Damage to your vehicle caused by

improper snow chain use is not covered

by your vehicle manufacturers warranty.

When using tire chains, install them on

the front tires only.

Chain installation

When installing chains, follow the manu-

facturer's instructions and mount them as

tightly as you can. Drive slowly with

chains installed. If you hear the chains

contacting the body or chassis, stop and

tighten them. If they still make contact,

slow down until it stops. Remove the

chains as soon as you begin driving on

cleared roads.

CAUTION

• Make sure the snow chains are

the correct size and type for your

tires. Incorrect snow chains can

cause damage to the vehicle body

and suspension and may not be

covered by your vehicle manufac-

turer warranty. Also, the snow

chain connecting hooks may be

damaged from contacting vehicle

components causing the snow

chains to come loose from the

tire. Make sure the snow chains

are SAE class “S” certified.

• Always check chain installation

for proper mounting after driving

approximately 0.3 to 0.6 miles (0.5

to 1 km) to ensure safe mounting.

Retighten or remount the chains

if they are loose.

WARNING

- Mounting chains

When mounting snow chains, park

the vehicle on level ground away

from traffic. Turn on the vehicle

Hazard Warning flashers and place

a triangular emergency warning

device behind the vehicle if avail-

able. Always place the vehicle in P

(Park), apply the parking brake and

turn off the engine before installing

snow chains.

1JBA4068

Information Provided by:

Driving your vehicle

405

Use high quality ethylene glycol

coolant

Your vehicle is delivered with high quality

ethylene glycol coolant in the cooling

system. It is the only type of coolant that

should be used because it helps prevent

corrosion in the cooling system, lubri-

cates the water pump and prevents

freezing. Be sure to replace or replenish

your coolant in accordance with the

maintenance schedule in section 7.

Before winter, have your coolant tested to

assure that its freezing point is sufficient

for the temperatures anticipated during

the winter.

Check battery and cables

Winter puts additional burdens on the

battery system. Visually inspect the bat-

tery and cables as described in section

7. The level of charge in your battery can

be checked by an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer or a service station.

Change to "winter weight" oil if

necessary

In some climates it is recommended that

a lower viscosity "winter weight" oil be

used during cold weather. See section 8

for recommendations. If you aren't sure

what weight oil you should use, consult

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Check spark plugs and ignition

system

Inspect your spark plugs as described in

section 7 and replace them if necessary.

Also check all ignition wiring and compo-

nents to be sure they are not cracked,

worn or damaged in any way.

WARNING - Tire chains

• The use of chains may adversely

affect vehicle handling.

• Do not exceed 20 mph (30 km/h)

or the chain manufacturer’s rec-

ommended speed limit, whichev-

er is lower.

• Drive carefully and avoid bumps,

holes, sharp turns, and other

road hazards, which may cause

the vehicle to bounce.

• Avoid sharp turns or locked-

wheel braking.

CAUTION

• Chains that are the wrong size or

improperly installed can damage

your vehicle's brake lines, sus-

pension, body and wheels.

• Stop driving and retighten the

chains any time you hear them

hitting the vehicle.

Information Provided by:

541

Driving your vehicle

To keep locks from freezing

To keep the locks from freezing, squirt an

approved de-icer fluid or glycerine into

the key opening. If a lock is covered with

ice, squirt it with an approved de-icing

fluid to remove the ice. If the lock is

frozen internally, you may be able to thaw

it out by using a heated key. Handle the

heated key with care to avoid injury.

Use approved window washer

anti-freeze in system

To keep the water in the window washer

system from freezing, add an approved

window washer anti-freeze solution in

accordance with instructions on the con-

tainer. Window washer anti-freeze is

available from an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer and most auto parts outlets. Do

not use engine coolant or other types of

anti-freeze as these may damage the

paint finish.

Don't let your parking brake

freeze

Under some conditions your parking

brake can freeze in the engaged position.

This is most likely to happen when there

is an accumulation of snow or ice around

or near the rear brakes or if the brakes

are wet. If there is a risk of the parking

brake may freezing, apply it only tem-

porarily while you put the shift lever in P

(automatic transaxle) or in first or reverse

gear (manual transaxle) and block the

rear wheels so the vehicle cannot roll.

Then release the parking brake.

Don't let ice and snow accumu-

late underneath

Under some conditions, snow and ice

can build up under the fenders and inter-

fere with the steering. When driving in

severe winter conditions where this may

happen, you should periodically check

underneath the car to be sure the move-

ment of the front wheels and the steering

components is not obstructed.

Carry emergency equipment

Depending on the severity of the weath-

er where you drive your car, you should

carry appropriate emergency equipment.

Some of the items you may want to carry

include tire chains, tow straps or chains,

flashlight, emergency flares, sand, a

shovel, jumper cables, a window scraper,

gloves, ground cloth, coveralls, a blanket,

etc.

Information Provided by:

Driving your vehicle

425

Tire and loading information label

The label located on the driver's door

sill gives the original tire size, cold

tire pressures recommended for your

vehicle, the number of people that

can be in your vehicle and vehicle

capacity weight.

Vehicle capacity weight:

849 lbs. (385 kg)

Vehicle capacity weight is the maxi-

mum combined weight of occupants

and cargo.

VEHICLE LOAD LIMIT

ORB054040N

ORB054041A

■Type A

■ Type B

ORB054042N

ORB054043N

■Type C

■ Type D

Information Provided by:

543

Driving your vehicle

Seating capacity:

Total : 5 persons

(Front seat : 2 persons,

Rear seat : 3 persons)

Seating capacity is the maximum

number of occupants including a

driver, your vehicle may carry.

However, the seating capacity may

be reduced based upon the weight of

all of the occupants, and the weight

of the cargo being carried.

Do not overload the vehicle as there

is a limit to the total weight, or load

limit including occupants and cargo,

the vehicle can carry.

Towing capacity:

We do not recommend using this

vehicle for trailer towing.

Cargo capacity:

The cargo capacity of your vehicle

will increase or decrease depending

on the weight and the number of

occupants.

Steps For Determining Correct Load

Limit -

1. Locate the statement "The com-

bined weight of occupants and

cargo should never exceed XXX

kg or XXX lbs.'' on your vehicle's

placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of

the driver and passengers that will

be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of

the driver and passengers from

XXX kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the

available amount of cargo and lug-

gage load capacity. For example, if

the "XXX" amount equals 1400

lbs. and there will be five 150 lb

passengers in your vehicle, the

amount of available cargo and lug-

gage load capacity is 650 lbs.

(1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)

5. Determine the combined weight of

luggage and cargo being loaded

on the vehicle. That weight may

not safely exceed the available

cargo and luggage load capacity

calculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trail-

er, load from your trailer will be

transferred to your vehicle. Consult

this manual to determine how this

reduces the available cargo and

luggage load capacity of your

vehicle.

✽✽NOTICE

We do not recommend using this

vehicle for trailer towing.

Information Provided by:

Driving your vehicle

445

C190F03JM

Item Description Total

AVehicle Capacity 849 lbs

Weight (385 kg)

Subtract Occupant

B Weight 815 lbs

163 lbs (74 kg) × 5 (370 kg)

Available Cargo and

34 lbs

Luggage weight (15 kg)

ABC

Example 3

Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information label for specific information about your vehicle's capacity weight

and seating positions. The combined weight of the driver, passengers and cargo should never exceed your vehicle's

capacity weight.

C190F01JM

Item Description Total

AVehicle Capacity 849 lbs

Weight (385 kg)

Subtract Occupant

B Weight 300 lbs

150 lbs (68 kg) × 2 (136 kg)

Available Cargo and

549 lbs

Luggage weight (249 kg)

Example 1

ABC

C190F02JM

Item Description Total

AVehicle Capacity 849 lbs

Weight (385 kg)

Subtract Occupant

B Weight 750 lbs

150 lbs (68 kg) × 5 (340 kg)

Available Cargo and

99 lbs

Luggage weight (45 kg)

ABC

Example 2

Information Provided by:

545

Driving your vehicle

Certification label

The certification label is located on

the driver's door sill at the center pillar.

This label shows the maximum

allowable weight of the fully loaded

vehicle. This is called the GVWR

(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating). The

GVWR includes the weight of the

vehicle, all occupants, fuel and

cargo.

This label also tells you the maxi-

mum weight that can be supported

by the front and rear axles, called

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).

To find out the actual loads on your

front and rear axles, you need to go

to a weigh station and weigh your

vehicle.Your dealer can help you with

this. Be sure to spread out your load

equally on both sides of the center-

line.

The label will help you decide how

much cargo and installed equipment

your vehicle can carry.

If you carry items inside your vehicle

- like suitcases, tools, packages, or

anything else - they are moving as

fast as the vehicle. If you have to stop

or turn quickly, or if there is a crash,

the items will keep going and can

cause an injury if they strike the driv-

er or a passenger.

OBH059070

WARNING - Over loading

• Never exceed the GVWR for

your vehicle, the GAWR for

either the front or rear axle

and vehicle capacity weight.

Exceeding these ratings can

cause an accident or vehicle

damage. You can calculate the

weight of your load by weigh-

ing the items (or people)

before putting them in the

vehicle. Be careful not to over-

load your vehicle.

(Continued)

• Do not load your vehicle any

heavier than the GVWR, either

the maximum front or rear

GAWR and vehicle capacity

weight. If you do, parts,

including tires on your vehicle

can break, and it can change

the way your vehicle handles

and braking ability. This could

cause you to lose control and

crash. Also, overloading can

shorten the life of your vehi-

cle.

Information Provided by:

Driving your vehicle

465

WARNING

• Overloading your vehicle can

cause heat buildup in your

vehicle's tires and possible

tire failure that could lead to a

crash.

• Overloading your vehicle can

cause increased stopping dis-

tances that could lead to a

crash.

• A crash resulting from poor

handling, vehicle damage, tire

failure, or increased stopping

distances could result in seri-

ous injury or death.

WARNING - Loose cargo

Items you carry inside your

vehicle can strike and injure

occupants in a sudden stop or

turn, or in a crash.

• Put items in the cargo area of

your vehicle. Try to spread the

weight evenly.

• Never stack items, like suit-

cases, inside the vehicle

above the tops of the seats.

• Do not leave an unsecured

child restraint in your vehicle.

• When you carry something

inside the vehicle, secure it.

• Do not drive with a seat folded

down unless necessary.

CAUTION

• Overloading your vehicle may

cause damage. Repairs would

not be covered by your warran-

ty. Do not overload your vehicle.

• Using heavier suspension com-

ponents to get added durability

might not change your weight

ratings. Ask your dealer to help

you load your vehicle the right

way.

Information Provided by:

547

Driving your vehicle

This section will guide you in the proper

loading of your vehicle, to keep your

loaded vehicle weight within its design

rating capability. Properly loading your

vehicle will provide maximum return of

the vehicle design performance. Before

loading your vehicle, familiarize yourself

with the following terms for determining

your vehicle's weight ratings, from the

vehicle's specifications and the certifica-

tion label:

Base curb weight

This is the weight of the vehicle including

a full tank of fuel and all standard equip-

ment. It does not include passengers,

cargo, or optional equipment.

Vehicle curb weight

This is the weight of your new vehicle

when you picked it up from your dealer

plus any aftermarket equipment.

Cargo weight

This figure includes all weight added to

the Base Curb Weight, including cargo

and optional equipment.

GAW (Gross axle weight)

This is the total weight placed on each

axle (front and rear) - including vehicle

curb weight and all payload.

GAWR (Gross axle weight rating)

This is the maximum allowable weight

that can be carried by a single axle (front

or rear). These numbers are shown on

the certification label.

The total load on each axle must never

exceed its GAWR.

GVW (Gross vehicle weight)

This is the Base Curb Weight plus actual

Cargo Weight plus passengers.

GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating)

This is the maximum allowable weight of

the fully loaded vehicle (including all

options, equipment, passengers and

cargo). The GVWR is shown on the cer-

tification label located on the driver’s

door sill.

VEHICLE WEIGHT

Information Provided by:

We do not recommend using this

vehicle for trailer towing.

TRAILER TOWING

548

Driving your vehicle

Information Provided by:

Road warning / 6-2

In case of an emergency while driving / 6-2

If the engine will not start / 6-3

Emergency starting / 6-4

If the engine overheats / 6-6

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) / 6-7, 6-12

If you have a flat tire (with spare tire) / 6-17

If you have a flat tire (with tire mobility kit) / 6-25

Towing / 6-31

What to do in an emergency

Information Provided by:

What to do in an emergency

ROAD WARNING

Hazard warning flasher

The hazard warning flasher serves as a

warning to other drivers to exercise

extreme caution when approaching,

overtaking, or passing your vehicle.

It should be used whenever emergency

repairs are being made or when the vehi-

cle is stopped near the edge of a road-

way.

Depress the flasher switch with the igni-

tion switch in any position. The flasher

switch is located in the center console

switch panel. All turn signal lights will

flash simultaneously.

• The hazard warning flasher operates

whether your vehicle is running or not.

• The turn signals do not work when the

hazard flasher is on.

• Care must be taken when using the

hazard warning flasher while the vehi-

cle is being towed.

If the engine stalls at a crossroad

or crossing

If the engine stalls at a crossroad or

crossing, set the shift lever in the N

(Neutral) position and then push the vehi-

cle to a safe place.

If you have a flat tire while driving

If a tire goes flat while you are driving:

1.Take your foot off the accelerator pedal

and let the car slow down while driving

straight ahead. Do not apply the brakes

immediately or attempt to pull off the

road as this may cause a loss of con-

trol. When the car has slowed to such

a speed that it is safe to do so, brake

carefully and pull off the road. Drive off

the road as far as possible and park on

firm, level ground. If you are on a divid-

ed highway, do not park in the median

area between the two traffic lanes.

IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY

WHILE DRIVING

ORB040045

Information Provided by:

What to do in an emergency

2.When the vehicle is stopped, turn on

your emergency hazard flashers, set

the parking brake and put the transaxle

in P (automatic transaxle) or reverse

(manual transaxle).

3.Have all passengers get out of the car.

Be sure they all get out on the side of

the car that is away from traffic.

4.When repairing a flat tire, follow the

instruction provided later in this sec-

tion.

If engine stalls while driving

1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping

a straight line. Move cautiously off the

road to a safe place.

2. Turn on your emergency flashers.

3. Try to start the engine again. If your

vehicle will not start, contact an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer or seek

other qualified assistance.

If engine doesn't turn over or

turns over slowly

1. If your vehicle has an automatic

transaxle, be sure the shift lever is in N

(Neutral) or P (Park) and the emer-

gency brake is set.

2. Check the battery connections to be

sure they are clean and tight.

3. Turn on the interior light. If the light

dims or goes out when you operate the

starter, the battery is discharged.

4. Do not push or pull the vehicle to start

it. See instructions for "Jump starting".

If engine turns over normally but

does not start

1. Check fuel level.

2. With the ignition switch in the LOCK

position, check all connectors at igni-

tion coils and spark plugs. Reconnect

any that may be disconnected or

loose.

3. If the engine still does not start, call an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer or seek

other qualified assistance.

IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START

WARNING

If the engine will not start, do not

push or pull the vehicle to start it.

This could result in a collision or

cause other damage. In addition,

push or pull starting may cause the

catalytic converter to be over-

loaded and create a fire hazard.

Information Provided by:

What to do in an emergency

EMERGENCY STARTING

Connect cables in numerical order and

disconnect in reverse order.

Jump starting

Jump starting can be dangerous if done

incorrectly. Therefore, to avoid harm to

yourself or damage to your vehicle or

battery, follow the jump starting proce-

dures. If in doubt, we strongly recom-

mend that you have a competent techni-

cian or towing service jump start your

vehicle.

CAUTION

Use only a 12-volt jumper system.

You can damage a 12-volt starting

motor, ignition system, and other

electrical parts beyond repair by

use of a 24-volt power supply (either

two 12-volt batteries in series or a

24-volt motor generator set).

WARNING - Battery

• Keep all flames or sparks away

from the battery. The battery pro-

duces hydrogen gas which may

explode if exposed to flame or

sparks.

If these instructions are not fol-

lowed exactly, serious personal

injury and damage to the vehicle

may occur! If you are not sure

how to follow this procedure,

seek qualified assistance.

Automobile batteries contain sul-

furic acid. This is poisonous and

highly corrosive. When jump

starting, wear protective glasses

and be careful not to get acid on

yourself, your clothing or on the

car.

• Do not attempt to jump start the

vehicle if the discharged battery

is frozen or if the electrolyte level

is low; the battery may rupture or

explode.

WARNING - Battery

Never attempt to check the elec-

trolyte level of the battery as this

may cause the battery to rupture or

explode causing serious injury.

1VQA4001

Discharged

battery

Jumper Cables

Booster

battery

Information Provided by:

What to do in an emergency

Jump starting procedure

1. Make sure the booster battery is 12-

volt and that its negative terminal is

grounded connects to the vehicle body.

2. If the booster battery is in another

vehicle, do not allow the vehicles to

touch.

3. Turn off all unnecessary electrical

loads.

4. Connect the jumper cables in the exact

sequence shown in the illustration.

First connect one end of a jumper

cable to the positive terminal of the

discharged battery (1), then connect

the other end to the positive terminal

on the booster battery (2). Proceed to

connect one end of the other jumper

cable to the negative terminal of the

booster battery (3), then the other end

to a solid, stationary, metallic point (for

example, the engine lifting bracket)

away from the battery (4). Do not con-

nect it to or near any part that moves

when the engine is cranked.

Do not allow the jumper cables to con-

tact anything except the correct battery

terminals or the correct ground. Do not

lean over the battery when making

connections.

5. Start the engine of the vehicle with the

booster battery and let it run at 2,000

rpm, then start the engine of the vehi-

cle with the discharged battery.

If the cause of your battery discharging is

not apparent, you should have your vehi-

cle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer.

Push-starting

Your manual transaxle-equipped vehicle

should not be push-started because it

might damage the emission control sys-

tem.

Vehicles equipped with automatic

transaxle cannot be push-started.

Follow the directions in this section for

jump-starting.

CAUTION - Battery cables

Do not connect the jumper cable

from the negative terminal of the

booster battery to the negative ter-

minal of the discharged battery.

This can cause the discharged bat-

tery to overheat and crack, releas-

ing battery acid.

WARNING

Never tow a vehicle to start it

because the sudden surge forward

when the engine starts could cause

a collision with the tow vehicle.

Information Provided by:

What to do in an emergency

IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS

If your temperature gauge indicates over-

heating, you experience a loss of power,

or hear loud pinging or knocking, the

engine is probably too hot. If this hap-

pens, you should:

1. Pull off the road and stop as soon as it

is safe to do so.

2. Place the shift lever in P (automatic

transaxle) or neutral (manual transaxle)

and set the parking brake. If the air con-

ditioning is on, turn it off.

3. If engine coolant is running out under

the car or steam is coming out from

the hood, stop the engine. Do not open

the hood until the coolant has stopped

running or the steaming has stopped.

If there is no visible loss of engine

coolant and no steam, leave the

engine running and check to be sure

the engine cooling fan is operating. If

the fan is not running, turn the engine

off.

4. Check to see if the water pump drive

belt is missing. If it is not missing,

check to see that it is tight. If the drive

belt seems to be satisfactory, check for

coolant leaking from the radiator,

hoses or under the car. (If the air con-

ditioning had been in use, it is normal

for cold water to be draining from it

when you stop.)

5. If the water pump drive belt is broken

or engine coolant is leaking out, stop

the engine immediately and call the

nearest authorized HYUNDAI dealer

for assistance.

6.If you cannot find the cause of the

overheating, wait until the engine tem-

perature has returned to normal. Then,

if coolant has been lost, carefully add

coolant to the reservoir to bring the

fluid level in the reservoir up to the

halfway mark.

7.Proceed with caution, keeping alert for

further signs of overheating. If over-

heating happens again, call an author-

ized HYUNDAI dealer for assistance.

WARNING

While the engine is running, keep

hair, hands and clothing away from

moving parts such as the fan and

drive belts to prevent injury.

CAUTION

Serious loss of coolant indicates

there is a leak in the cooling system

and this should be checked as soon

as possible by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

WARNING

Do not remove the radiator cap

when the engine is hot. This may

result in coolant being blown out of

the opening and cause serious

burns.

Information Provided by:

What to do in an emergency

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) (TYPE A)

Low tire pressure telltale /

TPMS malfunction indicator

Each tire, including the spare (if pro-

vided), should be checked monthly

when cold and inflated to the inflation

pressure recommended by the vehi-

cle manufacturer on the vehicle plac-

ard or tire inflation pressure label. (If

your vehicle has tires of a different

size than the size indicated on the

vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-

sure label, you should determine the

proper tire inflation pressure for

those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your

vehicle has been equipped with a tire

pressure monitoring system (TPMS)

that illuminates a low tire pressure

telltale when one or more of your

tires is significantly under-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tire pres-

sure telltale illuminates, you should

stop and check your tires as soon as

possible, and inflate them to the

proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-

cantly under-inflated tire causes the

tire to overheat and can lead to tire

failure. Under-inflation also reduces

fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and

may affect the vehicle’s handling and

stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a

substitute for proper tire mainte-

nance, and it is the driver’s responsi-

bility to maintain correct tire pres-

sure, even if under-inflation has not

reached the level to trigger illumina-

tion of the TPMS low tire pressure

telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped

with a TPMS malfunction indicator to

indicate when the system is not oper-

ating properly. The TPMS malfunction

indicator is combined with the low tire

pressure telltale. When the system

detects a malfunction, the telltale will

flash for approximately one minute

and then remain continuously illumi-

nated. This sequence will continue

upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as

long as the malfunction exists. When

the malfunction indicator is illuminat-

ed, the system may not be able to

detect or signal low tire pressure as

intended. TPMS malfunctions may

occur for a variety of reasons, includ-

ing the installation of replacement or

alternate tires or wheels on the vehi-

cle that prevent the TPMS from func-

tioning properly. Always check the

TPMS malfunction telltale after

replacing one or more tires or wheels

on your vehicle to ensure that the

replacement or alternate tires and

wheels allow the TPMS to continue to

function properly.

ORB064010A

Information Provided by:

What to do in an emergency

✽✽NOTICE

If the TPMS indicator does not illu-

minate for 3 seconds when the igni-

tion switch is turned to the ON posi-

tion or engine is running, or if it

comes on after blinking for approxi-

mately one minute, take your car to

your nearest authorized HYUNDAI

dealer and have the system checked.

Low tire pressure tell-

tale

When the tire pressure monitoring

system warning indicator is illuminat-

ed, one or more of your tires is sig-

nificantly under-inflated.

If the telltale illuminates, immediately

reduce your speed, avoid hard cor-

nering and anticipate increased stop-

ping distances. You should stop and

check your tires as soon as possible.

Inflate the tires to the proper pres-

sure as indicated on the vehicle’s

placard or tire inflation pressure label

located on the driver’s side center pil-

lar outer panel. If you cannot reach a

service station or if the tire cannot

hold the newly added air, replace the

low pressure tire with the spare tire.

Then the Low Tire Pressure telltale

may flash for approximately one

minute and then remain continuously

illuminated after restarting and about

20 minutes of continuous driving

before you have the low pressure tire

repaired and replaced on the vehicle.

CAUTION

In winter or cold weather, the

low tire pressure telltale may be

illuminated if the tire pressure

was adjusted to the recom-

mended tire inflation pressure

in warm weather. It does not

mean your TPMS is malfunction-

ing because the decreased tem-

perature leads to a proportional

lowering of tire pressure.

When you drive your vehicle

from a warm area to a cold area

or from a cold area to a warm

area, or the outside temperature

is greatly higher or lower, you

should check the tire inflation

pressure and adjust the tires to

the recommended tire inflation

pressure.

Information Provided by:

What to do in an emergency

TPMS (Tire Pressure

Monitoring System)

malfunction indicator

The TPMS malfunction indicator will

illuminate after it blinks for approxi-

mately one minute when there is a

problem with the Tire Pressure

Monitoring System. If the system is

able to correctly detect an under infla-

tion warning at the same time as sys-

tem failure then it will illuminate the

TPMS malfunction indicator.

Have the system checked by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon

as possible to determine the cause

of the problem.

WARNING - Low pressure

damage

Significantly low tire pressure

makes the vehicle unstable and

can contribute to loss of vehicle

control and increased braking

distances.

Continued driving on low pres-

sure tires can cause the tires to

overheat and fail.

CAUTION

• The TPMS malfunction indica-

tor may be illuminated if the

vehicle is moving around elec-

tric power supply cables or

radios transmitter such as at

police stations, government

and public offices, broadcast-

ing stations, military installa-

tions, airports, or transmitting

towers, etc. This can interfere

with normal operation of the

Tire Pressure Monitoring

System (TPMS).

• The TPMS malfunction indica-

tor may illuminate if snow

chains or some separately

purchased devices such as

notebook computers, mobile

charger, remote starter, navi-

gation etc. are used in the

vehicle. This can interfere with

normal operation of the Tire

Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS).

Information Provided by:

What to do in an emergency

106

Changing a tire with TPMS

If you have a flat tire, the Low Tire

Pressure will come on. Have the flat

tire repaired by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possi-

ble or replace the flat tire with the

spare tire.

Each wheel is equipped with a tire

pressure sensor mounted inside the

tire behind the valve stem. You must

use TPMS specific wheels. It is rec-

ommended that you always have

your tires serviced by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Even if you replace the low pressure

tire with the spare tire, the Low Tire

Pressure Telltale will blink or remain

on until the low pressure tire is

repaired and placed on the vehicle.

After you replace the low pressure

tire with the spare tire, the Low Tire

Pressure Telltale may blink or illumi-

nate after driving about 20 minutes

because the TPMS sensor mounted

on the spare wheel is not initiated.

Once the low pressure tire is reinflat-

ed to the recommended pressure

and installed on the vehicle or the

TPMS sensor mounted on the

replaced spare wheel is initiated by

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer, the

TPMS malfunction indicator and the

low tire pressure telltale will extin-

guish within a few minutes of driving.

If the indicator is not extinguished

after a few minutes of driving, please

visit an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

CAUTION

If original mounted tire is

replaced with the spare tire, the

TPMS sensor on the replaced

spare wheel should be initiated

and the TPMS sensor on the

original mounted wheel should

be deactivated by a HYUNDAI

dealer. If the TPMS sensor on the

original mounted wheel located

in the spare tire carrier still acti-

vates, the tire pressure monitor-

ing system may not operate

properly. Have the tire with TPMS

serviced or replaced by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

CAUTION

Never use a puncture-repairing

agent not approved by HYUNDAI

to repair and/or inflate a low

pressure tire. The tire sealant not

approved by HYUNDAI may dam-

age the tire pressure sensor.

The sealant on the tire pressure

sensor and wheel shall be elim-

inated when you replace the tire

with a new one.

Information Provided by:

611

What to do in an emergency

You may not be able to identify a low

tire by simply looking at it. Always

use a good quality tire pressure

gauge to measure the tire's inflation

pressure. Please note that a tire that

is hot (from being driven) will have a

higher pressure measurement than a

tire that is cold.

A cold tire means the vehicle has

been sitting for 3 hours and driven for

less than 1 mile (1.6 km) in that 3

hour period.

Allow the tire to cool before measur-

ing the inflation pressure. Always be

sure the tire is cold before inflating to

the recommended pressure.

This device complies with Part 15

of the FCC rules.

Operation is subject to the following

two conditions:

1.This device may not cause harmful

interference, and

2.This device must accept any inter-

ference received, including inter-

ference that may cause undesired

operation.

CAUTION

Do not use any tire sealant

except the Tire Mobility Kit

approved by HYUNDAI if your

vehicle is equipped with a Tire

Pressure Monitoring System.

The liquid sealant can damage

the tire pressure sensors.

WARNING - Protecting

TPMS

Tampering with, modifying, or

disabling the Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS) com-

ponents may interfere with the

system's ability to warn the driv-

er of low tire pressure condi-

tions and/or TPMS malfunctions.

Tampering with, modifying, or

disabling the Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS) com-

ponents may void the warranty

for that portion of the vehicle.

WARNING - TPMS

• The TPMS cannot alert you to

severe and sudden tire dam-

age caused by external fac-

tors such as nails or road

debris.

• If you feel any vehicle instabil-

ity, immediately take your foot

off the accelerator, apply the

brakes gradually and with

light force, and slowly move to

a safe position off the road. WARNING

Changes or modifications not

expressly approved by the party

responsible for compliance

could void the user’s authority

to operate the equipment.

Information Provided by:

What to do in an emergency

126

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) (TYPE B)

(1) Low Tire Pressure Telltale/

TPMS Malfunction Indicator

(2) Low Tire Pressure Position Telltale

Each tire, including the spare (if pro-

vided), should be checked monthly

when cold and inflated to the inflation

pressure recommended by the vehi-

cle manufacturer on the vehicle plac-

ard or tire inflation pressure label. (If

your vehicle has tires of a different

size than the size indicated on the

vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-

sure label, you should determine the

proper tire inflation pressure for

those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your

vehicle has been equipped with a tire

pressure monitoring system (TPMS)

that illuminates a low tire pressure

telltale when one or more of your

tires is significantly under-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tire pres-

sure telltale illuminates, you should

stop and check your tires as soon as

possible, and inflate them to the

proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-

cantly under-inflated tire causes the

tire to overheat and can lead to tire

failure. Under-inflation also reduces

fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and

may affect the vehicle’s handling and

stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a

substitute for proper tire maintenance,

and it is the driver’s responsibility to

maintain correct tire pressure, even if

under-inflation has not reached the

level to trigger illumination of the

TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped

with a TPMS malfunction indicator to

indicate when the system is not oper-

ating properly. The TPMS malfunction

indicator is combined with the low tire

pressure telltale. When the system

detects a malfunction, the telltale will

flash for approximately one minute

and then remain continuously illumi-

nated. This sequence will continue

upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as

long as the malfunction exists. When

the malfunction indicator is illuminat-

ed, the system may not be able to

detect or signal low tire pressure as

intended. TPMS malfunctions may

occur for a variety of reasons, includ-

ing the installation of replacement or

alternate tires or wheels on the vehi-

cle that prevent the TPMS from func-

tioning properly.

ORB064011A

Information Provided by:

613

What to do in an emergency

Always check the TPMS malfunction

telltale after replacing one or more

tires or wheels on your vehicle to

ensure that the replacement or alter-

nate tires and wheels allow the TPMS

to continue to function properly.

✽✽NOTICE

If any of the below happens, we rec-

ommend that the system be checked

by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

1.The low tire pressure telltale/

TPMS malfunction indicator does

not illuminate for 3 seconds when

the ignition switch is turned to the

ON or engine is running.

2.The TPMS malfunction indicator

remains illuminated after blinking

for approximately 1 minute.

3.The Low tire pressure position

telltale remains illuminated.

Low tire pressure tell-

tale

Low tire pressure posi-

tion telltale

When the tire pressure monitoring

system warning indicators are illumi-

nated and warning massage dis-

played on the cluster LCD display,

one or more of your tires is signifi-

cantly under-inflated. The low tire

pressure position telltale light will

indicate which tire is significantly

under-inflated by illuminating the cor-

responding position light.

If either telltale illuminates, immediate-

ly reduce your speed, avoid hard cor-

nering and anticipate increased stop-

ping distances. You should stop and

check your tires as soon as possible.

Inflate the tires to the proper pres-

sure as indicated on the vehicle’s

placard or tire inflation pressure label

located on the driver’s side center pil-

lar outer panel.

If you cannot reach a service station

or if the tire cannot hold the newly

added air, replace the low pressure

tire with the spare tire.

If you drive the vehicle for about 10

minutes at speeds above 15 mph (25

km/h) after replacing the low pres-

sure tire with the spare tire, the

below will happen:

• The TPMS malfunction indicator

may blink for approximately 1 minute

and then remain continuously illumi-

nated because the TPMS sensor is

not mounted on the spare wheel.

✽✽NOTICE

The spare tire is not equipped with a

tire pressure sensor (if equipped

with a spare tire).

Information Provided by:

What to do in an emergency

146

TPMS (Tire Pressure

Monitoring System)

malfunction indicator

The TPMS malfunction indicator will

illuminate after it blinks for approxi-

mately one minute when there is a

problem with the Tire Pressure

Monitoring System.

Have the system checked by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon

as possible to determine the cause

of the problem.

✽✽NOTICE

If there is a malfunction with the

TPMS, the low tire pressure position

telltale will not be displayed even

though the vehicle has an under-

inflated tire.

WARNING - Low pressure

damage

Significantly low tire pressure

makes the vehicle unstable and

can contribute to loss of vehicle

control and increased braking

distances.

Continued driving on low pres-

sure tires can cause the tires to

overheat and fail.

CAUTION

In winter or cold weather, the

low tire pressure telltale may be

illuminated if the tire pressure

was adjusted to the recom-

mended tire inflation pressure

in warm weather. It does not

mean your TPMS is malfunction-

ing because the decreased tem-

perature leads to a proportional

lowering of tire pressure.

When you drive your vehicle

from a warm area to a cold area

or from a cold area to a warm

area, or the outside temperature

is greatly higher or lower, you

should check the tire inflation

pressure and adjust the tires to

the recommended tire inflation

pressure.

Information Provided by:

615

What to do in an emergency

Changing a tire with TPMS

If you have a flat tire, the Low Tire

Pressure and Position telltales will

come on. Have the flat tire repaired

by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer

as soon as possible or replace the

flat tire with the spare tire.

Each wheel is equipped with a tire

pressure sensor mounted inside the

tire behind the valve stem. You must

use TPMS specific wheels. It is rec-

ommended that you always have

your tires serviced by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

If you drive the vehicle for about 10

minutes at speeds above 15 mph (25

km/h) after replacing the low pres-

sure tire with the spare tire, the

below will happen:

• The TPMS malfunction indicator

may blink for approximately 1

minute and then remain continu-

ously illuminated because the

TPMS sensor is not mounted on

the spare wheel.

CAUTION

• The TPMS malfunction indica-

tor may blink for approximate-

ly 1 minute and then remain

continuously illuminated if the

vehicle is moving around elec-

tric power supply cables or

radio transmitter such as at

police stations, government

and public offices, broadcast-

ing stations, military installa-

tions, airports, or transmitting

towers, etc. This can interfere

with normal operation of the

Tire Pressure Monitoring

System (TPMS).

• The TPMS malfunction indica-

tor may blink for approximate-

ly 1 minute and then remain

continuously illuminated if the

snow chains are used or some

separate electronic devices

such as notebook computer,

mobile charger, remote starter

or navigation etc., are used in

the vehicle. This can interfere

with normal operation of the

Tire Pressure Monitoring

System (TPMS).

CAUTION

Never use a puncture-repairing

agent not approved by HYUNDAI

to repair and/or inflate a low

pressure tire. The tire sealant not

approved by HYUNDAI may dam-

age the tire pressure sensor.

The sealant on the tire pressure

sensor and wheel shall be elim-

inated when you replace the tire

with a new one.

Information Provided by:

What to do in an emergency

166

You may not be able to identify a tire

with low pressure by simply looking

at it. Always use a good quality tire

pressure gauge to measure. Please

note that a tire that is hot (from being

driven) will have a higher pressure

measurement than a tire that is cold.

A cold tire means the vehicle has

been sitting for 3 hours and driven for

less than 1 mile (1.6 km) in that 3 hour

period.

Allow the tire to cool before measur-

ing the inflation pressure. Always be

sure the tire is cold before inflating to

the recommended pressure.

This device complies with Part 15

of the FCC rules.

Operation is subject to the following

two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harm-

ful interference, and

2. This device must accept any inter-

ference received, including inter-

ference that may cause undesired

operation.

WARNING - Protecting

TPMS

Tampering with, modifying, or

disabling the Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS) com-

ponents may interfere with the

system's ability to warn the driv-

er of low tire pressure condi-

tions and/or TPMS malfunctions.

Tampering with, modifying, or

disabling the Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS) com-

ponents may void the warranty

for that portion of the vehicle.

WARNING - TPMS

• The TPMS cannot alert you to

severe and sudden tire dam-

age caused by external factors

such as nails or road debris.

• If you feel any vehicle instabil-

ity, immediately take your foot

off the accelerator, apply the

brakes gradually with light

force, and slowly move to a

safe position off the road.

WARNING

Changes or modifications not

expressly approved by the party

responsible for compliance could

void the user’s authority to operate

the equipment.

Information Provided by:

617

What to do in an emergency

IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE (WITH SPARE TIRE, IF EQUIPPED)

Jack and tools

The jack, jack handle, and wheel lug

nut wrench are stored in the luggage

compartment. Pull up the luggage

box cover to reach this equipment.

(1) Jack

(2) Jack handle

(3) Wheel lug nut wrench

Jacking instructions

The jack is provided for emergency

tire changing only.

To prevent the jack from “rattling”

while the vehicle is in motion, store it

properly.

Follow jacking instructions to reduce

the possibility of personal injury.

WARNING - Changing tires

• Never attempt vehicle repairs

in the traffic lanes of a public

road or highway.

• Always move the vehicle com-

pletely off the road and onto

the shoulder before trying to

change a tire. The jack should

be used on level firm ground.

If you cannot find a firm, level

place off the road, call a tow-

ing service company for

assistance.

• Be sure to use the correct

front and rear jacking posi-

tions on the vehicle; never use

the bumpers or any other part

of the vehicle for jack support.

• The vehicle can easily roll off

the jack causing serious

injury or death. No person

should place any portion of

their body under a vehicle that

is supported only by a jack;

use vehicle support stands.

(Continued)

ORB060001

Information Provided by:

What to do in an emergency

186

Removing and storing the spare

tire

Turn the tire hold-down wing bolt

counterclockwise.

Store the tire in the reverse order of

removal.

To prevent the spare tire and tools

from “rattling” while the vehicle is in

motion, store them properly.

Changing tires

1. Park on a level surface and apply

the parking brake firmly.

2. Shift the shift lever into R

(Reverse) with manual transaxle

or P (Park) with automatic

transaxle.

3. Activate the hazard warning flash-

er.

ORBC060002

(Continued)

• Do not start or run the engine

while the vehicle is on the

jack.

• Do not allow anyone to remain

in the vehicle while it is on the

jack.

• Make sure any children pres-

ent are in a secure place away

from the road and from the

vehicle to be raised with the

jack.

OBH068002L

Information Provided by:

619

What to do in an emergency

4. Remove the wheel lug nut wrench,

jack, jack handle, and spare tire

from the vehicle.

5. Block both the front and rear of the

wheel that is diagonally opposite

the jack position.

6. Loosen the wheel lug nuts coun-

terclockwise one turn each, but do

not remove any nut until the tire

has been raised off the ground.

1JBA6504

WARNING -

Changing a tire

• To prevent vehicle movement

while changing a tire, always

set the parking brake fully,

and always block the wheel

diagonally opposite the wheel

being changed.

• We recommend that the

wheels of the vehicle be

blocked, and that no person

remain in a vehicle that is

being jacked.

ORBC060003

Information Provided by:

What to do in an emergency

206

7. Place the jack at the front or rear

jacking position closest to the tire

you are changing. Place the jack

at the designated locations under

the frame.

8. Insert the jack handle into the jack

and turn it clockwise, raising the

vehicle until the tire just clears the

ground. This measurement is

approximately 1.2 in (30 mm).

Before removing the wheel lug

nuts, make sure the vehicle is sta-

ble and that there is no chance for

movement or slippage.

WARNING - Jack location

To reduce the possibility of

injury, be sure to use only the

jack provided with the vehicle

and in the correct jack position;

never use any other part of the

vehicle for jack support.

1JBA6025 ORBC060004

CAUTION

Place the jack so it does not

damage the plastic guard. If you

place the jack at the plastic guard

and jack up the vehicle, the plas-

tic guard may be damaged.

Information Provided by:

621

What to do in an emergency

9. Loosen the wheel nuts and remove

them with your fingers. Slide the

wheel off the studs and lay it flat so

it cannot roll away. To put the

wheel on the hub, pick up the

spare tire, line up the holes with

the studs and slide the wheel onto

them. If this is difficult, tip the wheel

slightly and get the top hole in the

wheel lined up with the top stud.

Then jiggle the wheel back and

forth until the wheel can be slid

over the other studs.

10. To reinstall the wheel, hold it on

the studs, put the wheel nuts on

the studs and tighten them finger

tight. The nuts should be installed

with their tapered small diameter

ends directed inward. Jiggle the

tire to be sure it is completely

seated, then tighten the nuts as

much as possible with your fin-

gers again.

11. Lower the car to the ground by

turning the wheel nut wrench

counterclockwise.

WARNING

Wheels may have sharp edges.

Handle them carefully to avoid

possible severe injury. Before

putting the wheel into place, be

sure that there is nothing on the

hub or wheel (such as mud, tar,

gravel, etc.) that prevents the

wheel from fitting solidly

against the hub.

Make sure the wheel makes

good contact with the hub when

installed. If the contact of the

mounting surface between the

wheel and hub is not good, the

wheel nuts could come loose

and cause the loss of a wheel.

Loss of a wheel may result in

loss of control of the vehicle,

serious injury or death.

Information Provided by:

What to do in an emergency

226

Then position the wrench as shown

in the drawing and tighten the wheel

nuts. Be sure the socket is seated

completely over the nut. Do not stand

on the wrench handle or use an

extension pipe over the wrench han-

dle. Go around the wheel tightening

every other nut until they are all tight.

Then double-check each nut for

tightness. After changing wheels,

have an authorized HYUNDAI dealer

tighten the wheel nuts to their proper

torque as soon as possible.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

Steel wheel & aluminum alloy wheel:

65~79 lb·ft (9~11 kg·m)

If you have a tire gauge, remove the

valve cap and check the air pressure.

If the pressure is lower than recom-

mended, drive slowly to the nearest

service station and inflate to the cor-

rect pressure. If it is too high, adjust it

until it is correct. Always reinstall the

valve cap after checking or adjusting

tire pressure. If the cap is not

replaced, air may leak from the tire. If

you lose a valve cap, buy another and

install it as soon as possible.

After you have changed wheels,

always secure the flat tire in its place

and return the jack and tools to their

proper storage locations.

CAUTION

Your vehicle has metric threads

on the wheel studs and nuts.

Make certain during wheel

removal that the same nuts that

were removed are reinstalled -

or, if replaced, that nuts with

metric threads and the same

chamfer configuration are used.

Installation of a non-metric

thread nut on a metric stud or

vice-versa will not secure the

wheel to the hub properly and

will damage the stud so that it

must be replaced.

Note that most lug nuts do not

have metric threads. Be sure to

use extreme care in checking

for thread style before installing

aftermarket lug nuts or wheels.

If in doubt, consult an author-

ized HYUNDAI dealer.

ORBC060005

Information Provided by:

623

What to do in an emergency

To prevent the jack, jack handle,

wheel lug nut wrench and spare tire

from rattling while the vehicle is in

motion, store them properly.

Important - use of compact spare tire

(if equipped)

If your vehicle is equipped with a

compact spare tire, it will take up less

space than a regular-size tire. This

tire is smaller than a conventional tire

and is designed for temporary use

only.

The compact spare should be inflat-

ed to 60 psi (420 kPa).

✽✽NOTICE

Check the inflation pressure after

installing the spare tire. Adjust it to

the specified pressure, as necessary.

CAUTION

• You should drive carefully

when the compact spare is in

use. The compact spare

should be replaced by the

proper conventional tire and

rim at the first opportunity.

• The operation of this vehicle

is not recommended with

more than one compact spare

tire in use at the same time.

WARNING

The compact spare tire is for

emergency use only. Do not

operate your vehicle on this

compact spare at speeds over

50 mph (80 km/h). The original

tire should be repaired or

replaced as soon as is possible

to avoid failure of the spare

possibly leading to personal

injury or death.

WARNING - Wheel studs

If the studs are damaged, they

may lose their ability to retain

the wheel. This could lead to the

loss of the wheel and a collision

resulting in serious injuries.

WARNING - Inadequate

spare tire pressure

Check the inflation pressures as

soon as possible after installing

the spare tire. Adjust it to the

specified pressure, if necessary.

Refer to “Tires and wheels” sec-

tion 8.

Information Provided by:

What to do in an emergency

246

When using a compact spare tire,

observe the following precautions:

• Under no circumstances should you

exceed 50 mph (80 km/h); a higher

speed could damage the tire.

• Ensure that you drive slowly enough

for the road conditions to avoid all

hazards. Any road hazard, such as a

pothole or debris, could seriously

damage the compact spare.

• Any continuous road use of this tire

could result in tire failure, loss of

vehicle control, and possible per-

sonal injury.

• Do not exceed the vehicle’s maxi-

mum load rating or the load-carry-

ing capacity shown on the sidewall

of the compact spare tire.

• Avoid driving over obstacles. The

compact spare tire diameter is

smaller than the diameter of a con-

ventional tire and reduces the

ground clearance approximately 1

inch (25 mm), which could result in

damage to the vehicle.

• Do not take this vehicle through an

automatic car wash while the com-

pact spare tire is installed.

• Do not use tire chains on the com-

pact spare tire. Because of the small-

er size, a tire chain will not fit proper-

ly. This could damage the vehicle

and result in loss of the chain.

• Do not use the compact spare tire

on any other vehicle because this

tire has been designed especially

for your vehicle.

• The compact spare tire’s tread life is

shorter than a regular tire. Inspect

your compact spare tire regularly

and replace worn compact spare

tires with the same size and design,

mounted on the same wheel.

• The compact spare tire should not

be used on any other wheels, nor

should standard tires, snow tires,

wheel covers or trim rings be used

with the compact spare wheel. If

such use is attempted, damage to

these items or other car compo-

nents may occur.

• Do not use more than one compact

spare tire at a time.

• Do not tow a trailer while the com-

pact spare tire is installed.

Information Provided by:

625

What to do in an emergency

IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE (TIRE MOBILITY KIT, IF EQUIPPED)

For safe operation, carefully read

and follow the instructions in this

manual before use.

(1) Compressor

(2) Sealant bottle

The Tire Mobility Kit is a temporary fix

to the tire and the tire should be

inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer as soon as possible.

Introduction

With the Tire Mobility Kit you stay

mobile even after experiencing a tire

puncture.

The system of compressor and seal-

ing compound effectively and com-

fortably seals most punctures in a

passenger car tire caused by nails or

similar objects and reinflates the tire.

After you are ensured that the tire is

properly sealed you can drive cau-

tiously on the tire (distance up to 120

miles (200 km) at a max. speed of 50

mph (80 km/h)) in order to reach a

service station or tire dealer for the

tire replacement.

OYN069010 OYN069018

CAUTION - One sealant for

one tire

When two or more tires are flat,

do not use the tire mobility kit

because the supported one

sealant of Tire Mobility Kit is

only used for one flat tire.

WARNING - Tire wall

Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit

to repair punctures in the tire

walls. This can result in an acci-

dent due to tire failure.

WARNING - Temporary fix

Have your tire repaired as soon

as possible. The tire may loose

air pressure at any time after

inflating with the Tire Mobility

Kit.

Information Provided by:

What to do in an emergency

266

It is possible that some tires, espe-

cially with larger punctures or dam-

age to the sidewall, cannot be sealed

completely.

Air pressure loss in the tire may

adversely affect tire performance.

For this reason, you should avoid

abrupt steering or other driving

maneuvers, especially if the vehicle

is heavily loaded or if a trailer is in

use.

The Tire Mobility Kit is not designed

or intended as a permanent tire

repair method and is to be used for

one tire only.

This instruction shows you step by

step how to temporarily seal the

puncture simply and reliably.

Read the section "Notes on the safe

use of the Tire Mobility Kit".

Notes on the safe use of the Tire

Mobility Kit

• Park your car at the side of the

road so that you can work with the

Tire Mobility Kit away from moving

traffic.

• To be sure your vehicle will not

move, even when you're on fairly

level ground, always set your park-

ing brake.

• Only use the Tire Mobility Kit for

sealing/inflation passenger car tires.

Only punctured areas located with-

in the tread region of the tire can be

sealed using the tire mobility kit.

• Do not use on motorcycles, bicy-

cles or any other type of tires.

• When the tire and wheel are dam-

aged, do not use Tire Mobility Kit

for your safety.

• Use of the Tire Mobility Kit may not

be effective for tire damage larger

than approximately 0.24 in (6 mm).

Please contact the nearest

HYUNDAI dealership if the tire

cannot be made roadworthy with

the Tire Mobility Kit.

• Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit if a

tire is severely damaged by driving

run flat or with insufficient air pres-

sure.

• Do not remove any foreign objects

such as nails or screws that have

penetrated the tire.

• Provided the car is outdoors, leave

the engine running. Otherwise

operating the compressor may

eventually drain the car battery.

• Never leave the Tire Mobility Kit

unattended while it is being used.

• Do not leave the compressor run-

ning for more than 10 min. at a time

or it may overheat.

• Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit if

the ambient temperature is below

-22°F (-30°C).

Information Provided by:

627

What to do in an emergency

0. Speed restriction label

1. Sealant bottle and label with

speed restriction

2. Filling hose from sealant bottle to

wheel

3. Connectors and cable for the

power outlet direct connection

4. Holder for the sealant bottle

5. Compressor

6. On/off switch

7. Pressure gauge for displaying the

tire inflation pressure

8. Screw cap for reducing tire infla-

tion pressure

9. Hose to connect compressor and

sealant bottle or compressor and

wheel

Connectors, cable and connection

hose are stored in the compressor

housing.

Strictly follow the specified

sequence, otherwise the sealant

may escape under high pressure.

Components of the Tire Mobility Kit

OAM060015L

WARNING - Expired

sealant

Do not use the Tire sealant after

the sealant has expired (i.e.

pasted the expiration date on

the sealant container). This can

increase the risk of tire failure.

WARNING - Sealant

• Keep out of reach of children.

• Avoid contact with eyes.

• Do not swallow.

Information Provided by:

What to do in an emergency

286

Using the Tire Mobility Kit

1. Detach the speed restriction label

(0) from the sealant bottle (1), and

place it in a highly visible place

inside the vehicle such as on the

steering wheel to remind the driv-

er not to drive too fast.

2. Screw connection hose (9) onto

the connector of the sealant bottle.

3. Ensure that screw cap (8) is

closed.

4. Unscrew the valve cap from the

valve of the defective wheel and

screw filling hose (2) of the sealant

bottle onto the valve.

5. Insert the sealant bottle into the

housing (4) of the compressor so

that the bottle is upright.

6. Ensure that the compressor is

switched off, position 0.

7. Plug the compressor power cord

into the vehicle power outlet.

8. With the engine start/stop button

position on or ignition switch posi-

tion on, switch on the compressor

and let it run for approximately 5~7

minutes to fill the sealant up to

proper pressure (refer to the Tire

and Wheels, chapter 8). The infla-

tion pressure of the tire after filling

is unimportant and will be

checked/corrected later.

Be careful not to overinflate the

tire and stay away from the tire

when filling it.

9. Switch off the compressor.

10. Detach the hoses from the

sealant bottle connector and

from the tire valve.

Return the Tire Mobility Kit to its stor-

age location in the vehicle.

OYN069018

CAUTION - Tire pressure

Do not attempt to drive your

vehicle if the tire pressure is

below 200kpa (29 PSI). This

could result in an accident due

to sudden tire failure.

WARNING - Carbon

monoxide

Do not leave your vehicle run-

ning in a poorly ventilated area

for extended periods of time.

Carbon monoxide poisoning

and suffocation can occur.

Information Provided by:

629

What to do in an emergency

Distributing the sealant

11. Immediately drive approximately

4~6miles (7~10km or, about

10min) to evenly distribute the

sealant in the tire.

Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph

(80 km/h). If possible, do not fall

below a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h).

While driving, if you experience any

unusual vibration, ride disturbance or

noise, reduce your speed and drive

with caution until you can safely pull

off of the side of the road.

Call for road side service or towing.

When you use the Tire Mobility Kit,

the tire pressure sensors and wheel

may be damaged by sealant, remove

the sealant stained with tire pressure

sensors and wheel and inspect in

authorized dealer.

Checking the tire inflation pres-

sure

1. After driving approximately

4~6miles (7~10km or about

10min), stop at a safety location.

2. Connect connection hose (9) of

the compressor directly to the tire

valve.

3. Plug the compressor power cord

into the vehicle power outlet.

4. Adjust the tire inflation pressure to

the recomended tire inflation.

With the ignition swithched on,

proceed as follows.

- To increase the inflation pres-

sure : Switch on the compres-

sor, position I. To check the cur-

rent inflation pressure setting,

briefly switch off the compressor.

✽✽NOTICE

The pressure gauge may show high-

er than actual reading when the

compressor is running. To get an

accurate tire pressure, the compres-

sor needs to be turned off.

- To reduce the inflation pres-

sure: Loosen the screw cap (8)

on the compressor hose.

Information Provided by:

What to do in an emergency

306

Technical Data

System voltage: DC 12 V

Working voltage: DC 10 - 15 V

Amperage rating: max. 15 A

Suitable for use at temperatures:

-22 ~ +158°F (-30 ~ +70°C)

Max. working pressure:

6 bar (87 psi)

Size

Compressor: 6.7 x 5.9 x 2.4 in.

(170 x 150 x 60 mm)

Sealant bottle: 3.3 x ø 3.0 in.

(85 x ø 77 mm)

Compressor weight:

1.8 lbs (0.8 kg)

Sealant volume:

12.2 cu. in. (200 ml)

CAUTION - Tire pressure

sensor

When you use the Tire Mobility

Kit including sealant not

approved by HYUNDAI, the tire

pressure sensors may be dam-

aged by sealant. The sealant on

the tire pressure sensor and

wheel should be removed when

you replace the tire with a new

one and the tire pressure sen-

sors should be inspected by an

authorized dealer.

Information Provided by:

631

What to do in an emergency

TOWING

Towing service

If emergency towing is necessary, we

recommend having it done by an author-

ized Hyundai dealer or a commercial

tow-truck service. Proper lifting and tow-

ing procedures are necessary to prevent

damage to the vehicle. The use of wheel

dollies or flatbed is recommended.

It is acceptable to tow the vehicle with the

rear wheels on the ground (without dol-

lies) and the front wheels off the ground.

If any of the loaded wheels or suspen-

sion components are damaged or the

vehicle is being towed with the front

wheels on the ground, use a towing dolly

under the front wheels.

When being towed by a commercial tow

truck and wheel dollies are not used, the

front of the vehicle should always be lift-

ed, not the rear.

OMC045012

dolly

CAUTION

• Do not tow with sling-type equip-

ment. Use wheel lift or flatbed

equipment.

• Do not tow the vehicle backwards

with the front wheels on the

ground as this may cause dam-

age to the vehicle.

HXD02

HXD03

Information Provided by:

What to do in an emergency

326

When towing your vehicle in an emer-

gency without wheel dollies :

1. Set the ignition switch in the ACC posi-

tion.

2. Place the shift lever in N (Neutral).

3. Release the parking brake.

Removable towing hook

(if equipped)

1. Open the trunk lid/tailgate, and remove

the towing hook from the tool case.

2. Remove the hole cover pressing the

lower part of the cover on the bumper.

3. Install the towing hook by turning it

clockwise into the hole until it is fully

secured.

4. Remove the towing hook and install

the cover after use.

Emergency towing (if equipped)

If towing is necessary, we recommend

you to have it done by an authorized

Hyundai dealer or a commercial tow

truck service.

If towing service is not available in an

emergency, your vehicle may be temporar-

ily towed using a cable or chain secured to

the emergency towing hook attached to

the front (or under the rear) of the vehicle.

CAUTION

Failure to place the transaxle shift

lever in N (Neutral) may cause inter-

nal damage to the transaxle.

ORB060007

ORBC060008

Front

Rear

ORB060006

Information Provided by:

633

What to do in an emergency

Use extreme caution when towing the

vehicle. A driver must be in the vehicle to

steer it and operate the brakes.

Towing in this manner may be done only

on hard-surfaced roads for a short dis-

tance and at low speeds. Also, the

wheels, axles, power train, steering and

brakes must all be in good condition.

• Do not use the tow hooks to pull a vehi-

cle out of mud, sand or other condi-

tions from which the vehicle cannot be

driven out under its own power.

• Avoid towing a vehicle heavier than the

vehicle doing the towing.

• The drivers of both vehicles should

communicate with each other frequent-

ly.

• Before emergency towing, check that

the hook is not broken or damaged.

• Fasten the towing cable or chain

securely to the hook.

• Do not jerk the hook. Apply steady and

even force.

• To avoid damaging the hook, do not

pull from the side or at a vertical angle.

Always pull straight ahead.

CAUTION

• Attach a towing strap to the tow

hook.

• Using a portion of the vehicle

other than the tow hooks for tow-

ing may damage the body of your

vehicle.

• Use only a cable or chain specifi-

cally intended for use in towing

vehicles. Securely fasten the

cable or chain to the towing hook

provided.

WARNING

Use extreme caution when towing

the vehicle.

• Avoid sudden starts or erratic

driving maneuvers which would

place excessive stress on the

emergency towing hook and tow-

ing cable or chain. The hook and

towing cable or chain may break

and cause serious injury or dam-

age.

• If the disabled vehicle cannot be

moved, do not forcibly continue

the towing. Contact an authorized

Hyundai dealer or a commercial

tow truck service for assistance.

• Tow the vehicle as straight ahead

as possible.

• Keep away from the vehicle dur-

ing towing.

Information Provided by:

What to do in an emergency

346

• Use a towing strap less than 16 feet (5

m) long. Attach a white or red cloth

(about 12 inches (30 cm) wide) in the

middle of the strap for easy visibility.

• Drive carefully so that the towing strap

is not loosened during towing.

✽✽NOTICE

Emergency towing is not legal in all

states. Contact an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer and tow the vehicle.

Emergency towing precautions

• Turn the ignition switch to ACC so the

steering wheel isn’t locked.

• Place the transaxle shift lever in N

(Neutral).

• Release the parking bake.

• Press the brake pedal with more force

than normal since you will have

reduced brake performance.

• More steering effort will be required

because the power steering system

will be disabled.

• If you are driving down a long hill, the

brakes may overheat and brake per-

formance will be reduced. Stop often

and let the brakes cool off.

CAUTION - Automatic

transaxle

• If the car is being towed with all

four wheels on the ground, it can

be towed only from the front. Be

sure that the transaxle is in neu-

tral. Be sure the steering is

unlocked by placing the ignition

switch in the ACC position. A

driver must be in the towed vehi-

cle to operate the steering and

brakes.

• To avoid serious damage to the

automatic transaxle, limit the

vehicle speed to 10 mph (15 km/h)

and drive less than 1 mile (1.5

km) when towing.

• Before towing, check the auto-

matic transaxle fluid leak under

your vehicle. If the automatic

transaxle fluid is leaking, a

flatbed equipment or towing dolly

must be used.

OTD069011

Information Provided by:

Engine compartment / 7-2

Maintenance services / 7-3

Owner maintenance / 7-4

Scheduled maintenance service / 7-6

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items / 7-19

Engine oil / 7-22

Engine coolant / 7-23

Brake/clutch fluid / 7-26

Washer fluid / 7-27

Parking brake / 7-27

Air cleaner / 7-28

Climate control air filter / 7-29

Wiper blades / 7-31

Battery / 7-34

Tires and wheels / 7-37

Fuses / 7-51

Light bulbs / 7-60

Appearance care / 7-70

Emission control system / 7-76

California perchlorate notice / 7-79

Maintenance

Information Provided by:

Maintenance

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

ORB070100

* The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

1. Engine coolant reservoir

2. Windshield washer fluid reservoir

3. Radiator cap

4. Engine oil filler cap

5. Engine oil dipstick

6. Brake/clutch fluid reservoir

7. Air cleaner

8. Fuse box

9. Positive battery terminal

10. Negative battery terminal

* : if equipped

Information Provided by:

Maintenance

MAINTENANCE SERVICES

You should exercise the utmost care to

prevent damage to your vehicle and

injury to yourself whenever performing

any maintenance or inspection proce-

dures.

Should you have any doubts concerning

the inspection or servicing of your vehi-

cle, we strongly recommend that you

have an authorized HYUNDAI dealer

perform this work.

An authorized HYUNDAI dealer has fac-

tory-trained technicians and genuine

HYUNDAI parts to service your vehicle

properly. For expert advice and quality

service, see an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer.

Inadequate, incomplete or insufficient

servicing may result in operational prob-

lems with your vehicle that could lead to

vehicle damage, an accident, or person-

al injury.

Owner’s responsibility

✽✽NOTICE

Maintenance Service and Record

Retention are the owner's responsibility.

You should retain documents that show

proper maintenance has been performed

on your vehicle in accordance with the

scheduled maintenance service charts

shown on the following pages. You need

this information to establish your compli-

ance with the servicing and maintenance

requirements of your vehicle warranties.

Detailed warranty information is provided

in your Owner’s Handbook & Warranty

Information booklet.

Repairs and adjustments required as a

result of improper maintenance or a lack

of required maintenance are not covered.

We recommend you have your vehicle

maintained and repaired by an author-

ized HYUNDAI dealer. An authorized

HYUNDAI dealer meets HYUNDAI’s high

service quality standards and receives

technical support from HYUNDAI in

order to provide you with a high level of

service satisfaction.

Owner maintenance precautions

Improper or incomplete service may

result in problems. This section gives

instructions only for the maintenance

items that are easy to perform.

As explained earlier in this section, sev-

eral procedures can be done only by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer with special

tools.

✽✽NOTICE

Improper owner maintenance during the

warranty period may affect warranty

coverage. For details, read the separate

Owner’s Handbook & Warranty

Information booklet provided with the

vehicle. If you're unsure about any serv-

icing or maintenance procedure, have it

done by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Information Provided by:

Maintenance

The following lists are vehicle checks and

inspections that should be performed by

the owner or an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer at the frequencies indicated to

help ensure safe, dependable operation

of your vehicle.

Any adverse conditions should be

brought to the attention of your dealer as

soon as possible.

These Owner Maintenance Checks are

generally not covered by warranties and

you may be charged for labor, parts and

lubricants used.

Owner maintenance schedule

When you stop for fuel:

• Check the engine oil level.

• Check coolant level in coolant reser-

voir.

• Check the windshield washer fluid

level.

• Look for low or under-inflated tires.

• Check the radiator and condenser.

Check if the front of the radiator and

condenser are clean and not blocked

with leaves, dirt or insects etc.

If any of the above parts are extremely

dirty or you are not sure of their condi-

tion, take your vehicle to an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

WARNING - Maintenance

work

• Performing maintenance work on

a vehicle can be dangerous. You

can be seriously injured while

performing some maintenance

procedures. If you lack sufficient

knowledge and experience or the

proper tools and equipment to do

the work, have it done by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

• Working under the hood with the

engine running is dangerous. It

becomes even more dangerous

when you wear jewelry or loose

clothing. These can become

entangled in moving parts and

result in injury. Therefore, if you

must run the engine while work-

ing under the hood, make certain

that you remove all jewelry (espe-

cially rings, bracelets, watches,

and necklaces) and all neckties,

scarves, and similar loose cloth-

ing before getting near the

engine or cooling fans.

OWNER MAINTENANCE

WARNING

Be careful when checking your

engine coolant level when the

engine is hot. Scalding hot coolant

and steam may blow out under

pressure. This could cause burns

or other serious injury.

Information Provided by:

Maintenance

While operating your vehicle:

• Note any changes in the sound of the

exhaust or any smell of exhaust fumes

in the vehicle.

• Check for vibrations in the steering

wheel. Notice any increased steering

effort or looseness in the steering

wheel, or change in its straight-ahead

position.

• Notice if your vehicle constantly turns

slightly or “pulls” to one side when trav-

eling on smooth, level road.

• When stopping, listen and check for

unusual sounds, pulling to one side,

increased brake pedal travel or “hard-

to-push” brake pedal.

• If any slipping or changes in the oper-

ation of your transaxle occurs, check

the transaxle fluid level.

• Check automatic transaxle P (Park)

function.

• Check parking brake.

• Check for fluid leaks under your vehicle

(water dripping from the air condition-

ing system during or after use is nor-

mal).

At least monthly:

• Check coolant level in the engine

coolant reservoir.

• Check the operation of all exterior

lights, including the stoplights, turn sig-

nals and hazard warning flashers.

• Check the inflation pressures of all

tires including the spare (if equipped).

At least twice a year

(i.e., every Spring and Fall):

• Check radiator, heater and air condi-

tioning hoses for leaks or damage.

• Check windshield washer spray and

wiper operation. Clean wiper blades

with clean cloth dampened with wash-

er fluid.

• Check headlight alignment.

• Check muffler, exhaust pipes, shields

and clamps.

• Check the lap/shoulder belts for wear

and function.

• Check for worn tires and loose wheel

lug nuts.

At least once a year:

• Clean body and door drain holes.

• Lubricate door hinges and checks, and

hood hinges.

• Lubricate door and hood locks and

latches.

• Lubricate door rubber weatherstrips.

• Check the air conditioning system.

• Inspect and lubricate automatic

transaxle linkage and controls.

• Clean battery and terminals.

• Check the brake fluid level.

Information Provided by:

Maintenance

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE SERVICE

Follow Normal Maintenance Schedule if

the vehicle is usually operated where

none of the following conditions apply. If

any of the following conditions apply, fol-

low Maintenance Under Severe Usage

Conditions.

• Repeated short distance driving.

• Driving in dusty conditions or sandy

areas.

• Extensive use of brakes.

• Driving in areas where salt or other

corrosive materials are being used.

• Driving on rough or muddy roads.

• Driving in mountainous areas.

• Extended periods of idling or low

speed operation.

• Driving for a prolonged period in cold

temperatures and/or extremely humid

climates.

• More than 50% driving in heavy city

traffic during hot weather above 90°F

(32°C).

If your vehicle is operated under the

above conditions, you should inspect,

replace or refill more frequently than the

following Normal Maintenance Schedule.

After 120 months or 150,000 miles

(240,000 km) continue to follow the pre-

scribed maintenance intervals.

Information Provided by:

Maintenance

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE

7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 6 months

❑ Rotate tires

❑ Inspect battery condition

❑Inspect air cleaner filter

❑Inspect vacuum hose

❑Replace engine oil and filter

(7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)

❑Add fuel additive *1

(7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)

The following maintenance services must be performed to ensure good emission control and performance. Keep receipts for all

vehicle emission services to protect your warranty. Where both mileage and time are shown, the frequency of service is deter-

mined by whichever occurs first.

*1 : If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of addi-

tive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized

HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not

mix other additives.

❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.

15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months

❑ Rotate tires

❑ Inspect battery condition

❑Inspect air cleaner filter

❑Inspect vacuum hose

❑Inspect air conditioning refrigerant

❑Inspect brake hoses and lines

❑Inspect drive shafts and boots

❑Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler

❑Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers

❑Inspect rear brake disc/pads (if equipped)

(Continued)

❑Inspect rear brake drums/linings (if equipped)

❑Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint,

upper arm ball joint

❑Inspect suspension mounting bolts

❑Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)

❑Replace engine oil and filter

(15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)

❑Add fuel additive *1

(15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)

Information Provided by:

Maintenance

30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months

❑Rotate tires

❑Inspect battery condition

❑Inspect vacuum hose

❑Inspect air conditioning refrigerant

❑Inspect brake hoses and lines

❑Inspect drive shafts and boots

❑Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler

❑Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers

❑Inspect rear brake disc/pads (if equipped)

❑Inspect rear brake drums/linings (if equipped)

❑Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint,

upper arm ball joint

❑Inspect suspension mounting bolts

(Continued)

22,500 miles (36,000 km) or 18 months

❑ Rotate tires

❑ Inspect battery condition

❑Inspect air cleaner filter

❑Inspect vacuum hose

❑Replace engine oil and filter

(22,500 miles (36,000 km) or 36 months)

❑Add fuel additive *1

(22,500 miles (36,000 km) or 36 months)

*1 : If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive

is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized

HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not

mix other additives.

*2 : Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance free

but periodic inspection is recommended for this maintenance sched-

ule depends on fuel quality. If there are some important safety matters

like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of power, hard starting problem

etc, replace the fuel filter immediately regardless of maintenance

schedule and consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for details.

❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

(Continued)

❑Inspect brake/clutch (if equipped) fluid

❑Inspect fuel filter *2

❑Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections

❑Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *2

❑Inspect parking brake

❑Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap

❑Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)

❑Replace air cleaner filter

❑Replace engine oil and filter

(30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 48 months)

❑Add fuel additive *1

(30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 48 months)

Information Provided by:

Maintenance

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

37,500 miles (60,000 km) or 30 months

❑Rotate tires

❑Inspect battery condition

❑Inspect air cleaner filter

❑Inspect vacuum hose

❑Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped)

❑Replace engine oil and filter

(37,500 miles (60,000 km) or 60 months)

❑Add fuel additive *1

(37,500 miles (60,000 km) or 60 months)

45,000 miles (72,000 km) or 36 months

❑Rotate tires

❑Inspect battery condition

❑Inspect air cleaner filter

❑Inspect vacuum hose

❑Inspect air conditioning refrigerant

❑Inspect brake hoses and lines

❑Inspect drive shafts and boots

❑Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler

❑Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers

❑Inspect rear brake disc/pads (if equipped)

❑Inspect rear brake drums/linings (if equipped)

❑Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint,

upper arm ball joint

❑Inspect suspension mounting bolts

❑Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)

❑Replace engine oil and filter

(45,000 miles (72,000 km) or 72 months)

❑Add fuel additive *1

(45,000 miles (72,000 km) or 72 months)

*1 : If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of addi-

tive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized

HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not

mix other additives.

❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.

Information Provided by:

Maintenance

107

60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months

❑Rotate tires

❑Inspect battery condition

❑Inspect vacuum hose

❑Inspect air conditioning refrigerant

❑Inspect brake hoses and lines

❑Inspect drive shafts and boots

❑Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler

❑Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers

❑Inspect rear brake disc/pads (if equipped)

❑Inspect rear brake drums/linings (if equipped)

❑Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint,

upper arm ball joint

❑Inspect suspension mounting bolts

❑Inspect brake/clutch (if equipped) fluid

(Continued)

❑Inspect fuel filter *2

❑Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections

❑Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *2

❑Inspect parking brake

❑Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap

❑Inspect drive belts *3

(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months

after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)

❑Inspect valve clearance

(Every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months)

❑Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)

❑Replace air cleaner filter

❑Replace engine oil and filter (60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 96 months)

❑Add fuel additive *1

(60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 96 months)

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

52,500 miles (84,000 km) or 42 months

❑Rotate tires

❑Inspect battery condition

❑Inspect air cleaner filter

❑Inspect vacuum hose

❑Replace engine oil and filter

(52,500 miles (84,000 km) or 84 months)

❑Add fuel additive *1

(52,500 miles (84,000 km) or 84 months)

*1 : If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive

is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized

HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not

mix other additives.

*2 : Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance free

but periodic inspection is recommended for this maintenance sched-

ule depends on fuel quality. If there are some important safety matters

like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of power, hard starting problem

etc, replace the fuel filter immediately regardless of maintenance

schedule and consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for details.

*3 : The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is

reduced excessively.

❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.

Information Provided by:

711

Maintenance

67,500 miles (108,000 km) or 54 months

❑Rotate tires

❑Inspect battery condition

❑Inspect air cleaner filter

❑Inspect vacuum hose

❑Replace engine oil and filter

(67,500 miles (108,000 km) or 108 months)

❑Add fuel additive *1

(67,500 miles (108,000 km) or 108 months)

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

*1 : If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of addi-

tive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized

HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not

mix other additives.

*3 : The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is

reduced excessively.

❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.

75,000 miles (120,000 km) or 60 months

❑Rotate tires

❑Inspect battery condition

❑Inspect air cleaner filter

❑Inspect vacuum hose

❑Inspect air conditioning refrigerant

❑Inspect brake hoses and lines

❑Inspect drive shafts and boots

❑Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler

❑Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers

❑Inspect rear brake disc/pads (if equipped)

❑Inspect rear brake drums/linings (if equipped)

❑Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint,

upper arm ball joint

❑Inspect suspension mounting bolts

(Continued)

❑Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped)

❑Inspect drive belts *3

(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months

after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)

❑Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)

❑Replace engine oil and filter

(75,000 miles (120,000 km) or 120 months)

❑Add fuel additive *1

(75,000 miles (120,000 km) or 120 months)

Information Provided by:

Maintenance

127

90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 72 months

❑Rotate tires

❑Inspect battery condition

❑Inspect vacuum hose

❑Inspect air conditioning refrigerant

❑Inspect brake hoses and lines

❑Inspect drive shafts and boots

❑Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler

❑Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers

❑Inspect rear brake disc/pads (if equipped)

❑Inspect rear brake drums/linings (if equipped)

❑Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint,

upper arm ball joint

❑Inspect suspension mounting bolts

❑Inspect brake/clutch (if equipped) fluid

(Continued)

❑Inspect fuel filter *2

❑Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections

❑Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *2

❑Inspect parking brake

❑Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap

❑Inspect drive belts *3

(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months

after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)

❑Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)

❑Replace air cleaner filter

❑Replace engine oil and filter

(90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 144 months)

❑Add fuel additive *1

(90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 144 months)

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

82,500 miles (132,000 km) or 66 months

❑Rotate tires

❑Inspect battery condition

❑Inspect air cleaner filter

❑Inspect vacuum hose

❑Replace engine oil and filter

(82,500 miles (132,000 km) or 132 months)

❑Add fuel additive *1

(82,500 miles (132,000 km) or 132 months)

*1: If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of addi-

tive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized

HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not

mix other additives.

*2: Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance free

but periodic inspection is recommended for this maintenance sched-

ule depends on fuel quality. If there are some important safety mat-

ters like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of power, hard starting prob-

lem etc, replace the fuel filter immediately regardless of maintenance

schedule and consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for details.

*3: The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is

reduced excessively.

❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.

Information Provided by:

713

Maintenance

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

97,500 miles (156,000 km) or 78 months

❑Rotate tires

❑Inspect battery condition

❑Inspect air cleaner filter

❑Inspect vacuum hose

❑ Replace spark plugs (iridium plated, every 97,500 miles)

❑Replace engine oil and filter

(97,500 miles (156,000 km) or 156 months)

❑Add fuel additive *1

(97,500 miles (156,000 km) or 156 months)

105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 84 months

❑Rotate tires

❑Inspect battery condition

❑Inspect air cleaner filter

❑Inspect vacuum hose

❑Inspect air conditioning refrigerant

❑Inspect brake hoses and lines

❑Inspect drive shafts and boots

❑Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler

❑Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers

❑Inspect rear brake disc/pads (if equipped)

❑Inspect rear brake drums/linings (if equipped)

❑Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint,

upper arm ball joint

❑Inspect suspension mounting bolts

(Continued)

*1 : If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of addi-

tive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized

HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not

mix other additives.

*3 : The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is

reduced excessively.

❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.

(Continued)

❑Inspect drive belts *3

(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months

after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)

❑Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)

❑Replace engine oil and filter

(105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 168 months)

❑Add fuel additive *1

(105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 168 months)

Information Provided by:

Maintenance

(Continued)

❑Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections

❑Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *2

❑Inspect parking brake

❑Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap

❑Inspect drive belts *3

(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months

after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)

❑Inspect valve clearance

(Every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months)

❑Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)

❑Replace air cleaner filter

❑Replace engine oil and filter

(120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 192 months)

❑Replace coolant (First, 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 120 months

after every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months)

❑Add fuel additive *1 (120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 192 months)

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

112,500 miles (180,000 km) or 90 months

❑Rotate tires

❑Inspect battery condition

❑Inspect air cleaner filter

❑Inspect vacuum hose

❑Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped)

❑Replace engine oil and filter

(112,500 miles (180,000 km) or 180 months)

❑Add fuel additive *1

(112,500 miles (180,000 km) or 180 months)

*1: If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of addi-

tive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized

HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not

mix other additives.

*2: Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance free

but periodic inspection is recommended for this maintenance sched-

ule depends on fuel quality. If there are some important safety mat-

ters like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of power, hard starting prob-

lem etc, replace the fuel filter immediately regardless of maintenance

schedule and consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for details.

*3: The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is

reduced excessively.

❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.

120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 96 months

❑Rotate tires

❑Inspect battery condition

❑Inspect vacuum hose

❑Inspect air conditioning refrigerant

❑Inspect brake hoses and lines

❑Inspect drive shafts and boots

❑Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler

❑Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers

❑Inspect rear brake disc/pads (if equipped)

❑Inspect rear brake drums/linings (if equipped)

❑Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint,

upper arm ball joint

❑Inspect suspension mounting bolts

❑Inspect brake/clutch (if equipped) fluid

❑Inspect fuel filter *2

(Continued)

Information Provided by:

715

Maintenance

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

127,500 miles (204,000 km) or 102 months

❑Rotate tires

❑Inspect battery condition

❑Inspect air cleaner filter

❑Inspect vacuum hose

❑Replace engine oil and filter

(127,500 miles (204,000 km) or 204 months)

❑Add fuel additive *1

(127,500 miles (204,000 km) or 204 months)

*1 : If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of addi-

tive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized

HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not

mix other additives.

*3 : The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is

reduced excessively.

❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.

135,000 miles (216,000 km) or 108 months

❑Rotate tires

❑Inspect battery condition

❑Inspect air cleaner filter

❑Inspect vacuum hose

❑Inspect air conditioning refrigerant

❑Inspect brake hoses and lines

❑Inspect drive shafts and boots

❑Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler

❑Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers

❑Inspect rear brake disc/pads (if equipped)

❑Inspect rear brake drums/linings (if equipped)

❑Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint,

upper arm ball joint

❑Inspect suspension mounting bolts

(Continued)

❑Inspect drive belts *3

(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months

after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)

❑Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)

❑Replace engine oil and filter

(135,000 miles (216,000 km) or 216 months)

❑Add fuel additive *1

(135,000 miles (216,000 km) or 216 months)

Information Provided by:

Maintenance

167

150,000 miles (240,000 km) or 120 months

❑Rotate tires

❑Inspect battery condition

❑Inspect vacuum hose

❑Inspect air conditioning refrigerant

❑Inspect brake hoses and lines

❑Inspect drive shafts and boots

❑Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler

❑Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers

❑Inspect rear brake disc/pads (if equipped)

❑Inspect rear brake drums/linings (if equipped)

❑Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint,

upper arm ball joint

❑Inspect suspension mounting bolts

❑Inspect brake/clutch (if equipped) fluid

❑Inspect fuel filter *2

(Continued)

❑Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections

❑Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *2

❑Inspect parking brake

❑Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap

❑Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped)

❑Inspect drive belts *3

(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months

after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)

❑Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)

❑Replace air cleaner filter

❑Replace engine oil and filter

(150,000 miles (240,000 km) or 240 months)

❑Replace coolant (First, 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 120 months

after every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months)

❑Add fuel additive *1

(150,000 miles (240,000 km) or 240 months)

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

142,500 miles (228,000 km) or 114 months

❑Rotate tires

❑Inspect battery condition

❑Inspect air cleaner filter

❑Inspect vacuum hose

❑Replace engine oil and filter

(142,500 miles (228,000 km) or 228 months)

❑Add fuel additive *1

(142,500 miles (228,000 km) or 228 months)

*1: If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of addi-

tive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized

HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not

mix other additives.

*2: Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance free

but periodic inspection is recommended for this maintenance sched-

ule depends on fuel quality. If there are some important safety mat-

ters like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of power, hard starting prob-

lem etc, replace the fuel filter immediately regardless of maintenance

schedule and consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for details.

*3: The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is

reduced excessively.

❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.

Information Provided by:

717

Maintenance

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

No check, No service required

❑Automatic transaxle fluid (if equipped)

Information Provided by:

Maintenance

187

MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS

SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS

A - Repeatedly driving short distance of less than 5 miles (8 km) in nor-

mal temperature or less than 10 miles (16 km) in freezing temperature

B - Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long distances

C - Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt- spread

roads

D - Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in very

cold weather

E - Driving in sandy areas

F - Driving in heavy traffic area over 90°F (32°C)

G- Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain road

H - Towing a Trailer, or using a camper, or roof rack

I - Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use or vehicle towing

J - Driving over 106 mph (170 km/h)

K - Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions

The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions. Refer to the chart

below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.

R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary

MAINTENANCE ITEM MAINTENANCE

OPERATION MAINTENANCE INTERVALS DRIVING CONDITION

ENGINE OIL AND FILTER REVERY 3,750 MILES (6,000 KM) OR 6 MONTHS A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K

AIR CLEANER FILTER RMORE FREQUENTLY C, E

SPARK PLUGS RMORE FREQUENTLY B, H

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID REVERY 60,000 MILES (96,000 KM) A, C, E, F, G, I

MANUAL TRANSAXLE FLUID REVERY 75,000 MILES (120,000 KM) C, D, E, F, G, H, I

FRONT BRAKE DISC/PADS, CALIPERS IMORE FREQUENTLY C, D, G, H

REAR BRAKE DISC/PADS IMORE FREQUENTLY C, D, G, F

REAR BRAKE DRUMS/LININGS IMORE FREQUENTLY C, D, G, F

PARKING BRAKE IMORE FREQUENTLY C, D, G, H

STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE & BOOTS/

LOWER ARM BALL JOINT, UPPER ARM BALL JOINT IMORE FREQUENTLY C, D, E, F, G, H, I

DRIVE SHAFTS AND BOOTS IEVERY 7,500 MILES (12,000 KM) OR 6 MONTHS C, D, E, F, G, H, I

CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER

(FOR EVAPORATOR AND BLOWER UNIT) RMORE FREQUENTLY C, E

Information Provided by:

719

Maintenance

EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS

Engine oil and filter

The engine oil and filter should be

changed at the intervals specified in the

maintenance schedule. If the car is being

driven in severe conditions, more fre-

quent oil and filter changes are required.

Drive belts

Inspect all drive belts for evidence of cuts,

cracks, excessive wear or oil saturation

and replace if necessary. Drive belts

should be checked periodically for proper

tension and adjusted as necessary.

Fuel filter

A clogged filter can limit the speed at

which the vehicle may be driven, damage

the emission system and cause multiple

issues such as hard starting. If an exces-

sive amount of foreign matter accumu-

lates in the fuel tank, the filter may

require replacement more frequently.

After installing a new filter, run the engine for

several minutes, and check for leaks at the

connections. Fuel filters should be installed

by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Fuel lines, fuel hoses and con-

nections

Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and con-

nections for leakage and damage. Have an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer replace any

damaged or leaking parts immediately.

Vapor hose and fuel filler cap

The vapor hose and fuel filler cap should

be inspected at those intervals specified

in the maintenance schedule. Make sure

that a new vapor hose or fuel filler cap is

correctly replaced.

Vacuum crankcase ventilation

hoses

Inspect the surface of hoses for evidence

of heat and/or mechanical damage. Hard

and brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts,

abrasions, and excessive swelling indi-

cate deterioration. Particular attention

should be paid to examine those hose

surfaces nearest to high heat sources,

such as the exhaust manifold.

Inspect the hose routing to assure that

the hoses do not come in contact with

any heat source, sharp edges or moving

component which might cause heat dam-

age or mechanical wear.

Inspect all hose connections, such as

clamps and couplings, to make sure they

are secure, and that no leaks are pres-

ent. Hoses should be replaced immedi-

ately if there is any evidence of deterio-

ration or damage.

Air cleaner filter

A Genuine HYUNDAI air cleaner filter is

recommended when the filter is replaced.

Spark plugs

Make sure to install new spark plugs of

the correct heat range.

Cooling system

Check cooling system components, such

as radiator, coolant reservoir, hoses and

connections for leakage and damage.

Replace any damaged parts.

Coolant

The coolant should be changed at the inter-

vals specified in the maintenance schedule.

Information Provided by:

Maintenance

207

Automatic transaxle fluid

(if equipped)

Automatic transaxle fluid should not be

checked under normal usage conditions.

But in severe conditions, the fluid should

be changed at an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer in accordance to the scheduled

maintenance at the beginning of this

chapter.

✽✽NOTICE

Automatic transaxle fluid color is basi-

cally red.

As the vehicle is driven, the automatic

transaxle fluid will begin to look darker.

It is normal condition and you should

not judge the need to replace the fluid

based upon the changed color.

Manual transaxle fluid

(if equipped)

Inspect the manual transaxle fluid

according to the maintenance schedule.

Brake hoses and lines

Visually check for proper installation,

chafing, cracks, deterioration and any

leakage. Replace any deteriorated or

damaged parts immediately.

Brake/clutch fluid

Check brake fluid level in the brake fluid

reservoir. The level should be between

“MIN” and “MAX” marks on the side of

the reservoir. Use only hydraulic brake

fluid conforming to DOT 3 or DOT 4

specification.

Valve clearance

Inspect excessive valve noise and/or

engine vibration and adjust if necessary.

An authorized HYUNDAI dealer should

perform the operation.

Parking brake

Inspect the parking brake system includ-

ing the parking brake pedal and cables.

Brake discs, pads, calipers and

rotors

Check the pads for excessive wear, discs

for run out and wear, and calipers for fluid

leakage.

Exhaust pipe and muffler

Visually inspect the exhaust pipes, muf-

fler and hangers for cracks, deterioration,

or damage. Start the engine and listen

carefully for any exhaust gas leakage.

Tighten connections or replace parts as

necessary.

Suspension mounting bolts

Check the suspension connections for

looseness or damage. Retighten to the

specified torque.

CAUTION

The use of a non-specified fluid

could result in transaxle malfunc-

tion and failure.

Use only specified automatic

transaxle fluid. (Refer to

“Recommended lubricants and

capacities” in section 8.)

Information Provided by:

721

Maintenance

Steering gear box, linkage &

boots/lower arm ball joint

With the vehicle stopped and engine off,

check for excessive free-play in the

steering wheel.

Check the linkage for bends or damage.

Check the dust boots and ball joints for

deterioration, cracks, or damage.

Replace any damaged parts.

Drive shafts and boots

Check the drive shafts, boots and clamps

for cracks, deterioration, or damage.

Replace any damaged parts and, if nec-

essary, repack the grease.

Air conditioning refrigerant

Check the air conditioning lines and con-

nections for leakage and damage.

Information Provided by:

Maintenance

227

ENGINE OIL

Checking the engine oil level

1. Be sure the vehicle is on level ground.

2. Start the engine and allow it to reach

normal operating temperature.

3. Turn the engine off and wait for a few

minutes (about 5 minutes) for the oil to

return to the oil pan.

4. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean, and

re-insert it fully.

5. Pull the dipstick out again and check

the level. The level should be between

F and L.

If it is near or at L, add enough oil to bring

the level to F. Do not overfill.

Use a funnel to help prevent oil from

being spilled on engine components.

Use only the specified engine oil. (Refer

to “Recommended lubricants and capaci-

ties” in section 8.)

ORB071004N

WARNING - Radiator hose

Be very careful not to touch the

radiator hose when checking or

adding the engine oil as it may be

hot enough to burn you.

CAUTION

• Do not overfill with engine oil.

Engine damage may result.

• Do not spill engine oil, when adding

or changing engine oil. If you spill

engine oil in the engine room, wipe

it off immediately.

ORB071003N

Information Provided by:

723

Maintenance

Changing the engine oil and filter

Have engine oil and filter changed by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer according to

the Maintenance Schedule at the begin-

ning of this section.

The high-pressure cooling system has a

reservoir filled with year-round antifreeze

coolant. The reservoir is filled at the factory.

Check the antifreeze protection and

coolant level at least once a year, at the

beginning of the winter season, and

before traveling to a colder climate.

ENGINE COOLANT

CALIFORNIA

PROPOSI-

TION 65 WARNING

Engine oil contains chemicals

known to the State of California to

cause cancer, birth defects, and

reproductive harm.

Used engine oil may cause irrita-

tion or cancer of the skin if left in

contact with the skin for prolonged

periods of time. Used engine oil

contains chemicals that have

caused cancer in laboratory ani-

mals. Always protect your skin by

washing your hands thoroughly

with soap and warm water as soon

as possible after handling used oil.

Information Provided by:

Maintenance

247

Checking the coolant level

Check the condition and connections of

all cooling system hoses and heater

hoses. Replace any swollen or deterio-

rated hoses.

The coolant level should be filled

between F and L marks on the side of the

coolant reservoir when the engine is cool.

If the coolant level is low, add enough

distilled (deionized) or soft water to pro-

vide protection against freezing and cor-

rosion. Bring the level to F, but do not

overfill. If frequent additions are required,

see an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for a

cooling system inspection.

ORB071005N

(Continued)

• Even if the engine is not operat-

ing, do not remove the radiator

cap or the drain plug while the

engine and radiator are hot. Hot

coolant and steam may still blow

out under pressure, causing seri-

ous injury.

WARNING

Removing radiator

cap

• Never attempt to remove the radi-

ator cap while the engine is oper-

ating or hot. Doing so might lead

to cooling system and engine

damage and could result in seri-

ous personal injury from escap-

ing hot coolant or steam.

• Turn the engine off and wait until it

cools down. Use extreme care

when removing the radiator cap.

Wrap a thick towel around it, and

turn it counterclockwise slowly to

the first stop. Step back while the

pressure is released from the cool-

ing system. When you are sure all

the pressure has been released,

press down on the cap, using a

thick towel, and continue turning

counterclockwise to remove it.

(Continued)

WARNING

The electric motor

(cooling fan) is con-

trolled by engine

coolant temperature,

refrigerant pressure

and vehicle speed. It may some-

times operate even when the

engine is not running. Use extreme

caution when working near the

blades of the cooling fan so that

you are not injured by a rotating fan

blades. As the engine coolant tem-

perature decreases, the electric

motor will automatically shut off.

This is a normal condition. If your

vehicle is equipped with GDI, the

electric motor (cooling fan) may

operate until you disconnect the

negative battery cable.

Information Provided by:

725

Maintenance

Recommended engine coolant

• When adding coolant, use only deion-

ized water or soft water for your vehicle

and never mix hard water in the

coolant filled at the factory. An improp-

er coolant mixture can result in serious

malfunction or engine damage.

• The engine in your vehicle has aluminum

engine parts and must be protected by

an ethylene-glycol-based coolant to pre-

vent corrosion and freezing.

• DO NOT USE alcohol or methanol

coolant or mix them with the specified

coolant.

• Do not use a solution that contains

more than 60% antifreeze or less than

35% antifreeze, which would reduce

the effectiveness of the solution.

For mixture percentage, refer to the fol-

lowing table.

Changing the coolant

Have coolant changed by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer according to the

Maintenance Schedule at the beginning

of this section.

WARNING - Coolant

• Do not use radiator coolant or

antifreeze in the washer fluid

reservoir.

• Radiator coolant can severely

obscure visibility when sprayed

on the windshield and may cause

loss of vehicle control or damage

to paint and body trim.

CAUTION

Put a thick cloth or fabric around

the radiator cap before refilling the

coolant in order to prevent the

coolant from overflowing into

engine parts such as generator.

WARNING

Radiator cap

Do not remove the radiator cap

when the engine and radiator are

hot. Scalding hot coolant and

steam may blow out under pres-

sure causing serious injury.

ORBC072006

5°F (-15°C) 35 65

-13°F (-25°C) 40 60

-31°F (-35°C) 50 50

-49°F (-45°C) 60 40

Ambient

Temperature

Mixture Percentage (volume)

Antifreeze Water

Information Provided by:

Maintenance

267

BRAKE/CLUTCH FLUID

Checking the brake/clutch fluid

level

Check the fluid level in the reservoir peri-

odically. The fluid level should be

between MAX and MIN marks on the

side of the reservoir.

Before removing the reservoir cap and

adding brake/clutch fluid, clean the area

around the reservoir cap thoroughly to

prevent brake/clutch fluid contamination.

If the level is low, add fluid to the MAX

level. The level will fall with accumulated

mileage. This is a normal condition asso-

ciated with the wear of the brake linings.

If the fluid level is excessively low, have

the brake system or clutch (if equipped)

checked by an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer.

Use only the specified brake fluid. (Refer

to “Recommended lubricants or capaci-

ties” in section 8.)

Never mix different types of fluid.

WARNING - Brake/clutch

fluid

When changing and adding brake

fluid, handle it carefully. Do not let it

come in contact with your eyes. If

brake fluid should come in contact

with your eyes, immediately flush

them with a large quantity of fresh

tap water. Have your eyes examined

by a doctor as soon as possible.

WARNING - Loss of brake/

clutch fluid

In the event the brake system

requires frequent additions of fluid,

the vehicle should be inspected by

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

CAUTION

Do not allow brake fluid to contact

the vehicle's body paint, as paint

damage will result. Brake fluid,

which has been exposed to open air

for an extended time should never

be used as its quality cannot be

guaranteed. It should be disposed

of properly. Don't put in the wrong

kind of fluid. A few drops of miner-

al-based oil, such as engine oil, in

your brake system can damage

brake system parts.

ORBC070007

Information Provided by:

727

Maintenance

WASHER FLUID

Checking the washer fluid level

The reservoir is translucent so that you

can check the level with a quick visual

inspection.

Check the fluid level in the washer fluid

reservoir and add fluid if necessary. Plain

water may be used if washer fluid is not

available. However, use washer solvent

with antifreeze characteristics in cold cli-

mates to prevent freezing.

Checking the parking brake

Check the stroke of the parking brake by

counting the number of “clicks’’ heard

while fully applying it from the released

position. Also, the parking brake alone

should securely hold the vehicle on a fair-

ly steep grade. If the stroke is more or

less than specified, have the parking

brake adjusted by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Stroke : 6~8 “clicks’’ at a force of

44 lbs (20 kg, 196 N).

WARNING - Coolant

• Do not use radiator coolant or

antifreeze in the washer fluid

reservoir.

• Radiator coolant can severely

obscure visibility when sprayed

on the windshield and may cause

loss of vehicle control or damage

to paint and body trim.

• Windshield washer fluid agents

contain some amounts of alcohol

and can be flammable under cer-

tain circumstances. Do not allow

sparks or flame to contact the

washer fluid or the washer fluid

reservoir. Damage to the vehicle

or occupants could occur.

• Windshield washer fluid is poi-

sonous to humans and animals.

Do not drink and avoid contacting

windshield washer fluid. Serious

injury or death could occur.

ORBC070009 ORB050003

PARKING BRAKE

Information Provided by:

Maintenance

287

AIR CLEANER

Filter replacement

It must be replaced when necessary, and

should not be cleaned and reused.

You can clean the filter when inspecting

the air cleaner element.

1. Loosen the air cleaner cover attaching

clips and open the cover.

2. Wipe the inside of the air cleaner.

3. Replace the air cleaner filter.

4. Lock the cover with the cover attaching

clips.

ORB073010 ORB073011 ORB070012

Information Provided by:

729

Maintenance

Replace the filter according to the

Maintenance Schedule.

If the vehicle is operated in extremely

dusty or sandy areas, replace the ele-

ment more often than the usual recom-

mended intervals. (Refer to

“Maintenance under severe usage condi-

tions” in this section.)

Filter inspection

The climate control air filter should be

replaced according to the Maintenance

Schedule. If the vehicle is operated in

severely air-polluted cities or on dusty

rough roads for a long period, it should

be inspected more frequently and

replaced earlier. When you replace the

climate control air filter, replace it per-

forming the following procedure, and be

careful to avoid damaging other compo-

nents.

Filter replacement

1. Open the glove box and remove the

support strap (1).

CAUTION

• Do not drive with the air cleaner

removed; this will result in exces-

sive engine wear.

• When removing the air cleaner fil-

ter, be careful that dust or dirt

does not enter the air intake, or

damage may result.

• Use a HYUNDAI genuine part. Use

of non-genuine parts could dam-

age the air flow sensor and

engine.

CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER

ORB070060

Information Provided by:

Maintenance

307

2. With the glove box open, remove the

stoppers by turning them counter-

clockwise on both sides.

3. Remove the climate control air filter

cover while pressing the lock of the

cover.

4. Replace the climate control air filter.

5. Reassemble in the reverse order of

disassembly.

✽✽NOTICE

When replacing the climate control air

filter install it properly. Otherwise, the

system may produce noise and the effec-

tiveness of the filter may be reduced.

OYF079046ORB070014ORB070013

Information Provided by:

731

Maintenance

WIPER BLADES

Blade inspection

✽✽NOTICE

Commercial hot waxes applied by auto-

matic car washes have been known to

make the windshield difficult to clean.

Contamination of either the windshield or

the wiper blades with foreign matter can

reduce the effectiveness of the wind-

shield wipers. Common sources of con-

tamination are insects, tree sap, and hot

wax treatments used by some commer-

cial car washes. If the blades are not wip-

ing properly, clean both the window and

the blades with a good cleaner or mild

detergent, and rinse thoroughly with

clean water.

Blade replacement

When the wipers no longer clean ade-

quately, the blades may be worn or

cracked, and require replacement.

1JBA5122 CAUTION

To prevent damage to the wiper

blades, do not use gasoline,

kerosene, paint thinner, or other

solvents on or near them.

CAUTION

To prevent damage to the wiper

arms or other components, do not

attempt to move the wipers manual-

ly.

CAUTION

The use of a non-specified wiper

blade could result in wiper malfunc-

tion and failure.

Information Provided by:

Maintenance

327

Front windshield wiper blade

Type A

1. Raise the wiper arm and turn the wiper

blade assembly to expose the plastic

locking clip.

2. Compress the clip and slide the blade

assembly downward.

3. Lift it off the arm.

4. Install the blade assembly in the

reverse order of removal.

Front windshield wiper blade

Type B

1. Raise the wiper arm.

CAUTION

Do not allow the wiper arm to fall

against the windshield, since it may

chip or crack the windshield.

CAUTION

Do not allow the wiper arm to fall

against the windshield, since it may

chip or crack the windshield.

OLM079200 OLM079201 OHM078059

Information Provided by:

733

Maintenance

2. Lift up the wiper blade clip. Then pull

down the blade assembly and remove

it.

3. Install the new blade assembly in the

reverse order of removal.

Rear window wiper blade

(if equipped)

1. Raise the wiper arm and pull out the

wiper blade assembly.

2. Install the new blade assembly by

inserting the center part into the slot in

the wiper arm until it clicks into place.

3. Make sure the blade assembly is

installed firmly by trying to pull it slight-

ly.

To prevent damage to the wiper arms or

other components, have an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer replace the wiper

blade.

OYF079061

OYF079062

OHM078062 OHM078063

Information Provided by:

Maintenance

347

For best battery service

• Keep the battery securely mounted.

• Keep the battery top clean and dry.

• Keep the terminals and connections

clean, tight, and coated with petroleum

jelly or terminal grease.

• Rinse any spilled electrolyte from the

battery immediately with a solution of

water and baking soda.

• If the vehicle is not going to be used for

an extended time, disconnect the bat-

tery cables.

BATTERY

WARNING - Battery

dangers

Always read the following

instructions carefully when

handling a battery.

Keep lighted cigarettes and

all other flames or sparks

away from the battery.

Hydrogen, a highly com-

bustible gas, is always

present in battery cells and

may explode if ignited.

Keep batteries out of the

reach of children because

batteries contain highly

corrosive SULFURIC ACID.

Do not allow battery acid to

contact your skin, eyes,

clothing or paint finish.

If any electrolyte gets into

your eyes, flush your eyes

with clean water for at least

15 minutes and get immedi-

ate medical attention.

(Continued)

If electrolyte gets on your

skin, thoroughly wash the

contacted area. If you feel a

pain or a burning sensa-

tion, get medical attention

immediately.

Wear eye protection when

charging or working near a

battery. Always provide

ventilation when working in

an enclosed space.

An inappropriately disposed

battery can be harmful to

the environment and human

health. Dispose the battery

according to your local

law(s) or regulation.

The battery contains lead. Do

not dispose of it after use.

Please return the battery to

an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer to be recycled.

• When lifting a plastic-cased bat-

tery, excessive pressure on the

case may cause battery acid to

leak, resulting in personal injury.

Lift with a battery carrier or with

your hands on opposite corners.

(Continued)

ORB073016

Information Provided by:

735

Maintenance

Battery recharging

Your vehicle has a maintenance-free,

calcium-based battery.

If the battery becomes discharged in a

short time (because, for example the

headlights or interior lights were left on

while vehicle was not in use) jump start

the vehicle from another battery and run

the engine at least 20 minutes at idle

before driving. Do not turn off the engine

for 30 minutes total of idle and/or driving

as the battery may not have sufficient

recharge to start.

CALIFORNIA

PROPOSI-

TION 65 WARNING

Battery posts, terminals, and relat-

ed accessories contain lead and

lead compounds, chemicals known

to the State of California to cause

cancer, birth defects and reproduc-

tive harm. Batteries also contain

other chemicals known to the State

of California to cause cancer. Wash

hands after handling.

(Continued)

• Never attempt to recharge the

battery when the battery cables

are connected.

• The electrical ignition system

works with high voltage. Never

touch these components with the

engine running or the ignition

switched on.

Failure to follow the above warn-

ings can result in serious bodily

injury or death.

CAUTION

• When you don’t use the vehicle

for a long time in low temperature

area, separate the battery and

keep it indoors.

• Always charge the battery fully to

prevent battery case damage in

low temperature area.

• If you connect unauthorized elec-

tronic devices to the battery, the

battery may be discharged. Never

use unauthorized devices.

• Make sure the battery cap is

closed. If the battery cap is not

closed securely, it can malfunc-

tion because the electric compo-

nents are exposed to moisture.

WARNING

Separating the battery from the

vehicle should be done by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Information Provided by:

Maintenance

367

Reset items

Items should be reset after the battery

has been discharged or the battery has

been disconnected.

• Sunroof (See section 4)

• Trip computer (See section 4)

• Climate control system

(See section 4)

• Clock (See section 4)

• Audio (See section 4)

WARNING

• Before performing maintenance

or recharging the battery, turn off

all accessories and stop the

engine.

• The negative battery cable must

be removed first and installed

last when the battery is discon-

nected.

• Operation related to the battery

should be done by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

WARNING - Recharging

battery

When recharging the battery,

observe the following precautions:

• The battery must be removed

from the vehicle and placed in an

area with good ventilation.

• Do not allow cigarettes, sparks,

or flame near the battery.

• Watch the battery during charg-

ing, and stop or reduce the charg-

ing rate if the battery cells begin

gassing (boiling) violently or if

the temperature of the electrolyte

of any cell exceeds 120°F (49°C).

• Wear eye protection when check-

ing the battery during charging.

• Disconnect the battery charger in

the following order.

1. Turn off the battery charger main

switch.

2. Unhook the negative clamp from

the negative battery terminal.

3. Unhook the positive clamp from

the positive battery terminal.

Information Provided by:

737

Maintenance

CAUTION

• Underinflation also results in

excessive wear, poor handling

and reduced fuel economy.

Wheel deformation also is

possible. Keep your tire pres-

sures at the proper levels. If a

tire frequently needs refilling,

have it checked by an author-

ized HYUNDAI dealer.

• Overinflation produces a

harsh ride, excessive wear at

the center of the tire tread, and

a greater possibility of dam-

age from road hazards.

TIRES AND WHEELS

Tire care

For proper maintenance, safety, and

maximum fuel economy, you must

always maintain recommended tire

inflation pressures and stay within

the load limits and weight distribution

recommended for your vehicle.

Recommended cold tire inflation

pressures

All tire pressures (including the

spare) should be checked when the

tires are cold. “Cold Tires” mean the

vehicle has not been driven for at

least three hours or driven less than

one mile (1.6 km).

Recommended pressures must be

maintained for the best ride, vehicle

handling, and minimum tire wear.

For recommended inflation pressure,

refer to “Tire and wheels” in section 8.

All specifications (sizes and pres-

sures) can be found on a label

attached to the driver’s side center

pillar.

WARNING - Tire underin-

flation

Severe underinflation can lead

to severe heat build-up, causing

blowouts, tread separation and

other tire failures that can result

in the loss of vehicle control

leading to severe injury or

death. This risk is much higher

on hot days and when driving

for long periods at high speeds.

ORB070017

Information Provided by:

Maintenance

387

Checking tire inflation pressure

Check your tires once a month or

more.

Also, check the tire pressure of the

spare tire.

How to check

Use a good quality gage to check tire

pressure. You can not tell if your tires

are properly inflated simply by look-

ing at them. Radial tires may look

properly inflated even when they're

underinflated.

Check the tire's inflation pressure

when the tires are cold. - "Cold"

means your vehicle has been sitting

for at least three hours or driven no

more than 1 mile (1.6 km).

WARNING - Tire Inflation

Overinflation or underinflation

can reduce tire life, adversely

affect vehicle handling, and

lead to sudden tire failure. This

could result in loss of vehicle

control and potential injury.

CAUTION - Tire pressure

Always observe the following:

• Check tire pressure when the

tires are cold. (After vehicle

has been parked for at least

three hours or hasn't been

driven more than one mile (1.6

km) since startup.)

• Check the pressure of your

spare tire each time you check

the pressure of other tires.

• Never overload your vehicle.

Be careful not to overload a

vehicle luggage rack if your

vehicle is equipped with one.

• Worn, old tires can cause acci-

dents. If your tread is badly

worn, or if your tires have

been damaged, replace them.

CAUTION

• Warm tires normally exceed

recommended cold tire pres-

sures by 4 to 6 psi (28 to 41

kPa). Do not release air from

warm tires to adjust the pres-

sure or the tires will be under-

inflated.

• Be sure to reinstall the tire

inflation valve caps. Without

the valve cap, dirt or moisture

could get into the valve core

and cause air leakage. If a

valve cap is missing, install a

new one as soon as possible.

Information Provided by:

739

Maintenance

Remove the valve cap from the tire

valve stem. Press the tire gage firm-

ly onto the valve to get a pressure

measurement. If the cold tire inflation

pressure matches the recommended

pressure on the tire and loading

information label, no further adjust-

ment is necessary. If the pressure is

low, add air until you reach the rec-

ommended amount.

If you overfill the tire, release air by

pushing on the metal stem in the

center of the tire valve. Recheck the

tire pressure with the tire gage. Be

sure to put the valve caps back on

the valve stems. They help prevent

leaks by keeping out dirt and mois-

ture.

Tire rotation

To equalize tread wear, it is recom-

mended that the tires be rotated

every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or

sooner if irregular wear develops.

During rotation, check the tires for

correct balance.

When rotating tires, check for uneven

wear and damage. Abnormal wear is

usually caused by incorrect tire pres-

sure, improper wheel alignment, out-

of-balance wheels, severe braking or

severe cornering. Look for bumps or

bulges in the tread or side of tire.

Replace the tire if you find either of

these conditions. Replace the tire if

fabric or cord is visible. After rotation,

be sure to bring the front and rear tire

pressures to specification and check

lug nut tightness.

WARNING

• Inspect your tires frequently

for proper inflation as well as

wear and damage. Always use

a tire pressure gauge.

• Tires with too much or too little

pressure wear unevenly caus-

ing poor handling, loss of vehi-

cle control, and sudden tire

failure leading to accidents,

injuries, and even death. The

recommended cold tire pres-

sure for your vehicle can be

found in this manual and on

the tire label located on the dri-

ver's side center pillar.

• Worn tires can cause acci-

dents. Replace tires that are

worn, show uneven wear, or

are damaged.

• Remember to check the pres-

sure of your spare tire.

HYUNDAI recommends that

you check the spare every

time you check the pressure

of the other tires on your vehi-

cle.

Information Provided by:

Maintenance

407

Disc brake pads should be inspected

for wear whenever tires are rotated.

✽✽NOTICE

Rotate radial tires that have an

asymmetric tread pattern only from

front to rear and not from right to

left.

Wheel alignment and tire balance

The wheels on your vehicle were

aligned and balanced carefully at the

factory to give you the longest tire life

and best overall performance.

In most cases, you will not need to

have your wheels aligned again.

However, if you notice unusual tire

wear or your vehicle pulling one way

or the other, the alignment may need

to be reset.

If you notice your vehicle vibrating

when driving on a smooth road, your

wheels may need to be rebalanced.

OBH078040

Without a spare tire

WARNING

• Do not use the compact spare

tire (if equipped) for tire rota-

tion.

• Do not mix bias ply and radial

ply tires under any circum-

stances. This may cause

unusual handling characteris-

tics that could result in death,

severe injury, or property

damage.

CAUTION

Improper wheel weights can

damage your vehicle's alu-

minum wheels. Use only

approved wheel weights.

Information Provided by:

741

Maintenance

Tire replacement

If the tire is worn evenly, a tread wear

indicator will appear as a solid band

across the tread. This shows there is

less than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread

left on the tire. Replace the tire when

this happens.

Do not wait for the band to appear

across the entire tread before replac-

ing the tire.

OEN076053

Tread wear indicator WARNING - Replacing

tires

To reduce the chance or serious

or fatal injuries from an acci-

dent caused by tire failure or

loss of vehicle control:

• Replace tires that are worn,

show uneven wear, or are

damaged. Worn tires can

cause loss of braking effec-

tiveness, steering control, and

traction.

• Do not drive your vehicle with

too little or too much pressure

in your tires. This can lead to

uneven wear and tire failure.

• When replacing tires, never

mix radial and bias-ply tires

on the same car. You must

replace all tires (including the

spare) if moving from radial to

bias-ply tires.

(Continued)

• Using tires and wheel other

than the recommended sizes

could cause unusual handling

characteristics and poor vehi-

cle control, resulting in a seri-

ous accident.

• Wheels that do not meet

HYUNDAI’s specifications

may fit poorly and result in

damage to the vehicle or

unusual handling and poor

vehicle control.

• The ABS works by comparing

the speed of the wheels. Tire

size can affect wheel speed.

When replacing tires, all 4

tires must use the same size

originally supplied with the

vehicle. Using tires of a differ-

ent size can cause the ABS

(Anti-lock Brake System) and

ESC (Electronic Stability

Control) to work irregularly.

Information Provided by:

Maintenance

427

Compact spare tire replacement

(if equipped)

A compact spare tire has a shorter

tread life than a regular size tire.

Replace it when you can see the

tread wear indicator bars on the tire.

The replacement compact spare tire

should be the same size and design

tire as the one provided with your

new vehicle and should be mounted

on the same compact spare tire

wheel. The compact spare tire is not

designed to be mounted on a regular

size wheel, and the compact spare

tire wheel is not designed for mount-

ing a regular size tire.

Wheel replacement

When replacing the metal wheels for

any reason, make sure the new

wheels are equivalent to the original

factory units in diameter, rim width

and offset.

Tire traction

Tire traction can be reduced if you

drive on worn tires, tires that are

improperly inflated or on slippery

road surfaces. Tires should be

replaced when tread wear indicators

appear. To reduce the possibility of

losing control, slow down whenever

there is rain, snow or ice on the road.

Tire maintenance

In addition to proper inflation, correct

wheel alignment helps to decrease

tire wear. If you find a tire is worn

unevenly, have your dealer check the

wheel alignment.

When you have new tires installed,

make sure they are balanced. This

will increase vehicle ride comfort and

tire life. Additionally, a tire should

always be rebalanced if it is removed

from the wheel.

WARNING

A wheel that is not the correct

size may adversely affect wheel

and bearing life, braking and

stopping abilities, handling char-

acteristics, ground clearance,

body-to-tire clearance, snow

chain clearance, speedometer

and odometer calibration, head-

light aim and bumper height.

Information Provided by:

743

Maintenance

Tire sidewall labeling

This information identifies and

describes the fundamental charac-

teristics of the tire and also provides

the tire identification number (TIN)

for safety standard certification. The

TIN can be used to identify the tire in

case of a recall.

1. Manufacturer or brand name

Manufacturer or Brand name is

shown.

2. Tire size designation

A tire’s sidewall is marked with a tire

size designation. You will need this

information when selecting replace-

ment tires for your car. The following

explains what the letters and num-

bers in the tire size designation

mean.

Example tire size designation:

(These numbers are provided as an

example only; your tire size designa-

tor could vary depending on your

vehicle.)

P195/50R16 84H

P - Applicable vehicle type (tires

marked with the prefix “P’’ are

intended for use on passenger

cars or light trucks; however, not

all tires have this marking).

195 - Tire width in millimeters.

50 - Aspect ratio. The tire’s section

height as a percentage of its

width.

R - Tire construction code (Radial).

16 - Rim diameter in inches.

84 - Load Index, a numerical code

associated with the maximum

load the tire can carry.

H - Speed Rating Symbol. See the

speed rating chart in this section

for additional information.

Wheel size designation

Wheels are also marked with impor-

tant information that you need if you

ever have to replace one. The follow-

ing explains what the letters and

numbers in the wheel size designa-

tion mean.

Example wheel size designation:

6.0JX16

6.0 - Rim width in inches.

J - Rim contour designation.

16 - Rim diameter in inches.

I030B04JM

5,6

Information Provided by:

Maintenance

447

Tire speed ratings

The chart below lists many of the dif-

ferent speed ratings currently being

used for passenger car tires. The

speed rating is part of the tire size

designation on the sidewall of the

tire. This symbol corresponds to that

tire's designed maximum safe oper-

ating speed.

3. Checking tire life (TIN : Tire

Identification Number)

Any tires that are over 6 years old,

based on the manufacturing date,

(including the spare tire) should be

replaced by new ones. You can find

the manufacturing date on the tire

sidewall (possibly on the inside of the

wheel), displaying the DOT Code.

The DOT Code is a series of num-

bers on a tire consisting of numbers

and English letters. The manufactur-

ing date is designated by the last four

digits (characters) of the DOT code.

DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOO

The front part of the DOT means a

plant code number, tire size and

tread pattern and the last four num-

bers indicate week and year manu-

factured.

For example:

DOT XXXX XXXX 1613 represents

that the tire was produced in the 16th

week of 2013.

S 112 mph (180 km/h)

T 118 mph (190 km/h)

H 130 mph (210 km/h)

V 149 mph (240 km/h)

Z Above 149 mph (240 km/h)

Maximum Speed

Speed

Rating

Symbol

WARNING - Tire age

Tires degrade over time, even

when they are not being used.

Regardless of the remaining

tread, it is recommended that

tires generally be replaced after

six (6) years of normal service.

Heat caused by hot climates or

frequent high loading condi-

tions can accelerate the aging

process. Failure to follow this

warning can result in sudden

tire failure, which could lead to

a loss of control and an acci-

dent involving serious injury or

death.

Information Provided by:

745

Maintenance

4. Tire ply composition and material

The number of layers or plies of rub-

ber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire man-

ufacturers also must indicate the

materials in the tire, which include

steel, nylon, polyester, and others. The

letter "R" means radial ply construc-

tion; the letter "D" means diagonal or

bias ply construction; and the letter "B"

means belted-bias ply construction.

5. Maximum permissible inflation

pressure

This number is the greatest amount

of air pressure that should be put in

the tire. Do not exceed the maximum

permissible inflation pressure. Refer

to the Tire and Loading Information

label for recommended inflation

pressure.

6. Maximum load rating

This number indicates the maximum

load in kilograms and pounds that can

be carried by the tire. When replacing

the tires on the vehicle, always use a

tire that has the same load rating as

the factory installed tire.

7. Uniform tire quality grading

Quality grades can be found where

applicable on the tire sidewall

between tread shoulder and maxi-

mum section width.

For example: TREAD wear 200

TRACTION AA

TEMPERATURE A

Tread wear

The tread wear grade is a compara-

tive rating based on the wear rate of

the tire when tested under controlled

conditions on a specified govern-

ment test course. For example, a tire

graded 150 would wear one-and-a-

half times (1½) as well on the gov-

ernment course as a tire graded 100.

The relative performance of tires

depends upon the actual conditions

of their use, however, and may

depart significantly from the norm

due to variations in driving habits,

service practices and differences in

road characteristics and climate.

These grades are molded on the

side-walls of passenger vehicle tires.

The tires available as standard or

optional equipment on your vehicle

may vary with respect to grade.

Traction - AA, A, B & C

The traction grades, from highest to

lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those

grades represent the tire’s ability to

stop on wet pavement as measured

under controlled conditions on speci-

fied government test surfaces of

asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C

may have poor traction performance.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to

this tire is based on straight-

ahead braking traction tests,

and does not include accelera-

tion, cornering, hydroplaning,

or peak traction characteristics.

Information Provided by:

Maintenance

467

Temperature -A, B & C

The temperature grades are A (the

highest), B and C representing the

tire’s resistance to the generation of

heat and its ability to dissipate heat

when tested under controlled condi-

tions on a specified indoor laboratory

test wheel.

Sustained high temperature can

cause the material of the tire to

degenerate and reduce tire life, and

excessive temperature can lead to

sudden tire failure. The grade C cor-

responds to a level of performance

which all passenger car tires must

meet under the Federal Motor

Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.

Grades B and A represent higher

levels of performance on the labora-

tory test wheel than the minimum

required by law.

Low aspect ratio tire

(if equipped)

Low aspect ratio tires, whose aspect

ratio is lower than 50, are provided

for sporty looks.

Because the low aspect ratio tires

are optimized for handling and brak-

ing, it may be more uncomfortable to

ride in and there is more noise com-

pare with normal tires.

WARNING - Tire

temperature

The temperature grade for this

tire is established for a tire that

is properly inflated and not

overloaded. Excessive speed,

underinflation, or excessive

loading, either separately or in

combination, can cause heat

build-up and possible sudden

tire failure. This can cause loss

of vehicle control and serious

injury or death.

CAUTION

Because the sidewall of the low

aspect ratio tire is shorter than

the normal, the wheel and tire of

the low aspect ratio tire is easi-

er to be damaged. So, follow the

instructions below.

• When driving on a rough road

or off road, drive cautiously

because tires and wheels may

be damaged. And after driving,

inspect tires and wheels.

• When passing over a pothole,

speed bump, manhole, or curb

stone, drive slowly so that the

tires and wheels are not dam-

aged.

(Continued)

Information Provided by:

747

Maintenance

Tire terminology and definitions

Air Pressure: The amount of air

inside the tire pressing outward on

the tire. Air pressure is expressed in

pounds per square inch (psi) or kilo-

pascal (kPa).

Accessory Weight: This means the

combined weight of optional acces-

sories. Some examples of optional

accessories are, automatic

transaxle, power seats, and air con-

ditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a

tire's height to its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords

that is located between the plies and

the tread. Cords may be made from

steel or other reinforcing materials.

Bead: The tire bead contains steel

wires wrapped by steel cords that

hold the tire onto the rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in

which the plies are laid at alternate

angles less than 90 degrees to the

centerline of the tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of

air pressure in a tire, measured in

pounds per square inch (psi) or kilo-

pascals (kPa) before a tire has built

up heat from driving.

Curb Weight: This means the weight

of a motor vehicle with standard and

optional equipment including the

maximum capacity of fuel, oil and

coolant, but without passengers and

cargo.

DOT Markings: A code molded into

the sidewall of a tire signifying that

the tire is in compliance with the U.S.

Department of Transportation motor

vehicle safety standards. The DOT

code includes the Tire Identification

Number (TIN), an alphanumeric des-

ignator which can also identify the

tire manufacturer, production plant,

brand and date of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight

Rating for the Front Axle.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight

Rating for the Rear axle.

(Continued)

• If the tire is impacted, inspect

the tire condition or contact an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

• To prevent damage to the tire,

inspect the tire condition and

pressure every 1,800miles

(3,000km).

CAUTION

• It is not easy to recognize the

tire damage with your own

eyes. But if there is the slight-

est hint of tire damage, even

though you cannot see the tire

damage with your own eyes,

have the tire checked or

replaced because the tire

damage may cause air leak-

age from the tire.

• If the tire is damaged by driv-

ing on a rough road, off road,

pothole, manhole, or curb

stone, it will not be covered by

the warranty.

• You can find out the tire infor-

mation on the tire sidewall.

Information Provided by:

Maintenance

487

Intended Outboard Sidewall: The

side of an asymmetrical tire, that

must always face outward when

mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for

air pressure.

Load Index: An assigned number

ranging from 1 to 279 that corre-

sponds to the load carrying capacity

of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure: The

maximum air pressure to which a

cold tire may be inflated. The maxi-

mum air pressure is molded onto the

sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: The load

rating for a tire at the maximum per-

missible inflation pressure for that

tire.

Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight:

The sum of curb weight; accessory

weight; vehicle capacity weight; and

production options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: The

number of occupants a vehicle is

designed to seat multiplied by 150

pounds (68 kg).

Occupant Distribution: Designated

seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: The side

of a asymmetrical tire that has a par-

ticular side that faces outward when

mounted on a vehicle. The outward

facing sidewall bears white lettering

or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or

model name molding that is higher or

deeper than the same moldings on

the inner facing sidewall.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire

used on passenger cars and some

light duty trucks and multipurpose

vehicles.

Recommended Inflation Pressure:

Vehicle manufacturer's recommend-

ed tire inflation pressure and shown

on the tire placard.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in

which the ply cords that extend to the

beads are laid at 90 degrees to the

centerline of the tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tire and

upon which the tire beads are seat-

ed.

Sidewall: The portion of a tire

between the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating: An alphanumeric

code assigned to a tire indicating the

maximum speed at which a tire can

operate.

Traction: The friction between the

tire and the road surface. The

amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire that

comes into contact with the road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrow

bands, sometimes called "wear

bars," that show across the tread of a

tire when only 2/32 inch of tread

remains.

UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality

Grading Standards, a tire information

system that provides consumers with

ratings for a tire's traction, tempera-

ture and treadwear. Ratings are

determined by tire manufacturers

using government testing proce-

dures. The ratings are molded into

the sidewall of the tire.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: The num-

ber of designated seating positions

multiplied by 150 lbs. (68 kg) plus the

rated cargo and luggage load.

Information Provided by:

749

Maintenance

Vehicle Maximum Load on the

Tire: Load on an individual tire due to

curb and accessory weight plus

maximum occupant and cargo

weight.

Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire:

Load on an individual tire that is

determined by distributing to each

axle its share of the curb weight,

accessory weight, and normal occu-

pant weight and dviding by 2.

Vehicle Placard: A label permanent-

ly attached to a vehicle showing the

original equipment tire size and rec-

ommended inflation pressure.

All season tires

HYUNDAI specifies all season tires

on some models to provide good

performance for use all year round,

including snowy and icy road condi-

tions. All season tires are identified

by ALL SEASON and/or M+S (Mud

and Snow) on the tire sidewall. Snow

tires have better snow traction than

all season tires and may be more

appropriate in some areas.

Summer tires

HYUNDAI specifies summer tires on

some models to provide superior

performance on dry roads. Summer

tire performance is substantially

reduced in snow and ice. Summer

tires do not have the tire traction rat-

ing M+S (Mud and Snow) on the tire

side wall. if you plan to operate your

vehicle in snowy or icy conditions.

HYUNDAI recommends the use of

snow tires or all season tires on all

four wheels.

Snow tires

If you equip your car with snow tires,

they should be the same size and

have the same load capacity as the

original tires. Snow tires should be

installed on all four wheels; other-

wise, poor handling may result.

Snow tires should carry 4 psi (28

kPa) more air pressure than the

pressure recommended for the stan-

dard tires on the tire label on the dri-

ver's side of the center pillar, or up to

the maximum pressure shown on the

tire sidewall, whichever is less.

Do not drive faster than 75 mph (120

km/h) when your car is equipped with

snow tires.

Tire chains

Tire chains, if necessary, should be

installed on the front wheels.

Be sure that the chains are installed

in accordance with the manufactur-

er's instructions.

To minimize tire and chain wear, do

not continue to use tire chains when

they are no longer needed.

CAUTION

Since the sidewalls of radial

tires are thinner, they can be

damaged by mounting some

types of snow chains on them.

Therefore, the use of snow tires

is recommended instead of

snow chains.

Information Provided by:

Maintenance

507

Radial-ply tires

Radial-ply tires provide improved

tread life, road hazard resistance and

smoother high speed ride. The radi-

al-ply tires used on this vehicle are of

belted construction, and are selected

to complement the ride and handling

characteristics of your vehicle.

Radial-ply tires have the same load

carrying capacity, as bias-ply or bias

belted tires of the same size, and use

the same recommended inflation

pressure. Mixing of radial-ply tires

with bias-ply or bias belted tires is

not recommended. Any combina-

tions of radial-ply and bias-ply or bias

belted tires when used on the same

vehicle will seriously deteriorate

vehicle handling. The best rule to fol-

low is: Identical radial-ply tires should

always be used as a set of four.

Longer wearing tires can be more

susceptible to irregular tread wear. It

is very important to follow the tire

rotation interval shown in this section

to achieve the tread life potential of

these tires. Cuts and punctures in

radial-ply tires are repairable only in

the tread area, because of sidewall

flexing. Consult your tire dealer for

radial-ply tire repairs.

WARNING - Snow or ice

• When driving on roads cov-

ered with snow or ice, drive at

less than 20 mph (30 km/h).

• Use the SAE “S” class or wire

chains.

• If you hear noise caused by

chains contacting the body,

retighten the chain to avoid

contact with the vehicle body.

• To prevent body damage,

retighten the chains after driv-

ing 0.3~0.6 miles (0.5~1.0 km).

• Do not use tire chains on

vehicles equipped with alu-

minum wheels. In unavoid-

able circumstance, use a wire

type chain.

• Use wire chains less than 0.59

inches (15 mm) to prevent

damage to the chain’s con-

nection.

Information Provided by:

751

Maintenance

A vehicle’s electrical system is protected

from electrical overload damage by fuses.

This vehicle has 2 fuse panels, one locat-

ed in the driver’s side panel bolster, the

other in the engine compartment.

If any of your vehicle’s lights, accessories,

or controls do not work, check the appro-

priate circuit fuse. If a fuse has blown, the

element inside the fuse will be melted.

If the electrical system does not work, first

check the driver’s side fuse panel.

Before replacing a blown fuse, move to

safe place, turn off the engine and all

electric devices, and then disconnect the

negative battery cable.

Always replace a blown fuse with one of

the same rating.

If the replacement fuse blows, this indi-

cates an electrical problem. Avoid using

the system involved and immediately

consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Three kinds of fuses are used: blade type

for lower amperage rating, cartridge type,

and multi fuse for higher amperage ratings.

WARNING - Fuse replace-

ment

• Never replace a fuse with any-

thing but another fuse of the

same rating.

• A higher capacity fuse could

cause damage and possibly a fire.

• Never install a wire or aluminum

foil instead of the proper fuse -

even as a temporary repair. It may

cause extensive wiring damage

and a possible fire.

CAUTION

Do not use a screwdriver or any

other metal object to remove fuses

because it may cause a short circuit

and damage the system.

ORB072110

Normal

Blade type

Cartridge type

Multi fuse

Blown

Normal Blown

FUSES

Information Provided by:

Maintenance

527

✽✽NOTICE

The actual fuse/relay panel label may

differ from equipped items.

Instrument panel fuse replace-

ment

1. Turn the ignition switch and all other

switches off.

2. Open the fuse panel cover.

3. Pull the suspected fuse straight out.

Use the removal tool provided in the

engine compartment fuse panel.

4. Check the removed fuse; replace it if it

is blown.

5. Push in a new fuse of the same rating,

and make sure it fits tightly in the clips.

If it fits loosely, consult an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

If you do not have a spare, use a fuse of

the same rating from a circuit you may

not need for operating the vehicle, such

as the cigarette lighter fuse.

If the headlights or other electrical com-

ponents do not work and the fuses are

OK, check the fuse panel in the engine

compartment. If a fuse is blown, it must

be replaced.

CAUTION

• When replacing a blown fuse or

relay with a new one, make sure

the new fuse or relay fits tightly

into the clips. The incomplete fas-

tening fuse or relay may cause the

vehicle wiring and electric sys-

tems damage and a possible fire.

• Do not remove fuses, relays and

terminals fastened with bolts or

nuts. The fuses, relays and termi-

nals may be fastened incomplete-

ly, and it may cause a possible

fire. If fuses, relays and terminals

fastened with bolts or nuts are

blown, consult an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

• Do not input any other objects

except fuses or relays into

fuse/relay terminals such as a driv-

er or wiring. It may cause contact

failure and system malfunction.

ORB070018

Driver’s side panel

ORB070019

Information Provided by:

753

Maintenance

Memory fuse

Your vehicle is equipped with a memory

fuse to prevent battery discharge if your

vehicle is parked without being operated

for prolonged periods. Use the following

procedures before parking the vehicle for

prolonged periods.

1. Turn off the engine.

2. Turn off the headlights and tail lights.

3. Open the driver’s side panel cover and

pull up the memory fuse.

✽✽NOTICE

• If the memory fuse is pulled up from

the fuse panel, the warning chime,

audio, clock and interior lamps, etc.,

will not operate. Some items must be

reset after replacement. Refer to

“Battery” in this section.

• Even though the memory fuse is

pulled up, the battery can still be dis-

charged by operation of the head-

lights or other electrical devices.

• If you need to park your vehicle for

prolonged periods more than 1

month, pull up the memory fuse to

prevent the battery being discharged.

ORB070020

CAUTION

• Do not pull up the memory fuse

and always place the memory

fuse in the original position while

driving the vehicle.

• Do not pull up the memory fuse

repeatedly. The memory fuse may

be worn out.

Information Provided by:

Maintenance

547

Engine compartment fuse

replacement

1. Turn the ignition switch and all other

switches off.

2. Remove the fuse panel cover by

pressing the tab and pulling up.

3. Check the removed fuse; replace it if it

is blown. To remove or insert the fuse,

use the fuse puller in the engine com-

partment fuse panel.

4. Push in a new fuse of the same rating,

and make sure it fits tightly in the clips.

If it fits loosely, consult an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Multi fuse

If the multi fuse is blown, replace the fuse

with a new one of the same rating when

the ignition switch and all other switches

are off.

CAUTION

After checking the fuse panel in the

engine compartment, securely

install the fuse panel cover. If not,

electrical failures may occur from

water contact.

ORB070021 ORB070022

CAUTION

• Before removing the multi fuse,

disconnect the (-) terminal of bat-

tery.

• Do not disassemble or assemble

the multi fuse fastened with bolts

or nuts. The fuse may be fastened

incompletely, and it may cause a

possible fire. If the multi fuse is

blown, consult an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Information Provided by:

755

Maintenance

Fuse/relay panel description

Inside the fuse/relay panel covers, you

can find the fuse/relay label describing

fuse/relay name and capacity.

✽✽NOTICE

Not all fuse panel descriptions in this

manual may be applicable to your vehi-

cle. It is accurate at the time of printing.

When you inspect the fuse panel in your

vehicle, refer to the fuse panel label.

■Driver’s side panel ■Engine compartment

ORB070023/ORB070024

Information Provided by:

Maintenance

567

ORB074074A

Information Provided by:

757

Maintenance

Instrument panel (Driver’s side fuse panel)

Description Fuse rating Protected component

POWER OUTLET 15A Cigarette Lighter & Power Outlet (Power Outlet)

C/LIGHTER 15A Cigarette Lighter & Power Outlet (Cigarette Lighter)

ACC 10A Audio, Power Outside Mirror Switch

A/BAG IND 10A Instrument Cluster (Air Bag IND.)

A/BAG 10A SRS Control Module, Telltale, Passenger Occupant Detection Sensor

T/SIG 10A Hazard Switch

MDPS 10A EPS Control Module

WIPER RR 15A Multifunction Switch (Wiper), Rear Wiper Motor

6SPARE 15A Not Used

1SPARE 10A Not Used

FOG LAMP FRT 10A Front Fog Lamp Relay

DRL 10A DRL (Daytime Running Light) Relay

STOP LAMP 15A Stop Lamp Switch, Battery Sensor, Stop Lamp Relay, E/R Fuse & Relay Box (HAC Relay),

Data Link Connector

CLUSTER 10A Instrument Cluster (MICOM, IND.), BCM

IG1 10A Stop Lamp Switch, ECO Switch, Driver/Passenger Seat Heater Module,

Tire Pressure Monitoring Module, ATM Shift Lever Switch ILL. EPS Control Module, Rheostat

ABS 10A ABS Control Module, ESC Control Module,

ESC Off Switch, E/R Fuse & Relay Box (Multipurpose Check Connector, HAC Relay)

B/UP LAMP 10A Back-Up Lamp Switch

ECU 10A ECM, PCM

7SPARE 10A Not Used

2IG2 10A A/C Control Module, BCM, SMK Unit, Wiper Control Unit

HAZARD 15A Hazard Relay, Hazard Switch

2SPARE 25A Not Used

SUNROOF 15A Sunroof Motor

Information Provided by:

Maintenance

587

Description Fuse rating Protected component

3SPARE 10A Not Used

TCU 15A Vehicle Speed Sensor, Transaxle Range Switch

4SPARE 15A Not used

1IG2 10A Power Window Relay, A/C Control Module, Instrument Cluster (MICOM), BCM,

Sunroof Motor, E/R Fuse & Relay Box (Blower Relay)

WIPER FRT 25A Multifunction Switch (Wiper), Front Wiper Motor

DR LOCK 20A Door Lock/Unlock Relay, Two Turn Unlock Relay, Driver Door Lock Actuator

SAFETY

POWER WINDOW 25A Safety Power Window Module

S/HEATER 15A Driver/Passenger Seat Heater Module

5SPARE 10A Not Used

ROOM LP 1 10A Instrument Cluster (IND.,ILL.), Tire Pressure Monitoring Module, BCM, A/C Control Module,

Luggage Room Lamp, Trunk Room Lamp, Center Room Lamp, Overhead Console Lamp, Map Lamp

AUDIO 20A Audio

TAIL LAMP LH 10A Rear Combination Lamp LH, Head Lamp LH, Front Turn Signal Lamp LH,

License Lamp LH/RH (4Door), License Lamp (5Door)

TAIL LAMP RH 10A

Head Lamp RH, Rear Combination Lamp RH, Rheostat, Audio, Front Turn Signal Lamp RH,

Hazard Switch, Instrument Cluster (ILL.+), AUX & USB Jack, ESC Off Switch, A/C Switch,

ECO Switch, Multifunction Switch (Remote Control), A/C Control Module, Rear Defogger Switch,

Front Deicer Switch, ATM Shift Lever Switch ILL.

START 10A Transaxle Range Switch, Ignition Lock Switch

H/LAMP 10A Instrument Cluster, Engine Compartment Fuse & Relay Box (Head Lamp Relay)

P/WDW LH 25A Power Window Main Switch, Rear Power Window Switch LH

P/WDW RH 25A Power Window Main Switch, Rear Power Window Switch RH, Passenger Power Window Switch

HTD MIRR 10A ECM, PCM, Rear Defogger Switch, Driver Power Outside Mirror,

Passenger Power Outside Mirror

A/CON 10A A/C Control Module (Auto A/C)

BLOWER 10A ECM, PCM, Blower Switch, Blower Resistor, A/C Control Module (Manual A/C)

Information Provided by:

759

Maintenance

ORB074075A

Information Provided by:

Maintenance

607

Engine compartment main fuse panel

Description Fuse rating Protected component

MULTI FUSE

MDPS 80A EPS Control Module

BLOWER 40A Blower Relay

RR HTD 40A I/P Junction Box (Rear Defogger Relay)

ABS 2 40A ABS Control Module, ESC Control Module

ABS 1 40A ABS Control Module, ESC Control Module, Multipurpose Check Connector

ALT 125A Alternator, E/R Fuse & Relay Box

(Multi Fuse : ABS 1, ABS 2, MDPS, RR HTD, BLOWER, Fuse : A/CON)

B+1 50A I/P Junction Box (Power Connector Fuse : ROOM LP 1, AUDIO, Fuse : FOG LP FRT,

ROOM LP 2, STOP LP, Relay : Tail Lamp)

FUSE

IG2 40A Start Relay, Ignition Switch

IG1 40A Ignition Switch

ECU 1 30A Fuse : ECU 2, Engine Control Relay

C/FAN 40A Cooling Fan (High) Relay, Cooling Fan (Low) Relay

B+2 50A I/P Junction Box (Fuse : S/HEATER, SUNROOF, DR LOCK, HAZARD, Relay : Power Window)

HORN 10A Horn Relay

F/PUMP 15A Fuel Pump Relay

H/LAMP RH 10A Head Lamp RH

H/LAMP LH 10A Head Lamp LH

INJECTOR 15A ECM, PCM, Oil Control Valve #1/#2, Oxygen Sensor (Up)/(Down), Fuel Pump Relay

SENSOR 10A

ECM, PCM, Canister Purge Control Solenoid Valve, Variable Intake Solenoid Valve, Canister Close

Valve, Immobilizer Module, A/CON Relay, Cooling Fan (High) Relay, Cooling Fan (Low) Relay

ECU 2 10A ECM, PCM

IGN COIL 15A Ignition Coil #1 ~ #4, Condenser

B/UP LAMP 10A PCM, Transaxle Range Switch, Instrument Cluster,

Rear Combination Lamp LH/RH, ATM Shift Lever Switch ILL.

WIPER 10A ECM, PCM, Multifunction Switch (Wiper), Front Wiper Motor

Information Provided by:

761

Maintenance

LIGHT BULBS

Use only bulbs of the specified wattage.

✽✽NOTICE

After heavy, driving rain or washing,

headlight and taillight lenses could

appear frosty. This condition is caused by

the temperature difference between the

lamp inside and outside. This is similar

to the condensation on your windows

inside your vehicle during the rain and

doesn’t indicate a problem with your

vehicle. If the water leaks into the lamp

bulb circuitry, have the vehicle checked

by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

WARNING - Working on

the lights

Prior to working on the light, firmly

apply the parking brake, ensure

that the ignition switch is turned to

the LOCK position and turn off the

lights to avoid sudden movement

of the vehicle and burning your fin-

gers or receiving an electric shock.

CAUTION

Be sure to replace the burned-out

bulb with one of the same wattage

rating. Otherwise, it may cause

damage to the fuse or electrical

wiring system.

CAUTION

• If you don’t have necessary tools,

the correct bulbs and the expert-

ise, consult an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer. In many cases, it

is difficult to replace vehicle light

bulbs because other parts of the

vehicle must be removed before

you can get to the bulb. This is

especially true if you have to

remove the headlight assembly to

get to the bulb(s).

Removing/installing

the headlight

assembly can result in damage to

the vehicle.

• Do not install additional bulbs or

LED type bulbs. If you install that,

the lamp may not be operated

properly and fuse box or electrical

wiring system may have problem.

Information Provided by:

Maintenance

627

Headlight, position light, turn sig-

nal light, side marker light and

front fog light bulb replacement

(1) Headlight (High/Low)

(2) Front turn signal light / Position light

(3) Front turn signal light

(4) Position light

(5) Side marker

(6) Front fog light (if equipped)

Headlight /

Side marker (Bulb type only)

1. Open the hood.

2. Remove the headlight bulb cover by

turning it counterclockwise.

3. Disconnect the headlight bulb socket-

connector.

4. Unsnap the headlight bulb retaining

wire by depressing the end and push-

ing it upward.

5. Remove the bulb from the headlight

assembly.

6. Install a new headlight bulb and snap

the headlight bulb retaining wire into

position by aligning the wire with the

groove on the bulb.

7. Connect the headlight bulb socket-

connector.

8. Install the headlight bulb cover by turn-

ing it clockwise.

✽✽NOTICE

Always have the headlight aiming

adjusted after an accident or the head-

light assembly is reinstalled at an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

ORB070025

ORB073025

■MFR (Multi Focus Reflector) Headlamp

■Bi-Function Projection Headlamp

ORB074076N

■Bi-Function Projection Headlamp

ORB071048N

■MFR (Multi Focus Reflector) Headlamp

Information Provided by:

763

Maintenance

✽✽NOTICE - Bi-Function

Projection Headlamp

This headlamp is bi-function type that

switches the low beam to high or the

high beam to low using solenoid system.

So, sound may be heard when the head-

lamp switches the low beam to high or

the high beam to low and it does not

indicate malfunction of the headlamp.

(Continued)

• Always handle them carefully,

and avoid scratches and abra-

sions. If the bulbs are lit, avoid

contact with liquids. Never touch

the glass with bare hands.

Residual oil may cause the bulb

to overheat and burst when lit. A

bulb should be operated only

when installed in a headlight.

• If a bulb becomes damaged or

cracked, replace it immediately

and carefully dispose of it.

• Wear eye protection when chang-

ing a bulb. Allow the bulb to cool

down before handling it.

WARNING -

Halogen bulbs

• Halogen bulbs contain pressur-

ized gas that will produce flying

pieces of glass if broken.

(Continued)

ORB073078

ORB073079

■Headlamp (Low beam)

■Headlamp (High beam) OHD076046

ORB073072

■MFR (Multi Focus Reflector) Headlamp

■Bi-Function Projection Headlamp

Information Provided by:

Maintenance

647

Turn signal light /

Position light (Bulb type only)

1. Turn off the engine and open the hood.

2. Remove the socket from the assembly

by turning the socket counterclockwise

until the tabs on the socket align with

the slots on the assembly.

3. Remove the bulb from the socket by

pressing it in and rotating it counter-

clockwise until the tabs on the bulb

align with the slots in the socket. Pull

the bulb out of the socket

4. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into

the socket and rotating it until it locks

into place.

5. Install the socket in the assembly by

aligning the tabs on the socket with the

slots in the assembly. Push the socket

into the assembly and turn the socket

clockwise.

Front fog light bulbs (if equipped)

1. Remove the front bumper under cover.

2. Reach your hand into the back of the

front bumper.

3. Disconnect the power connector from

the socket.

ORBC070030

ORBC070031

ORBC070049

ORB074077N

■MFR (Multi Focus Reflector) Headlamp

■Bi-Function Projection Headlamp

Information Provided by:

765

Maintenance

4. Remove the bulb-socket from the

housing by turning the socket counter

clockwise until the tabs on the socket

align with the slots on the housing.

5. Install the new bulb-socket into the

housing by aligning the tabs on the

socket with the slots in the housing.

Push the socket into the housing and

turn the socket clockwise.

6. Connect the power connector to the

socket.

7. Reinstall the front bumper under cover.

Side repeater light bulb replace-

ment (if equipped)

Type A

1. Remove the light assembly from the

vehicle by prying the lens and pulling

the assembly out.

2. Disconnect the bulb electrical connec-

tor.

3. Separate the socket and the lens parts

by turning the socket counterclockwise

until the tabs on the socket align with

the slots on the lens part.

4. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight

out.

5. Insert a new bulb in the socket.

6. Reassemble the socket and the lens

part.

7. Connect the bulb electrical connector.

8. Reinstall the light assembly to the

body of the vehicle.

ORB070068

Information Provided by:

Maintenance

667

Type B

If the light bulb does not operate, have

the vehicle checked by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Rear combination light bulb

replacement (4 Door)

(1) Stop and tail light

(2) Rear turn signal light

(3) Back-up light

(4) Side marker

1. Open the trunk lid.

2. Remove the service cover by pulling

out the service cover.

ORB070054 ORBC070033 ORBC070034

Information Provided by:

767

Maintenance

3. Remove the socket from the assembly

by turning the socket counterclockwise

until the tabs on the socket align with

the slots on the assembly.

4. Remove the bulb from the socket by

pressing it in and rotating it counter-

clockwise until the tabs on the bulb

align with the slots in the socket. Pull

the bulb out of the socket.

5. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into

the socket and rotating it until it locks

into place.

6. Install the socket in the assembly by

aligning the tabs on the socket with the

slots in the assembly. Push the socket

into the assembly and turn the socket

clockwise.

7. Install the service cover by putting it

into the service hole.

Rear combination light bulb

replacement (5 Door)

(1) Tail light

(2) Rear turn signal light

(3) Back-up light

(4) Stop and tail light

(5) Side marker

1. Open the tailgate.

2. Loosen the light assembly retaining

screws with a cross-tip screwdriver.

3. Remove the rear combination light

assembly from the body of the vehicle.

ORB071056

ORB071057

ORB071051N ORB071033

Information Provided by:

Maintenance

687

4. Remove the socket from the assembly

by turning the socket counterclockwise

until the tabs on the socket align with

the slots on the assembly.

5. Remove the bulb from the socket by

pressing it in and rotating it counter-

clockwise until the tabs on the bulb

align with the slots in the socket. Pull

the bulb out of the socket.

6. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into

the socket and rotating it until it locks

into place.

7. Install the socket in the assembly by

aligning the tabs on the socket with the

slots in the assembly. Push the socket

into the assembly and turn the socket

clockwise.

8. Reinstall the light assembly to the

body of the vehicle.

9. Tighten the screws.

High mounted stop light bulb

replacement (if equipped)

4 Door

1. Open the trunk lid.

2. Remove the socket by turning it coun-

terclockwise.

3. Replace the bulb from the socket.

4. Install the socket by turning it clock-

wise.

ORBC070043

ORBC070036

ORB071058N

Information Provided by:

769

Maintenance

5 Door

If the light is not operating, have the vehi-

cle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer.

License plate light bulb replace-

ment

4 Door

1. Remove the trunk trim.

2. Remove the socket by turning it coun-

terclockwise.

3. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight

out.

4. Install a new bulb.

5. Install the socket by turning it clock-

wise.

6. Install the trunk trim.

ORBC070041

ORBC070042

ORB071043

Type (LED/Bulb)

Information Provided by:

Maintenance

707

5 Door

1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, remove

the light assembly from the vehicle by

prying the lens gently.

2. Remove the socket from the lens.

3. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight

out.

4. Install a new bulb in the socket and

install the socket to the lens.

5. Reinstall the lens securely. Interior light bulb replacement

1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, gently

pry the lens from the interior light

housing.

2. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight

out.

3. Install a new bulb in the socket.

4. Align the lens tabs with the interior

light housing notches and snap the

lens into place.

5. If the map lamp and room lamp are not

operating, have the vehicle checked by

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

WARNING

Prior to working on the Interior

Lights, ensure that the “OFF” but-

ton is depressed to avoid burning

your fingers or receiving an electric

shock.

CAUTION

Use care not to dirty or damage

lens, lens tab, and plastic housings.

ORB070065

ORB070064

Front map lamp

Room lamp

ORB071055

CAUTION

Use care not to dirty or damage

lens, lens tab, and plastic housings.

Information Provided by:

771

Maintenance

APPEARANCE CARE

Exterior care

Exterior general caution

It is very important to follow the label

directions when using any chemical

cleaner or polish. Read all warning and

caution statements that appear on the

label.

Finish maintenance

Washing

To help protect your vehicle’s finish from

rust and deterioration, wash it thoroughly

and frequently at least once a month with

lukewarm or cold water.

If you use your vehicle for off-road driv-

ing, you should wash it after each off-

road trip. Pay special attention to the

removal of any accumulation of salt, dirt,

mud, and other foreign materials. Make

sure the drain holes in the lower edges of

the doors and rocker panels are kept

clear and clean.

Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings,

industrial pollution and similar deposits

can damage your vehicle’s finish if not

removed immediately.

Even prompt washing with plain water

may not completely remove all these

deposits. A mild soap, safe for use on

painted surfaces, may be used.

After washing, rinse the vehicle thor-

oughly with lukewarm or cold water. Do

not allow soap to dry on the finish.

CAUTION

• Do not use strong soap, chemical

detergents or hot water, and do

not wash the vehicle in direct

sunlight or when the body of the

vehicle is warm.

• Be careful when washing the side

windows of your vehicle.

Especially, with high-pressure

water, water may leak through the

windows and wet the interior.

• To prevent damage to the plastic

parts and lamps, do not clean

with chemical solvents or strong

detergents.

WARNING - Wet brakes

After washing the vehicle, test the

brakes while driving slowly to see if

they have been affected by water. If

braking performance is impaired,

dry the brakes by applying them

lightly while maintaining a slow for-

ward speed.

CAUTION

• Water washing in the engine com-

partment including high pressure

water washing may cause the fail-

ure of electrical circuits or engine

and related components located

in the engine compartment.

• Never allow water or other liquids

to come in contact with electri-

cal/electronic components and

air duct inside the vehicle as this

may damage them.

OJB037800

Information Provided by:

Maintenance

727

Waxing

Wax the vehicle when water will no

longer bead on the paint.

Always wash and dry the vehicle before

waxing. Use a good quality liquid or

paste wax, and follow the manufacturer’s

instructions. Wax all metal trim to protect

it and to maintain its luster.

Removing oil, tar, and similar materials

with a spot remover will usually strip the

wax from the finish. Be sure to re-wax

these areas even if the rest of the vehicle

does not yet need waxing.

Finish damage repair

Deep scratches or stone chips in the

painted surface must be repaired

promptly. Exposed metal will quickly rust

and may develop into a major repair

expense.

✽✽NOTICE

If your vehicle is damaged and requires

any metal repair or replacement, be sure

the body shop applies anti-corrosion

materials to the parts repaired or

replaced.

Bright-metal maintenance

• To remove road tar and insects, use a

tar remover, not a scraper or other

sharp object.

• To protect the surfaces of bright-metal

parts from corrosion, apply a coating of

wax or chrome preservative and rub to

a high luster.

• During winter weather or in coastal

areas, cover the bright metal parts with

a heavier coating of wax or preserva-

tive. If necessary, coat the parts with

non-corrosive petroleum jelly or other

protective compound.

Underbody maintenance

Corrosive materials used for ice and

snow removal and dust control may col-

lect on the underbody. If these materials

are not removed, accelerated rusting can

occur on underbody parts such as the

fuel lines, frame, floor pan and exhaust

system, even though they have been

treated with rust protection.

Thoroughly flush the vehicle underbody

and wheel openings with lukewarm or

cold water once a month, after off-road

driving and at the end of each winter. Pay

special attention to these areas because

it is difficult to see all the mud and dirt. It

will do more harm than good to wet down

the road grime without removing it. The

lower edges of doors, rocker panels, and

frame members have drain holes that

should not be allowed to clog with dirt;

trapped water in these areas can cause

rusting.

CAUTION

• Wiping dust or dirt off the body

with a dry cloth will scratch the

finish.

• Do not use steel wool, abrasive

cleaners, or strong detergents

containing highly alkaline or

caustic agents on chrome-plated

or anodized aluminum parts. This

may result in damage to the pro-

tective coating and cause discol-

oration or paint deterioration.

Information Provided by:

773

Maintenance

Aluminum or chrome wheel mainte-

nance

The aluminum or chrome wheels are

coated with a clear protective finish.

• Do not use any abrasive cleaner, pol-

ishing compound, solvent, or wire

brushes on aluminum or chrome

wheels. They may scratch or damage

the finish.

• Clean the wheel when it has cooled.

• Use only a mild soap or neutral deter-

gent, and rinse thoroughly with water.

Also, be sure to clean the wheels after

driving on salted roads. This helps pre-

vent corrosion.

• Avoid washing the wheels with high-

speed car wash brushes.

• Do not use any alkaline or acid deter-

gent. It may damage and corrode the

aluminum or chrome wheels coated

with a clear protective finish.

Corrosion protection

Protecting your vehicle from corrosion

By using the most advanced design and

construction practices to combat corro-

sion, we produce cars of the highest

quality. However, this is only part of the

job. To achieve the long-term corrosion

resistance your vehicle can deliver, the

owner's cooperation and assistance is

also required.

Common causes of corrosion

The most common causes of corrosion

on your car are:

• Road salt, dirt and moisture that is

allowed to accumulate underneath the

car.

• Removal of paint or protective coatings

by stones, gravel, abrasion or minor

scrapes and dents which leave unpro-

tected metal exposed to corrosion.

WARNING

After washing the vehicle, test the

brakes while driving slowly to see if

they have been affected by water. If

braking performance is impaired,

dry the brakes by applying them

lightly while maintaining a slow for-

ward speed.

Information Provided by:

Maintenance

747

High-corrosion areas

If you live in an area where your car is

regularly exposed to corrosive materials,

corrosion protection is particularly impor-

tant. Some of the common causes of

accelerated corrosion are road salts,

dust control chemicals, ocean air and

industrial pollution.

Moisture breeds corrosion

Moisture creates the conditions in which

corrosion is most likely to occur. For

example, corrosion is accelerated by

high humidity, particularly when tempera-

tures are just above freezing. In such

conditions, the corrosive material is kept

in contact with the car surfaces by mois-

ture that is slow to evaporate.

Mud is particularly corrosive because it is

slow to dry and holds moisture in contact

with the vehicle. Although the mud

appears to be dry, it can still retain the

moisture and promote corrosion.

High temperatures can also accelerate

corrosion of parts that are not properly

ventilated so the moisture can be dis-

persed. For all these reasons, it is par-

ticularly important to keep your car clean

and free of mud or accumulations of

other materials. This applies not only to

the visible surfaces but particularly to the

underside of the car.

To help prevent corrosion

You can help prevent corrosion from get-

ting started by observing the following:

Keep your car clean

The best way to prevent corrosion is to

keep your car clean and free of corrosive

materials. Attention to the underside of

the car is particularly important.

• If you live in a high-corrosion area —

where road salts are used, near the

ocean, areas with industrial pollution,

acid rain, etc.—, you should take extra

care to prevent corrosion. In winter,

hose off the underside of your car at

least once a month and be sure to

clean the underside thoroughly when

winter is over.

Information Provided by:

775

Maintenance

• When cleaning underneath the car,

give particular attention to the compo-

nents under the fenders and other

areas that are hidden from view. Do a

thorough job; just dampening the accu-

mulated mud rather than washing it

away will accelerate corrosion rather

than prevent it. Water under high pres-

sure and steam are particularly effec-

tive in removing accumulated mud and

corrosive materials.

• When cleaning lower door panels,

rocker panels and frame members, be

sure that drain holes are kept open so

that moisture can escape and not be

trapped inside to accelerate corrosion.

Keep your garage dry

Don't park your car in a damp, poorly

ventilated garage. This creates a favor-

able environment for corrosion. This is

particularly true if you wash your car in

the garage or drive it into the garage

when it is still wet or covered with snow,

ice or mud. Even a heated garage can

contribute to corrosion unless it is well

ventilated so moisture is dispersed.

Keep paint and trim in good condition

Scratches or chips in the finish should be

covered with "touch-up" paint as soon as

possible to reduce the possibility of cor-

rosion. If bare metal is showing through,

the attention of a qualified body and paint

shop is recommended.

Bird droppings : Bird droppings are high-

ly corrosive and may damage painted

surfaces in just a few hours. Always

remove bird droppings as soon as possi-

ble.

Don't neglect the interior

Moisture can collect under the floor mats

and carpeting to cause corrosion. Check

under the mats periodically to be sure

the carpeting is dry. Use particular care if

you carry fertilizers, cleaning materials or

chemicals in the car.

These should be carried only in proper

containers and any spills or leaks should

be cleaned up, flushed with clean water

and thoroughly dried.

Interior care

Interior general precautions

Prevent chemicals such as perfume, cos-

metic oil, sun cream, hand cleaner, and

air freshener from contacting the interior

parts because they may cause damage

or discoloration. If they do contact the

interior parts, wipe them off immediately.

See the instructions for the proper way to

clean vinyl.

CAUTION

• Never allow water or other liquids

to come in contact with electri-

cal/electronic components inside

the vehicle as this may damage

them.

• When cleaning leather products

(steering wheel, seats etc.), use

neutral detergents or low alcohol

content solutions. If you use high

alcohol content solutions or

acid/alkaline detergents, the color

of the leather may fade or the sur-

face may get stripped off.

Information Provided by:

Maintenance

767

Cleaning the upholstery and interior

trim

Vinyl

Remove dust and loose dirt from vinyl

with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.

Clean vinyl surfaces with a vinyl cleaner.

Fabric

Remove dust and loose dirt from fabric

with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.

Clean with a mild soap solution recom-

mended for upholstery or carpets.

Remove fresh spots immediately with a

fabric spot cleaner. If fresh spots do not

receive immediate attention, the fabric

can be stained and its color can be

affected. Also, its fire-resistant properties

can be reduced if the material is not

properly maintained.

Cleaning the lap/shoulder belt web-

bing

Clean the belt webbing with any mild

soap solution recommended for cleaning

upholstery or carpet. Follow the instruc-

tions provided with the soap. Do not

bleach or re-dye the webbing because

this may weaken it.

Cleaning the interior window glass

If the interior glass surfaces of the vehi-

cle become fogged (that is, covered with

an oily, greasy or waxy film), they should

be cleaned with glass cleaner. Follow the

directions on the glass cleaner container.

CAUTION

Using anything but recommended

cleaners and procedures may affect

the fabric’s appearance and fire-

resistant properties.

CAUTION

Do not scrape or scratch the inside

of the rear window. This may result

in damage to the rear window

defroster grid.

Information Provided by:

777

Maintenance

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

The emission control system of your

vehicle is covered by a written limited

warranty. Please see the warranty infor-

mation contained in the Owner’s

Handbook & Warranty Information book-

let in your vehicle.

Your vehicle is equipped with an emis-

sion control system to meet all applicable

emission regulations.

There are three emission control sys-

tems, as follows.

(1) Crankcase emission control system

(2) Evaporative emission control system

(3) Exhaust emission control system

In order to assure the proper function of

the emission control systems, it is recom-

mended that you have your car inspected

and maintained by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer in accordance with the

maintenance schedule in this manual.

Caution for the Inspection and

Maintenance Test (With Electronic

Stability Control (ESC) system)

• To prevent the vehicle from misfir-

ing during dynamometer testing,

turn the Electronic Stability Control

(ESC) system off by pressing the

ESC switch.

• After dynamometer testing is com-

pleted, turn the ESC system back on

by pressing the ESC switch again.

1. Crankcase emission control

system

The positive crankcase ventilation sys-

tem is employed to prevent air pollution

caused by blow-by gases being emitted

from the crankcase.This system supplies

fresh filtered air to the crankcase through

the air intake hose. Inside the crankcase,

the fresh air mixes with blow-by gases,

which then pass through the PCV valve

into the induction system.

2. Evaporative emission control

(including ORVR: Onboard

Refueling Vapor Recovery)

system

The Evaporative Emission Control

System is designed to prevent fuel

vapors from escaping into the atmos-

phere.

(The ORVR system is designed to allow

the vapors from the fuel tank to be

loaded into a canister while refueling at

the gas station, preventing the escape of

fuel vapors into the atmosphere.)

Information Provided by:

Maintenance

787

Canister

Fuel vapors generated inside the fuel

tank are absorbed and stored in the

onboard canister. When the engine is

running, the fuel vapors absorbed in the

canister are drawn into the surge tank

through the purge control solenoid valve.

Purge Control Solenoid Valve (PCSV)

The purge control solenoid valve is con-

trolled by the Engine Control Module

(ECM); when the engine coolant temper-

ature is low during idling, the PCSV clos-

es so that evaporated fuel is not taken

into the engine. After the engine warms-

up during ordinary driving, the PCSV

opens to introduce evaporated fuel to the

engine.

3. Exhaust emission control

system

The Exhaust Emission Control System is

a highly effective system which controls

exhaust emissions while maintaining

good vehicle performance.

Vehicle modifications

• This vehicle should not be modified.

Modification of your vehicle could

affect its performance, safety or dura-

bility and may even violate governmen-

tal safety and emissions regulations.

In addition, damage or performance

problems resulting from any modification

may not be covered under warranty.

• If you use unauthorized electronic

devices, it may cause the vehicle to

operate abnormally, wire damage, bat-

tery discharge and fire. For your safety,

do not use unauthorized electronic

devices.

Engine exhaust gas precautions

(carbon monoxide)

• Carbon monoxide can be present with

other exhaust fumes. Therefore, if you

smell exhaust fumes of any kind inside

your vehicle, have it inspected and

repaired immediately. If you ever sus-

pect exhaust fumes are coming into

your vehicle, drive it only with all the

windows fully open. Have your vehicle

checked and repaired immediately.

WARNING - Exhaust

Engine exhaust gases contain car-

bon monoxide (CO). Though color-

less and odorless, it is dangerous

and could be lethal if inhaled.

Follow the instructions on this

page to avoid CO poisoning.

CALIFORNIA PROPOSI-

TION 65 WARNING

Engine exhaust and a wide variety

of automobile components and

parts, including components found

in the interior furnishings in a vehi-

cle, contain or emit chemicals

known to the State of California to

cause cancer and birth defects and

reproductive harm. In addition, cer-

tain fluids contained in vehicles

and certain products of component

wear contain or emit chemicals

known to the State of California to

cause cancer and birth defects or

other reproductive harm.

Information Provided by:

779

Maintenance

• Do not operate the engine in confined

or closed areas (such as garages) any

more than what is necessary to move

the vehicle in or out of the area.

• When the vehicle is stopped in an

open area for more than a short time

with the engine running, adjust the

ventilation system (as needed) to draw

outside air into the vehicle.

• Never sit in a parked or stopped vehi-

cle for any extended time with the

engine running.

• When the engine stalls or fails to start,

excessive attempts to restart the

engine may cause damage to the

emission control system.

Operating precautions for catalytic

converters (if equipped)

Your vehicle is equipped with a catalytic

converter emission control device.

Therefore, the following precautions

must be observed:

• Use only UNLEADED FUEL for gaso-

line engines.

• Do not operate the vehicle when there

are signs of engine malfunction, such

as misfire or a noticeable loss of per-

formance.

• Do not misuse or abuse the engine.

Examples of misuse are coasting with

the ignition off and descending steep

grades in gear with the ignition off.

• Do not operate the engine at high idle

speed for extended periods (5 minutes

or more).

• Do not modify or tamper with any part

of the engine or emission control sys-

tem. All inspections and adjustments

must be made by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

• Avoid driving with a extremely low fuel

level. Running out of fuel could cause

the engine to misfire, damaging the

catalytic converter.

Failure to observe these precautions

could result in damage to the catalytic

converter and to your vehicle.

Additionally, such actions could void your

warranties.

WARNING - Fire

• A hot exhaust system can ignite

flammable items under your vehi-

cle. Do not park, idle, or drive the

vehicle over or near flammable

objects, such as grass, vegeta-

tion, paper, leaves, etc.

• The exhaust system and catalytic

system are very hot while the

engine is running or immediately

after the engine is turned off. Keep

away from the exhaust system

and catalytic, you may get burned.

Also, do not remove the heat sink

around the exhaust system, do

not seal the bottom of the vehicle

or do not coat the vehicle for cor-

rosion control. It may present a

fire risk under certain conditions.

Information Provided by:

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE NOTICE

Perchlorate Material-special handling

may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/haz-

ardouswaste/perchlorate.

Notice to California Vehicle Dismantlers:

Perchlorate containing materials, such as

air bag inflators, seatbelt pretensioners

and keyless remote entry batteries, must

be disposed of according to Title 22

California Code of Regulations Section

67384.10 (a).

780

Maintenance

Information Provided by:

Engine / 8-2

Dimensions / 8-2

Bulb wattage / 8-2

Tires and wheels / 8-3

Capacity/weight / 8-3

Recommended lubricants and capacities / 8-4

Vehicle identification number (VIN) / 8-6

Vehicle certification label / 8-6

Tire specification and pressure label / 8-7

Engine number / 8-7

Refrigerant label / 8-7

Consumer information / 8-8

Reporting safety defects / 8-9

Specifications, Consumer information,

Reporting safety defects

Information Provided by:

Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defeccts

ENGINE BULB WATTAGE

Item 4 Door 5 Door

Overall length 172 (4370) 162 (4115)

Overall width 66.9 (1700) 66.9 (1700)

Overall height 57.1 (1450) 57.1 (1450)

Front tread P175/70 R14 59.3 (1507) 59.3 (1507)

P195/50 R16 58.6 (1489) 58.6 (1489)

Rear tread P175/70 R14 59.5 (1511) 59.5 (1511)

P195/50 R16 58.8 (1493) 58.8 (1493)

Wheelbase 101.2 (2570) 101.2 (2570)

Item Gasoline 1.6

Displacement

cu. in (cc) 97.09 (1591)

Bore x Stroke

in. (mm) 3.03x3.36 (77x85.44)

Firing order 1-3-4-2

No. of cylinders 4, In-line

DIMENSIONS

in (mm)

* : If equipped

Type A : MFR (Multi Focus Reflector) Headlamp

Type B : Bi-Function Projection Headlamp

Light Bulb Wattage Bulb type

Headlights (Low/High) Type A 55/60 HB2 L/L

Type B 60 9005L+

Front turn signal lights 28/8 PY28/8W

Position lights Type A 5W5W L/L

Type B LED LED

Side marker lamp Type A 5W5W L/L

Type B LED LED

Side repeater lights* 5WY5W

Front fog lights* 27 GE881

Stop and tail light* 28/8 P28/8W

Rear turn signal lights 4 Door 27 PY27W

5 Door 27 PY27W

Back-up lights 16 W16W

High mounted stop

light*

4 Door 16 W16W

5 Door 5W5W L/L

License plate lights 5W5W L/L

Map lamps 8FESTOON

Room lamp 8FESTOON

Luggage lamp* 5W5W

Information Provided by:

Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defeccts

TIRES AND WHEELS

Item Tire size Wheel size

Inflation pressure bar psi (kPa) Wheel lug nut torque

lb•ft (kg•m, N•m)

Normal load*1Maximum load

Front Rear Front Rear

Full size tire

P175/70 R14 5.5Jx14

33 (230) 33 (230) 33 (230) 33 (230)

65~79

(9~11, 88~107)

P195/50 R16 6.0Jx16

Compact

spare tire*2

(if equipped)

T125/80 D15 3.5Jx15 60 (420) 60 (420) 60 (420) 60 (420)

CAPACITY/WEIGHT

Item Gasoline 1.6

Gross vehicle weight

lbs. (kg)

4 Door 3,527 (1600)

5 Door 3,549 (1610)

Luggage volume

cu ft (l)

4 Door 13.7 (389)

5 Door 21.2 (600)

*1Normal load : Up to 3 persons

*2If your vehicle is not equipped with a compact spare tire, your vehicle will be equipped with a Tire Mobility Kit.

CAUTION

When replacing tires, use the same size originally supplied with the vehicle.

Using tires of a different size can damage the related parts or make it work irregularly.

Information Provided by:

Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defeccts

RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES

To help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance and durability, use only lubricants of the proper quality. The correct

lubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results in improved fuel economy.

These lubricants and fluids are recommended for use in your vehicle.

*1Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on the next page.

*2Engine oils labeled Energy Conserving Oil are now available. Along with other additional benefits, they contribute to fuel economy by reducing

the amount of fuel necessary to overcome engine friction. Often, these improvements are difficult to measure in everyday driving, but in a year’s

time, they can offer significant cost and energy savings.

*3If the API service SM engine oil is not available in your country, you are able to use API service SL.

Lubricant Volume Classification

Engine oil *1 *2 (drain and refill)

Recommends 3.8 US qt. (3.6 l)API Service SM*3,

ILSAC GF-4 or above

Manual transaxle fluid 1.9 ~ 2.01 US qt.

(1.8~1.9 l)

HA SYN MTF (SK),

HD SYN MTF (H.K.SHELL),

GS PAO MTF (GS CALTEX),

API GL-4, SAE 75W/85 (HYUNDAI Genuine transaxle fluid)

Automatic transaxle fluid 7.71 US qt. (7.3 l)

MICHANG ATF SP-4, SK ATF SP-4

NOCA ATF SP-4, HYUNDAI genuine ATF SP-4 or other

brands meeting the above specification approved by

Hyundai Motor Co.,

Coolant 4.7 US qt. (5.3 l)Mixture of antifreeze and water (Ethylene glycol base

coolant for aluminum radiator)

Brake/clutch fluid 0.7~0.8 US qt. (0.7~0.8 l)FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4

Fuel 11.4 US gal. (43 l)Unleaded gasoline

Information Provided by:

Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defeccts

Recommended SAE viscosity

number

Engine oil viscosity (thickness) has an

effect on fuel economy and cold weather

operating (engine start and engine oil

flowability). Lower viscosity engine oils

can provide better fuel economy and cold

weather performance, however, higher

viscosity engine oils are required for sat-

isfactory lubrication in hot weather. Using

oils of any viscosity other than those rec-

ommended could result in engine dam-

age.

When choosing an oil, consider the range

of temperature your vehicle will be oper-

ated in before the next oil change.

Proceed to select the recommended oil

viscosity from the chart.

CAUTION

Always be sure to clean the area

around any filler plug, drain plug, or

dipstick before checking or drain-

ing any lubricant. This is especially

important in dusty or sandy areas

and when the vehicle is used on

unpaved roads. Cleaning the plug

and dipstick areas will prevent dirt

and grit from entering the engine

and other mechanisms that could

be damaged.

*1. For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil of

a viscosity grade SAE 5W-20 (API SM / ILSAC GF-4). However, if

the engine oil is not available in your country, select the proper

engine oil using the engine oil viscosity chart.

Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers

Temperature

-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50

-10 0 20 40 60 80 100 120

Engine Oil *1

10W-30

5W-20, 5W-30

°C

(°F)

Information Provided by:

Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defeccts

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

NUMBER (VIN)

The vehicle identification number (VIN) is

the number used in registering your car

and in all legal matters pertaining to its

ownership, etc.

The number is punched on the floor

under the front passenger’s seat. To

check the number, open the cover.

The VIN is also on a plate attached to the

top of the dashboard. The number on the

plate can easily be seen through the

windshield from outside.

VEHICLE CERTIFICATION

LABEL

The vehicle certification label attached

on the driver’s side center pillar contains

the vehicle identification number (VIN).

ORBC080001 ORBC080002

VIN label

ORB080003

Information Provided by:

Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defeccts

TIRE SPECIFICATION AND

PRESSURE LABEL

The tires supplied on your new vehicle

are chosen to provide the best perform-

ance for normal driving.

The tire label located on the driver's side

center pillar gives the tire pressures rec-

ommended for your car.

ENGINE NUMBER

The engine number is stamped on the

engine block as shown in the drawing.

REFRIGERANT LABEL

(IF EQUIPPED)

The refrigerant label is located on the

underside of the hood.

The label contains the following informa-

tion:

• Type of refrigerant/oil

• Amount of refrigerant/oil

ORB071070N

ORB070017 ORB080005

Information Provided by:

Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defeccts

This consumer information has been pre-

pared in accordance with regulations

issued by the National Highway Traffic

Safety Administration of the U.S.

Department of Transportation. Your

Hyundai dealer will help answer any

questions you may have as you read this

information.

Hyundai motor vehicles are designed

and manufactured to meet or exceed all

applicable safety standards.

For your safety, however, we strongly

urge you to read and follow all directions

in this Owner's Manual, particularly the

information under the headings

"NOTICE", "CAUTION" and "WARN-

ING".

If, after reading this manual, you have

any questions regarding the operation of

your vehicle, please contact your nearest

Hyundai Motor America Regional Office

as listed in the following:

Eastern Region: Connecticut, Delaware,

Maine, Massachusetts, New Hampshire,

New Jersey, New York, Pennsylvania,

Rhode Island, Vermont.

Eastern Region

1122 Cranbury South River Road

Jamesburg, NJ 08831

(800) 633-5151

Southern Region: Florida, Georgia,

Maryland, North Carolina, South

Carolina, Virginia, West Virginia.

Southern Region

3025 Chastain Meadows Parkway

suite 100 Marietta, GA 30066

(800) 633-5151

South Central Region: Alabama,

Arkansas, Louisiana, Mississippi, New

Mexico, Oklahoma, Tennessee, Texas.

South Central Region

1421 South Beltline Road, Suite 400

Coppell, TX 75019

(800) 633-5151

Central Region: Illinois, Indiana, lowa,

Kentucky, Michigan, Minnesota,

Nebraska, North Dakota, South Dakota,

Ohio, Wisconsin, Kansas, Missouri.

Central Region

1705 Sequoia Drive

Aurora, Illinois 60506

(800) 633-5151

Western Region: Alaska, Arizona,

California Colorado, Hawaii, ldaho,

Montana, Nevada, Oregon, Utah,

Washington, Wyoming.

Western Region

10550 Talbert Avenue

P.O.Box 20850

Fountain Valley, California 92728-0850

(800) 633-5151

CONSUMER INFORMATION

Information Provided by:

Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defeccts

If you believe that your vehicle has a

defect which could cause a crash or

could cause injury or death, you should

immediately inform the National Highway

Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in

addition to notifying HYUNDAI MOTOR

AMERICA. If NHTSA receives similar

complaints, it may open an investigation,

and if it finds that a safety defect exists in

a group of vehicles, it may order a recall

and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA

cannot become involved in individual

problems between you, your dealer, or

HYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the

Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-

327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to

http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey

Avenue, SE West Building Washington,

DC 20590. You can also obtain other

information about motor vehicle safety

from http://www.safercar.gov.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

Information Provided by:

Index

Information Provided by:

Index

Active ECO system ·······················································5-31

Air bag warning label ····················································3-60

Air bag warning light·····················································3-37

Air bags··········································································3-34

Air bag warning label················································3-60

Air bag warning light ················································3-37

Curtain air bag···························································3-51

Driver's and passenger's front air bag ·······················3-46

Occupant detection system········································3-41

Side impact air bag····················································3-50

SRS components and functions ································3-37

Air cleaner ·····································································7-28

Antenna (Roof) ······························································4-94

Anti-lock brake system (ABS) ······································5-19

Appearance care·····························································7-70

Exterior care ······························································7-70

Interior care ·······························································7-74

Armrest(front)··································································3-6

Audio system ·································································4-94

Roof antenna ·····························································4-94

Steering wheel audio control·····································4-95

Automatic climate control system ·································4-74

Air conditioning ························································4-79

Automatic heating and air conditioning····················4-75

Manual heating and air conditioning ························4-76

Automatic transaxle Sports mode··································5-12

Automatic transaxle ·······················································5-10

Aux, USB and iPod®port ·············································4-91

Base curb weight ···························································5-47

Battery············································································7-34

Battery saver function····················································4-52

Before driving··································································5-3

Bottle holders, see cup holders······································4-87

Brake system··································································5-16

Anti-lock brake system (ABS)··································5-19

Electronic stability control (ESC)·····························5-21

Hill-start assist control ··············································5-26

Parking brake ····························································5-17

Power brakes ·····························································5-16

Vehicle stability management ···································5-25

Brakes/clutch fluid·························································7-26

Bulb replacement ···························································7-61

Bulb wattage ····································································8-2

California perchlorate notice ·········································7-79

Capacities (Lubricants)····················································8-4

Care

Exterior care ······························································7-70

Interior care ·······························································7-74

Tire care·····································································7-37

Information Provided by:

Index

Cargo capacity ·······························································5-43

Cargo weight··································································5-47

Center console storage···················································4-84

Central door lock switch··················································4-9

Certification label ··························································5-45

Certification label ····························································8-6

Chains

Tire chains ·································································5-39

Changing tires································································6-18

Checking tire inflation pressure·····································7-38

Child restraint system ····················································3-26

Lower anchor ····························································3-32

Seat belt·····································································3-27

Tether anchor system·················································3-30

Child-protector rear door lock ·······································4-11

Climate control air filter ················································4-73

Climate control air filter ················································7-28

Clock (Digital) ·······························································4-89

Clothes hanger ·······························································4-89

Combined instrument, see instrument cluster ···············4-36

Compact spare tire ·························································6-23

Compact spare tire replacement ····································7-42

Coolant···········································································7-23

Cooling fluid, see engine coolant ··································7-23

Crankcase emission control system·······························7-76

Cruise control system ····················································5-27

Cup holder ·····································································4-87

Curtain air bag ·······························································3-51

Dashboard illumination,

see instrument panel illumination ·····························4-37

Dashboard, see instrument cluster·································4-36

Defogging (Windshield) ················································4-81

Defogging logic (Windshield) ·······································4-83

Defroster (Rear window) ···············································4-64

Defrosting (Windshield) ················································4-81

Digital clock···································································4-89

Dimensions ······································································8-2

Display illumination, see instrument panel illumination··4-37

Displays, see instrument cluster ····································4-36

Door locks········································································4-7

Central door lock switch ·············································4-9

Child-protector rear door lock···································4-11

Drinks holders, see cup holders·····································4-87

Driver's 3-point seat belt················································3-16

Driver's and passenger's front air bag····························3-46

Driving at night······························································5-35

Driving in flooded areas ················································5-36

Driving in the rain ·························································5-36

Economical operation ····················································5-32

Electric power steering ··················································4-30

Electronic stability control (ESC) ·································5-21

Information Provided by:

Index

Emergency starting ··························································6-4

Jump starting ·······························································6-4

Push starting ································································6-5

Emergency while driving·················································6-2

Emission control system················································7-76

Crankcase emission control system ··························7-76

Evaporative emission control System·······················7-76

Exhaust emission control system ······························7-77

Engine ··············································································8-2

Engine compartment························································2-4

Engine coolant ·······························································7-23

Engine number·································································8-7

Engine oil·······································································7-22

Engine overheats······························································6-6

Engine temperature gauge ·············································4-38

Engine will not start·························································6-3

Evaporative emission control system ····························7-75

Exhaust emission control system···································7-76

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items ···············7-19

Exterior care···································································7-70

Flat tire (with spare tire)················································6-17

Jack and tools ····························································6-17

Changing tires ···························································6-18

Compact spare tire ····················································6-23

Removing and storing the spare tire ·························6-18

Flat tire (with tire mobility kit) ·····································6-25

Floor mat anchor(s) ·······················································4-90

Fluid

Brakes/clutch fluid ····················································7-26

Washer fluid ······························································7-27

Folding the rear seat ······················································3-11

Front passenger and rear seat belt ·································3-17

Front seat adjustment·······················································3-5

Fuel filler lid ··································································4-23

Fuel gauge······································································4-39

Fuel requirements ····························································1-3

Fuses ··············································································7-51

Fuse/relay panel description······································7-54

Instrument panel fuse ················································7-52

Memory fuse ·····························································7-52

Multi fuse ··································································7-54

Gauge

Engine temperature gauge·········································4-38

Fuel gauge ·································································4-39

GAW (Gross axle weight) ·············································5-47

GAWR (Gross axle weight rating) ································5-47

Glove box·······································································4-85

GVW (Gross vehicle weight) ········································5-47

GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating) ···························5-47

Information Provided by:

Index

Hazard warning flasher··················································4-52

Hazardous driving conditions········································5-34

Headrest(front)·································································3-6

Headrest(rear) ··································································3-9

Height adjustment··························································3-16

Highway driving ····························································5-37

Hill-start assist control···················································5-26

Hood···············································································4-21

Horn ···············································································4-32

How to use this manual ···················································1-2

Indicators and warnings·················································4-43

Inside rearview mirror ···················································4-32

Instrument cluster ··························································4-36

Engine temperature gauge·········································4-38

Fuel gauge ·································································4-39

Instrument panel illumination ···································4-37

Odometer···································································4-40

Speedometer ······························································4-37

Tachometer ································································4-37

Trip computer ····························································4-39

Warning and indicators ·············································4-43

Instrument panel fuse·····················································7-52

Instrument panel illumination········································4-37

Instrument panel overview ··············································2-3

Interior care····································································7-74

Interior features······························································4-87

Aux, USB and iPod®port·········································4-91

Cargo area cover ·······················································4-90

Clothes hanger···························································4-89

Cup holder·································································4-87

Digital clock ······························································4-89

Floor mat anchor(s)···················································4-90

Power outlet ······························································4-88

Sunvisor·····································································4-87

Interior light ···································································4-61

Interior overview ·····························································2-2

Jack and tools·································································6-17

Jump starting····································································6-4

Key···················································································5-5

Keys ·················································································4-3

Information Provided by:

Index

Label

Air bag warning label················································3-60

Refrigerant label··························································8-7

Tire sidewall labeling ················································7-43

Tire specification and pressure label···························8-7

Vehicle certification label············································8-6

Light bulbs ·····································································7-60

Lighting··········································································4-52

Battery saver function ···············································4-52

Lower anchor ·································································3-32

Lubricants and capacities·················································8-4

Luggage net ···································································4-86

Maintenance

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items···········7-19

Maintenance services ··················································7-3

Maintenance under severe usage conditions·············7-18

Normal maintenance schedule ····································7-7

Owner maintenance·····················································7-4

Scheduled maintenance service ··································7-6

Tire maintenance ·······················································7-42

Maintenance schedule······················································7-6

Maintenance under severe usage conditions·············7-18

Normal maintenance schedule ····································7-7

Maintenance services·······················································7-3

Manual climate control system······································4-65

Air conditioning ························································4-70

Climate control air filter············································4-73

Heating and air conditioning·····································4-66

Manual transaxle······························································5-7

Memory fuse··································································7-52

Mirrors ···········································································4-32

Day/night rearview mirror ········································4-32

Inside rearview mirror···············································4-32

Outside rearview mirror ············································4-33

Multi fuse·······································································7-54

Occupant detection system ············································3-41

Odometer ·······································································4-40

Oil (Engine) ···································································7-22

Outside rearview mirror·················································4-33

Overheats ·········································································6-6

Owner maintenance ·························································7-4

Information Provided by:

Index

Parking brake ·································································5-17

Parking brake ·································································7-26

Power brakes··································································5-16

Power outlet ···································································4-88

Power window lock button············································4-19

Pre-tensioner seat belt····················································3-20

Push starting·····································································6-5

Rear center belt······························································3-18

Rear seat···········································································3-9

Recommended cold tire inflation pressures ··················7-36

Recommended lubricants and capacities·························8-4

Recommended SAE viscosity number························8-5

Refrigerant label ······························································8-7

Remote keyless entry·······················································4-6

Replacement light bulb··················································7-61

Road warning···································································6-2

Rocking the vehicle ·······················································5-34

Roof antenna··································································4-94

Scheduled maintenance service ·······································7-6

Maintenance under severe usage conditions·············7-18

Normal maintenance schedule ····································7-7

Seat belt warning ···························································3-15

Seat belts········································································3-14

Rear center belt ·························································3-18

Height adjustment ·····················································3-16

Pre-tensioner seat belt ···············································3-20

Seat belt - Driver's 3-point system····························3-16

Seat belt warning·······················································3-15

Seat belts - Front passenger and rear seat·················3-17

Seatback pocket ·······························································3-8

Seating capacity ·····························································5-43

Seats ·················································································3-2

Armrest(front) ·····························································3-6

Folding the rear seat ··················································3-11

Front seat adjustment ··················································3-5

Headrest(front) ····························································3-6

Headrest(rear)······························································3-9

Rear seat ······································································3-9

Seatback pocket···························································3-8

Side impact air bag ························································3-50

Sliding armrest·······························································4-84

Smooth cornering···························································5-35

Snow tires ······································································5-38

Information Provided by:

Index

Spare tire

Compact spare tire ····················································6-23

Compact spare tire replacement································7-42

Removing and storing the spare tire ·························6-18

Special driving conditions ·············································5-34

Driving at night ·························································5-35

Driving in flooded areas············································5-36

Driving in the rain·····················································5-36

Hazardous driving conditions ···································5-34

Highway driving························································5-37

Rocking the vehicle···················································5-34

Smooth cornering ······················································5-35

Speedometer···································································4-35

Sports mode ···································································5-12

SRS components and functions ·····································3-37

Starting difficulties, see engine will not start ··················6-3

Steering wheel································································4-30

Electric power steering··············································4-30

Horn···········································································4-32

Tilt and telescopic steering········································4-31

Steering wheel audio control ·········································4-95

Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit ··················5-43

Storage compartment ·····················································4-84

Center console storage ··············································4-84

Glove box ··································································4-85

Luggage net·······························································4-86

Sliding armrest ··························································4-84

Sunglass holder ·························································4-85

Sunglass holder······························································4-85

Sunroof···········································································4-26

Sunvisor ·········································································4-87

Tachometer·····································································4-37

Tailgate···········································································4-14

Tether anchor system ·····················································3-30

Tilt and telescopic steering ···········································4-31

Tire and loading information label ································5-42

Tire chains······································································5-39

Tire mobility kit ·····························································6-25

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)··············6-7, 6-12

Tire specification and pressure label ·······························8-7

Tires and wheels ····························································7-37

Checking tire inflation pressure ································7-38

Compact spare tire replacement································7-42

Low aspect ratio tire··················································7-46

Recommended cold tire inflation pressures··············7-37

Tire care·····································································7-37

Tire maintenance ·······················································7-42

Tire replacement························································7-41

Tire rotation·······························································7-39

Tire sidewall labeling ················································7-43

Tire traction ·······························································7-42

Wheel alignment and tire balance·····························7-40

Wheel replacement····················································7-42

Information Provided by:

Index

Tires and wheels ······························································8-3

Towing ···········································································6-31

Towing capacity·····························································5-43

Transaxle

Automatic transaxle ··················································5-10

Manual transaxle ·························································5-7

Trip computer ································································4-39

Trunk··············································································4-12

Vehicle break-in process··················································1-5

Vehicle capacity weight ·················································5-42

Vehicle certification label ················································8-6

Vehicle curb weight ·······················································5-47

Vehicle data collection and event data recorders ············1-6

Vehicle identification number (VIN)·······························8-6

Vehicle load limit···························································5-42

Cargo capacity···························································5-43

Certification label······················································5-45

Seating capacity ························································5-43

Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit··············5-43

Tire and loading information label····························5-42

Towing capacity ························································5-43

Vehicle capacity weight ············································5-42

Vehicle stability management········································5-25

Vehicle weight ·······························································5-47

Base curb weight·······················································5-47

Cargo weight ·····························································5-47

GAW (Gross axle weight)·········································5-47

GAWR (Gross axle weight rating)····························5-47

GVW (Gross vehicle weight)····································5-47

GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating) ······················5-47

Vehicle curb weight···················································5-47

Volume/weight ·································································8-3

Warning and indicators ··················································4-43

Washer fluid···································································7-26

Weight/volume·································································8-3

Wheel alignment and tire balance ·································7-39

Wheel replacement ························································7-42

Windows ········································································4-16

Auto down window···················································4-18

Auto up/down window··············································4-18

Power window lock button ·······································4-19

Windshield defrosting and defogging····························4-81

Defogging logic·························································4-83

Winter driving································································5-38

Snow tires··································································5-38

Tire chains ·································································5-39

Wiper blades ··································································7-31

Wipers and washers ·······················································4-57

Information Provided by:

RB HMA Foreword.qxp 2014 Accent

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation